FM-DL100 E03 PDF

FUJI MEDICAL DRY LASER IMAGER
DRYPIX PRIMA
FM-DL 100
SERVICE MANUAL
Copyright © 2008, 2009 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic, mechani-
cal, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 020-201-03E

First Edition Sep. 20, 2008
Revised Edition Oct. 26, 2009
Printed in Japan
0.1
1. HANDLING THIS SERVICE MANUAL 1.3 About Notation in the Manual
n Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

1.1 About This Service Manual The notation formats of "WARNING", "CAUTION", "INSTRUCTIONS", "NOTE",
"REMARKS" and "REFERENCE" are shown below.
n Scope
WARNING
This Service Manual applies to the Fuji Medical Dry Imager DRYPIX PRIMA FM-DL
100. Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in death or
serious injuries.
n Notation of Unit Symbols
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but CAUTION
are permitted under the Measurement Law are partially used. Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in light or
moderate injuries, or serious malfunction (unrecoverable or difficult to recover)
1.2 Service Manual Appropriations of the equipment.
1. All rights are reserved by the FUJIFILM Corporation (FUJIFILM).

<INSTRUCTIONS>
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service
personnel. Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in damage to
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore the equipment, or other problems.
proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILM's prior consent is required in regard to the following. <NOTE>
• Manual copying in whole or in part. Indicated where special attention is required during a work procedure.
• Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
• Manual uses for purposes other than technical service. <REMARKS>
5. The contents of this manual are subject to changes for product improvement. Indicated where description of the term used or supplementary explanation is given.
n Indication of Refer To
The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
{MC:1.1_Cover}
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.1

0.2
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That
Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.
n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

Name Inspection Calibration
Digital multimeter 
Densitometer 
Steel ruler (300 mm) 
1.5 Machine Names Described in This Manual

Of the machines (modalities) which can be connected to this equipment, CR-
IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL (PRIMA system), CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL (V4.1 or
later), and CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (V5.0 or later) may be indicated as “settings-
changeable models” (models in which this equipment settings can be changed) in this
manual.
This means that the names of machines described as “settings-changeable models”
mean CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL (PRIMA system), CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL
(V4.1 or later), or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (V5.0 or later).
1.6 Multi Modality Equipment

Installing Modality Connection Software in this equipment with main unit software
version V2.0 or later (hereafter called V2.0) enables various modalities to be
connected,
Such equipment are called “multi modality equipment” in this manual.
On the other hand, equipment not connected to the various modalities are called “non-
multi modality equipment”.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.2

GENERAL CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION 0.3
SAFETY PRECAUTION
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION.................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-1

1.1 General Precautions.................................SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation.......SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
2. LABELS......................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-5

2.1 Laser Caution Labels...............................SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
2.2 Other Labels.............................................SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding
Earth Mark..............................................SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
2.4 Power Cable Caution Label....................SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING
FOR LASER RADIATION
EXPOSURE PREVENTION........... SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS... SAFETY PRECAUTION-13
5. CLASSIFICATION........................ SAFETY PRECAUTION-13

GENERAL CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS 0.4
SPECIFICATIONS
1. SPECIFICATIONS................................ SPECIFICATIONS-1
1.1 Part Name.........................................................SPECIFICATIONS-1
1.2 List of Optional Parts.........................................SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.3 General Specifications......................................SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.4 Dimensions and Weight....................................SPECIFICATIONS-5
1.5 Environmental Requirements............................SPECIFICATIONS-6
1.6 Electrical Requirements....................................SPECIFICATIONS-7
1.7 Equipment Installation Space............................SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.7.1 Installation Space..........................................................SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.7.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work........................ SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.8 Disposing the Equipment..................................SPECIFICATIONS-8

GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.5
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT................................... MD-1 3.2 Removal Unit...........................................................................MD-20

3.2.1 Suction Cup Arm Home Position......................................................... MD-20
1.1 Functions of Equipment.............................................................MD-1
3.2.2 Film Suction........................................................................................ MD-20
1.2 System Configuration.............................................................MD-1.1 3.2.3 Film Flapping Operations.................................................................... MD-21
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts................................MD-3 3.2.4 Film Release....................................................................................... MD-21
1.3.1 External View........................................................................................ MD-3 3.2.5 Removal Conveyance......................................................................... MD-22
1.3.2 Operation Panel.................................................................................... MD-4 3.2.6 Returning to Home Position................................................................ MD-22
1.3.3 Layout of Units...................................................................................... MD-5 3.3 Conveyor Unit..........................................................................MD-23
1.3.4 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions................................. MD-6 3.3.1 Conveyance........................................................................................ MD-23
1.3.5 Layout of Boards................................................................................. MD-13 3.3.2 Striking against Stopper...................................................................... MD-23
3.3.3 Gripping by Conveyor Unit Exit Roller................................................ MD-24
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING 3.3.4 Film Edge Sensor................................................................................ MD-24
THE EQUIPMENT.............................................. MD-14 3.3.5 Pre-recording Conveyance................................................................. MD-25
2.1 Power ON Operations.............................................................MD-14 3.4 Sub-scanning Unit...................................................................MD-26
2.2 Error Processing......................................................................MD-15 3.4.1 Sub-scanning Conveyance................................................................. MD-26
2.3 Power OFF Operations...........................................................MD-16 3.4.2 Recording Conveyance....................................................................... MD-26
3.5 Scanning Optics Unit...............................................................MD-27
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL 3.5.1 Scanner Unit....................................................................................... MD-27
OPERATIONS..................................................... MD-17 3.5.2 Laser Exposure................................................................................... MD-27
3.1 Film Loading Unit....................................................................MD-17 3.5.3 Density Measurement Section............................................................ MD-28
3.1.1 Film Sizes............................................................................................ MD-17 3.5.4 Temperature Correction...................................................................... MD-28
3.1.2 Film Tray Detection/Film Size Identification........................................ MD-17 3.6 Heat Development Unit...........................................................MD-29
3.1.3 Film Pack/Shutter Detection............................................................... MD-18 3.6.1 Heat Development.............................................................................. MD-29
3.1.4 Shutter Lock Mechanism.................................................................... MD-18 3.6.2 Temperature Control........................................................................... MD-29
3.1.5 Tray Detection/Tray Lock.................................................................... MD-19 3.7 Film Release Unit....................................................................MD-30
3.7.1 Film Discharge.................................................................................... MD-30
3.7.2 High Speed Discharge........................................................................ MD-30

GENERAL CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.6
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL....... MD-31

4.1 System Block Diagram............................................................MD-31
4.2 Interlock Control......................................................................MD-32
4.3 Functions of Boards................................................................MD-34
4.3.1 CPU Board.......................................................................................... MD-34
4.3.2 PRN Board.......................................................................................... MD-35
4.3.3 SND Board.......................................................................................... MD-36
4.3.4 HTD Board.......................................................................................... MD-38
4.3.5 PSU27A (Power Supply Unit)............................................................. MD-38
4.3.6 PSU28B (Power Supply Unit)............................................................. MD-39
5. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................ MD-40

5.1 Image Input.............................................................................MD-40
5.1.1 Valid Services...................................................................................... MD-40
5.1.2 Service Availability.............................................................................. MD-40
5.1.3 Image Data Reception Availability....................................................... MD-40
5.1.4 DICOM Settings and Restrictions....................................................... MD-40
5.2 Image Spool Management Function.......................................MD-41
5.3 Image Processing (Multi Modality Equipment Only)................MD-43
5.3.1 Image Processing 1............................................................................ MD-43
5.3.2 Image Processing 2............................................................................ MD-44
5.3.3 Annotation........................................................................................... MD-45
6. PRINTING FORMATS......................................... MD-46

6.1 Reading the Format Name......................................................MD-46
6.2 Standard Formats....................................................................MD-46
6.3 Mixed Formats.........................................................................MD-47

GENERAL CONTENTS TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) 0.7
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD........................... MT-1
2. ERROR CODE................................................... MT-1.1

2.1 Checking Error Codes............................................................ MT-1.1
2.2 Format of Detailed Information.............................................. MT-1.2
2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information....................MT-1.2
2.2.2 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed Information.....MT-1.5
2.2.3 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors Detailed
Information..........................................................................................MT-1.5
2.2.4 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors Detailed
Information..........................................................................................MT-1.6
3. ERROR CODE TABLE........................................ MT-1.8
4. ACQUIRING ART-PC LOGS................................ MT-62

GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.8
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS, 4. REMOVAL UNIT................................................. MC-22

AND ADJUSTMENTS................................................. MC-1 4.1 Removal Unit...........................................................................MC-22
CONTENTS................................................................ MC-2 4.2 Suction Cup Arm.....................................................................MC-24
4.3 Removal Drive Cam................................................................MC-25
1. COVERS............................................................... MC-4 4.4 Suction Cup.............................................................................MC-29
1.1 Covers which can be Removed Individually..............................MC-4 4.5 Bellows....................................................................................MC-30
1.1.1 Rear Cover............................................................................................ MC-4
4.6 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB2).................................MC-32
1.1.2 Belt Cover............................................................................................. MC-4
4.7 Film Removing Motor (MB1)...................................................MC-33
1.2 Covers which Need to be Removed in Certain Order...............MC-5
1.2.1 Left Cover.............................................................................................. MC-5 4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB2).....................................MC-34
1.2.2 Upper Cover.......................................................................................... MC-6 4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB1).........................MC-35
1.2.3 Film Release Unit Cover....................................................................... MC-6
1.2.4 Film Loading Unit Cover....................................................................... MC-7 5. CONVEYOR UNIT.............................................. MC-37
1.2.5 Lower Right Cover................................................................................ MC-7
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly..................................................MC-37
1.2.6 Right Cover........................................................................................... MC-8
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly................................MC-39
2. FRAME................................................................. MC-9 5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)...........................................MC-40
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly.........................................................MC-9 5.4 Stopper Assembly...................................................................MC-41
5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1)......................................................MC-42
3. FILM LOADING UNIT......................................... MC-11
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower)...........................................MC-43
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit...........................................................MC-11
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5).........................................................MC-44
3.2 Film Tray..................................................................................MC-13
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide................................MC-45
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA2)...................................................MC-14
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller.......................................................MC-46
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly................................................................MC-18
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1)...............................................MC-47
3.5 Shutter Lock Mechanism.........................................................MC-19
5.11 Conveyance Gear...................................................................MC-49
3.6 Squeezing Roller (Upper)........................................................MC-20
3.7 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor (SA1).............................MC-21

GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.9
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT....................................... MC-50 10. CONTROLLER.................................................... MC-79

6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit................................MC-50 10.1 PSU27A/PSU28B Board.........................................................MC-79
6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller........................................................MC-53 10.2 PRN28A Board........................................................................MC-81
6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1).....................................................MC-56 10.3 CPU28A Board........................................................................MC-83
6.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-56 10.4 DIMM.......................................................................................MC-84
6.3.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor.............................. MC-57.1
10.5 CF (Compact Flash Memory)..................................................MC-85
6.4 Flywheel..................................................................................MC-58
6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)............................MC-61 11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE....... MC-86
11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT........................................... MC-65 (or Settings-Changeable Models)............................................MC-87
7.1 Scanner Unit............................................................................MC-65 11.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation....................................................................... MC-65 (or Settings-Changeable Models)....................................................... MC-87
7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit.................................... MC-67 11.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing............................... MC-88
7.1.3 Replacing the Scanner Unit (When Changing from 839Y0060 to 11.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing........................................... MC-89
839Y100057)................................................................................... MC-67.1
12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH MEMORY
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT.............................. MC-68 (CF).................................................................... MC-91
8.1 Film Cooling Section...............................................................MC-68 12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing.........MC-91
8.2 Heat Development Rack Assembly.........................................MC-69 12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF..............................MC-92
8.3 Heat Development Roller........................................................MC-71
13. CLEANING THE DUST-PROOF GLASS OF
8.4 Thermal Protector....................................................................MC-72 THE SCANNER UNIT (839Y100057 ONLY)....... MC-94
8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor (MG1).................MC-74
8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide.................................MC-75
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT......................................... MC-76

9.1 Film Release Unit....................................................................MC-76
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board (LED28A)...........MC-78

GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.10
SERVICE MODE (MU)
1. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY)................................MU-1 2.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree...............................................................MU-17

1.1 U-Utility Menu Tree....................................................................MU-1 2.4 Details of PC-Utility Commands..............................................MU-19
[1] System information and setup..................................................... MU-19
1.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility...............................................MU-1 [1-1] Setting1.............................................................................. MU-19
1.3 Details of U-Utility Commands..................................................MU-1 [1-1-1] Check Version......................................................... MU-19
[U-1] Automatic Density Correction........................................................ MU-1 [1-1-1a] Input Serial No........................................................ MU-19
[U-2] Outputting QC Test Pattern............................................................ MU-1 [1-1-2] Set DICOM............................................................. MU-19
[U-3] Reset Film Counters...................................................................... MU-1 [1-1-2-1] AE Title.......................................................... MU-19
[U-4] Setting the Sensitive Material Correction Parameter..................... MU-1 [1-1-2-2] Port No.......................................................... MU-19
[U-5] Setting the Date and Time............................................................. MU-1 [1-1-3] Set Network............................................................ MU-20
[U-6] SMPTE Pattern........................................................................... MU-1.1 [1-1-3-1] IP Address..................................................... MU-20
[1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask................................................. MU-20
2. PC-UTILITY.........................................................MU-2 [1-1-3-3] Gateway........................................................ MU-20
[1-1-3-4] Host Name.................................................... MU-20
2.1 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing..............................MU-2 [1-1-4] Mac Address........................................................... MU-21
2.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing........................................................... MU-2 [1-1-5] Registration service pc........................................... MU-21
2.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing......................................... MU-3 [1-2] Setting2.............................................................................. MU-21
[1-2-1] Set Rem.Films........................................................ MU-21
2.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC............................................... MU-3
[1-2-2] Set Trays................................................................. MU-21
2.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols.................................................................... MU-5 [1-2-3] Enable QC.............................................................. MU-21
2.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder......................................................... MU-7 [1-2-4] Set Target Den........................................................ MU-22
2.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for [1-2-5] Printing Dmax......................................................... MU-22
Servicing............................................................................................... MU-8 [1-2-6] Auto F.D.C.............................................................. MU-22
[1-2-7] Set Film infomation................................................. MU-22
2.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations..................................................MU-12 [1-2-8] Display indv. data.................................................... MU-22
2.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network....................................... MU-12 [1-3] Setting3.............................................................................. MU-23
2.2.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility).............................. MU-12 [1-3-1] Set SMPTE............................................................. MU-23
2.2.3 PC-Utility Operations........................................................................... MU-14 [1-3-2] Set Date.................................................................. MU-23
2.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment............................................................. MU-16 [1-3-3] Ele Save Mode....................................................... MU-23
[1-3-4] Set Alarm................................................................ MU-23
[1-3-5] Reboot.................................................................... MU-23
[1-3-6] Set Power Supply Synchronization......................... MU-24
[1-3-7] Film Characteristic ID............................................. MU-24
[1-3-8] Power Supply Voltage............................................. MU-24

[1-4] Initialize.............................................................................. MU-25 [3-5-2] Magnify................................................................... MU-38

[1-4-1] Save Data............................................................... MU-25 [3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type............................................ MU-38
[1-4-2] Initialize................................................................... MU-25 [3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/
[1-4-3] Recover.................................................................. MU-25 Crop Behavior............................................... MU-39
[1-5] Log data............................................................................. MU-25 [3-5-2-3] Magnification Type........................................ MU-40
[1-5-1] Display Error Log.................................................... MU-25 [3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size.................................. MU-40
[1-5-2] Clear Error Log....................................................... MU-25 [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type............................ MU-40
[1-5-3] Display DICOM Log................................................ MU-25 [3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type................................ MU-40
[1-5-4] Logging Mode......................................................... MU-26 [3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size...................... MU-41
[2] Transfer Indv. Data....................................................................... MU-27 [3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior................... MU-41
[3] Client Configuration..................................................................... MU-28 [3-5-2-9] Procedure...................................................... MU-41
[3-1] Add Client.......................................................................... MU-28 [3-5-2-10] Edge Detection.............................................. MU-41
[3-2] Delete Client...................................................................... MU-29 [3-5-2-11] Detection Level.............................................. MU-42
[3-3] Change Client Name......................................................... MU-30 [3-5-2-12] Sharpness..................................................... MU-42
[3-4] Read CLTInfo..................................................................... MU-31 [3-5-2-13] Character Color............................................. MU-42
[3-5] Clients................................................................................ MU-33 [3-5-3] LUT Common.......................................................... MU-43
[3-5-1] Protocol................................................................... MU-34 [3-5-3-1] Default LUT................................................... MU-43
[3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)............... MU-34 [3-5-3-2] Illumination.................................................... MU-43
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ....................................... MU-34 [3-5-3-3] Ambient Light................................................ MU-43
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range [3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)..... MU-43
(0116H Warning)........................................... MU-35 [3-5-3-5] Default Illumination........................................ MU-44
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox [3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light.................................... MU-44
(B604H Warning)........................................... MU-35 [3-5-3-7] Procedure...................................................... MU-44
[3-5-1-5] Change Film Size.......................................... MU-35 [3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8......................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout..................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-1] Max Density................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT.......................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-2] Min Density.................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up....................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-3] γ Table No..................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density.................................... MU-36 [3-5-4-4] Contrast......................................................... MU-45
[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID...................................... MU-37 [3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points............................... MU-46
[3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation.................................. MU-37 [3-5-4-6] Density.......................................................... MU-46
[3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F]).......... MU-37 [3-5-4-7] Shift............................................................... MU-46
[3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14.............................. MU-38 [3-5-4-8] Contrast......................................................... MU-46

[3-5-5] Output Format......................................................... MU-47 [4] File Transfer................................................................................. MU-59

[3-5-5-1] Film Size........................................................ MU-47 [4-1] Single file .......................................................................... MU-59
[3-5-5-2] Medium Type................................................. MU-47 [4-2] Analysis Data..................................................................... MU-59
[3-5-5-3] Film Orientation............................................. MU-47 [4-3] G-curve Data..................................................................... MU-59
[3-5-5-4] Border Density............................................... MU-47 [4-4] Operation Data.................................................................. MU-59
[3-5-5-5] Polarity.......................................................... MU-47 [5] Upgrading.................................................................................... MU-60
[3-5-5-6] Trim............................................................... MU-48 [5-1] Full Install........................................................................... MU-60
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width..................................................... MU-48 [5-2] Upgrading.......................................................................... MU-60
[3-5-5-8] Trim Density.................................................. MU-48 [6] Output Film.................................................................................. MU-62
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies......................................... MU-48 [6-1] 24-Steps............................................................................ MU-62
[3-5-5-10] Print Priority................................................... MU-48 [6-2] 17-Steps............................................................................ MU-62
[3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies............................. MU-49 [6-3] Cleaning Film..................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority...................................... MU-49 [6-4] Flat pattern......................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type.................................... MU-49 [6-5] Grid.................................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation................................. MU-49 [6-6] Uniformity........................................................................... MU-62
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Size........................................... MU-50 [6-7] SMPTE.............................................................................. MU-62
[3-5-5-16] Default Border Density.................................. MU-50 [7] F.D.C............................................................................................ MU-63
[3-5-5-17] Default Trim................................................... MU-50 [7-1] AUTO F.D.C....................................................................... MU-63
[3-5-5-18] Default Polarity.............................................. MU-50 [7-2] Check Density.................................................................... MU-63
[3-5-5-19] Mirror............................................................. MU-51 [7-3] 24-Steps............................................................................ MU-64
[3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image................................. MU-51 [7-4] Display 24-Steps................................................................ MU-64
[3-5-5-21] Image Layout................................................. MU-51 [7-5] Manual F.D.C..................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-5-22] Processing Type............................................ MU-52 [7-6] Set Collect.T....................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area............................. MU-52 [7-7] Clear Collect.T................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area................................... MU-52 [7-8] Uniformity........................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-6] Annotation............................................................... MU-53 [7-8-1] Clear....................................................................... MU-64
[3-5-6-1] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/ [7-8-2] Manual Input........................................................... MU-64
Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right........... MU-53 [7-9] DM Sensor Monitor............................................................ MU-64
[3-6] Common............................................................................ MU-54 [8] Check Scanner............................................................................ MU-65
[3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout............................................ MU-54 [8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner..................................................... MU-65
[3-6-2] Association Count................................................... MU-54 [8-1-1] Scanning Width....................................................... MU-65
[3-6-3] Logging DICOM...................................................... MU-54 [8-1-2] Scanning Position................................................... MU-66
[3-6-4] Model...................................................................... MU-55 [8-1-3] Initialize Scanner.................................................... MU-67
[3-6-5] Manufacturer........................................................... MU-55 [8-2] Edge Sensor Monitor......................................................... MU-67
[3-6-6] Default Client.......................................................... MU-55 [8-3] Reset Scanner Data.......................................................... MU-67
[3-7] Sarmaker........................................................................... MU-56

[9] Heat-Developer............................................................................ MU-68

[9-1] Temperature....................................................................... MU-68
[9-2] Set Heater Cond. Temp..................................................... MU-68
[10] Check Mechanism....................................................................... MU-69
[10-1] Adjusting Sub Scanner...................................................... MU-69
[10-2] Other Actuator.................................................................... MU-69
[10-3] Sensor Monitor.................................................................. MU-69
[10-4] Interlock Function.............................................................. MU-69

GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.14
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)
How to Use Service Parts List..................................SP-1 06A SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1...................................SP-17
INDEX.........................................................................SP-2 06B SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2...................................SP-18
01A COVER 1............................................................SP-3 07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT................................SP-19
01B COVER 2............................................................SP-4 08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1.........................SP-20
01C COVER 3............................................................SP-5 08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2.........................SP-21
02A FRAME 1............................................................SP-6 08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3.........................SP-22
02B FRAME 2............................................................SP-7 08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4.........................SP-23
03A FILM LOADING UNIT 1......................................SP-8 09A FILM RELEASE UNIT 1....................................SP-24
03B FILM LOADING UNIT 2......................................SP-9 09B FILM RELEASE UNIT 2....................................SP-25
04A REMOVAL UNIT 1............................................SP-10 10 CONTROLLER..................................................SP-26
04B REMOVAL UNIT 2............................................SP-11 11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM..........................................SP-27
04C REMOVAL UNIT 3............................................SP-12 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE..........................SP-33
05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1..........................................SP-13 13 List of Service Parts for Securing and
Wiring...............................................................SP-35
05B CONVEYOR UNIT 2..........................................SP-14 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring.................................................SP-35
2. Screws.................................................................................................SP-35
05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3..........................................SP-15 3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts.............................................................SP-38
4. Wiring Parts..........................................................................................SP-39
05D CONVEYOR UNIT 4..........................................SP-16 5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table.........................................SP-40

GENERAL CONTENTS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 0.15
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS................. PM-1 3.17 Work Completion Report......................................................... PM-26

1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items....................................... PM-1
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle................................................ PM-2
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW.................. PM-3
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............................. PM-4

3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs.............................. PM-4
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images.................... PM-5
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function................................................ PM-7
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation..................................................... PM-8
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery..................................................... PM-9
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (Option),
Removing the Cover................................................................ PM-10
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter............................................. PM-11
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside
the Equipment......................................................................... PM-12
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning
Sub-scanning Conveyance Roller........................................... PM-14
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section........................... PM-19
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit...................................... PM-20
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers.................................................. PM-21
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images.............................. PM-22
3.14 Setting Date and Time............................................................. PM-23
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding.......................... PM-24
3.16 Replacing the Cutter................................................................ PM-25

GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.16
INSTALLATION (IN)
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS.............................. IN-1 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND

1.1 Dimensions and Weight..............................................................IN-1
INSTALLING OPTIONS....................................... IN-19
1.2 Environmental Requirements......................................................IN-2 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures.....................................................IN-19
1.3 Electrical Requirements..............................................................IN-3 5.2 Setting Film Tray.......................................................................IN-21

5.2.1 Affixing the Film Size Label................................................................... IN-21
1.4 Other Specifications....................................................................IN-4 5.2.2 Changing the Film Tray Size................................................................. IN-22
1.5 Equipment Installation Space......................................................IN-4 5.2.3 Setting the Tray Number....................................................................... IN-23
1.5.1 Installation Space.................................................................................... IN-4 5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option).......................................IN-24
1.5.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work.................................................. IN-4
5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)........................................................IN-24
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW..................... IN-5
6. CONNECTING CABLES...................................... IN-27
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION........................... IN-8 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable..................................................IN-27
3.1 Precautions on Installation..........................................................IN-8 6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or Settings-Changeable
Models) to the Network.............................................................IN-28
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing..................................................IN-10
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance.....IN-29
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts............................................................ IN-11
3.4 Specifications of Installation Table............................................IN-12
3.5 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves.........................................IN-12
3.5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)................................................... IN-12
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION............................. IN-15

4.1 Carrying.....................................................................................IN-15
4.2 Unpacking and Unloading.........................................................IN-15
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body........................................................................... IN-16
4.3 Checking Components..............................................................IN-17

GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.17
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT........................ IN-30 8.4 Checking the Interlock Function................................................IN-43

8.4.1 Front Cover, Right Cover Interlock Check............................................ IN-43
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder.............................................IN-30
8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock........................................................... IN-44
7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings-changeable models).........IN-31
8.5 Checking Fan Operation...........................................................IN-44
7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART PC) Settings (When
Connecting CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/ 8.6 Image QC Function...................................................................IN-45
CR-IR 355V CL).....................................................................IN-31.1 8.7 Power OFF................................................................................IN-45
7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL (When using CR-IR 391CL/ 9. CHECKING CONNECTION.................................. IN-46
CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL)......................IN-32
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment ..................................IN-46
7.4 Power ON..................................................................................IN-34
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected
7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)....................IN-35 Equipment.................................................................................IN-46
7.6 System Settings........................................................................IN-36 9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment..............................IN-46
7.6.1 Setting 1................................................................................................ IN-36
7.6.2 Setting 2................................................................................................ IN-38 10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT.......................... IN-47
7.6.3 Setting 3................................................................................................ IN-39 10.1 Backing Up Individual Data.......................................................IN-47
7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software 10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation......................IN-47
(to Support Multi Modalities)...................................................IN-39.2
10.3 Installing the Equipment............................................................IN-48
7.8 Rebooting the Equipment.......................................................IN-39.3
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using Fixtures............... IN-48
7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment.................................................IN-39.4 10.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing with Fixtures........ IN-48
7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment Only)....................IN-39.5 10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures............................................................. IN-49
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment............................................................IN-50
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS............. IN-41
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM
Operations.................................................................................IN-41 SIZE................................................... IN-51
8.2 Checking Density...................................................................IN-41.1
APPENDIX 2. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image GROUNDING...................................... IN-52
Unevenness and Scratches......................................................IN-42
8.3a Check when Using Multiple Film Trays.....................................IN-42
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.18
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)
INSTALLATION OF THE FM-DL 100 - Checklist.........PC-1

0.19
BLANK PAGE

CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
09.20.2008 00 New release for HHS (00 (0) Edition) (FM5418) All pages
11.25.2008 00 New release for UL (00 (1) Edition) (FM5451) All pages
03.20.2009 00 New release (00 (2) Edition) (FM5501) All pages
04.20.2009 01 Revised edition release (FM5532) All pages
FM-DL 100 SERVICE MANUAL 05.20.2009

08.13.2009
01(1)
02
New release for the field (FM5546)
Revised (FM5585)
All pages
9
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 12
SAFETY PRECAUTION
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual

SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION  Heavy Weights

• When installing or removing heavy weights, complete it with an assistant or a
To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions. hoisting or other appropriate device. Weights above 20 kg must be lifted by more
than two persons.
1.1 General Precautions • The weight of this equipment is approximately 85 kg. Take the following precautions
when moving the equipment, etc.
• To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
 Power Supply the work.
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the main power switch and switch board before • Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
starting operation. Starting operations with the power ON may result in electric
shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some parts are not fully discharged  Optical Parts Handling Precautions
and other parts (e.g. heater) remain heated immediately after power OFF. Be
careful not to touch such parts. When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement) When handling any optical parts, observe the following precautions. Failure to observe
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in these precautions may result in a deterioration in image quality.
this manual and operate with care to avoid electric shock and other hazards. • Never touch the surfaces of optical parts.
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 10 seconds, • When removing dirt from optical parts, use the specified procedure only.
and then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine • Scanning optics unit removal must be carried out in a clean environment. Also do
may not be properly started. not remove the scanning optics unit protective housing.
 Ventilation of Installation Site  Heat Development Unit Handling Precautions

The ventilation of the equipment and film is accompanied by a slight smell. Be sure to A heater is used for the rack. Touching it during operations may result in burns. Turn
ventilate the room during and after operation. the power OFF and wait until the heater temperature drops before handling the unit.
 Drive Section Inspection  Grounding

To avoid accidents, be sure to turn OFF the power before initiating inspection or Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
adjustment procedures. When performing an inspection or adjustment procedure additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with retaining
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, operate carefully while observing the screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
instructions set forth in this manual. servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation. After the
parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
 Safety Devices procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, interlock switches, panels,
covers, and other safety devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing
such modifications which may impair the safety device functions.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-1

SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
 Other General Precautions

• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wrist band to ground
yourself. Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the
board due to static electricity from your body.
• Do not stain or peel off the product nameplates, labels of safety standards, or
product No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach other labels
over them.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, and
other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.
 Interlock Release Tool

To operate the equipment with the front cover and right cover of the equipment
opened, use the special tool provided with this equipment to release the interlock. To
avoid danger, do not touch rotating parts. Also take precautions against getting your
hands, feet, hair, and clothes caught by the equipment.
After completing servicing return the tool back to its original position.

SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation  Laser Output Circuit Interlock

As indicated in the Certification and Identification Label attached on the left cover of An interlock function is provided for this equipment for turning OFF the laser output
the machine, this is the machine of Class 1, which complies with the “Laser Products – circuit to prevent laser exposure when the front cover or right cover is opened.
Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22; Guidance for Industry and FDA Before turning ON the power with these covers open and performing services, be sure
staff (Laser Notice No. 50)” and “EN60825-1 (Amendment 2)”. The image recorder to release the interlock with the special tool provided. After completion of the service
incorporates a laser (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 658 to 659 nm, red procedures, return the tool to the original position.
visible light) with a maximum output of 52.8 to 64.9 mW (maximum output of 143 mW  To Open Front Cover and Right Cover
under fault conditions), but you will not be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks
as instructed in the service manual.
 How to Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure

To avoid laser radiation exposure, observe the following precautions.
 Steps Requiring Precautions Against Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing the following procedures, thoroughly comply with the instructions set
forth in this manual to avoid laser radiation exposure.
• Removing the scanning optics unit and accomplishing its reassembly
• Replacing or cleaning the components of the conveyor unit , entrance of the heat
development unit or the sub scanning unit
After completion of the above procedures, restore the removed protective housing
and retaining screws to their original states to prevent the laser beam from leaking out
from the equipment.  To Open Front Cover
 Periodical Maintenance for Keeping Equipment Conditions Compliant
with Standards
To keep the equipment compliant with the laser safety requirements, perform the
preventive maintenance programs at specified intervals (See “Preventive Maintenance
(PM)” Volume.)
 Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing installation procedures, observe the following precautions to avoid
laser radiation exposure.
• Do not attempt to perform any steps other than those stated in this manual because
laser radiation exposure may result.
• Do not position a mirror or other reflective article in the laser beam optical path.
• Do not change the laser beam optical path.
• Optical axis adjustments must not be made in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is visible red light, no one is allowed to make optical axis adjustments in
the field.

SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
 To Open Right Cover

SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
2. LABELS
2.1 Laser Caution Labels
 Locations of Laser Caution Labels

The following illustrates the locations of the protective housing and laser caution labels
specified in “Laser Products – Conformance with IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60601-2-22;
Guidance for Industry and FDA staff (Laser Notice No. 50)” and “EN60825-1
(Amendment 2)”.

SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
 List of Laser Caution Labels  IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001/EN 60825-1:1994 +A1:2002
+A2:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #2
 HHS Certification and Identification Label
 IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001/EN 60825-1:1994 +A1:2002

+A2:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #1

SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
2.2 Other Labels
 Locations of Other Labels

SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
 List of Labels
 Rating Information Label
 100 VAC Specifications
<REMARKS>
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply.
 200 VAC Specifications
<REMARKS>
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply.

SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
 Caution Label  High Temperature Caution Label

Be aware that the temperature may be high in the area where the following label is
affixed.
l Power Cable
Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below.
m For U.S. and Canada
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT
• Cable length: 3 m or less
m For U.S. Only

• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable
• Hospital Grade Plug
m For Canada Only

• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
If hospital grade disassemble type – complying with CSA C22.2, No.42.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
m For Europe
• Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
• Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated amperage: 6 A
• Cable type: H05VV-F
l Left Cover
Do not touch metal part and the patient at the same time under normal operation
or service.
l LAN Connector
Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this equipment.
Only IEC60950/UL60950 specification cables are suitable for connection to this
connector.
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark 2.4 Power Cable Caution Label
 Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for
U.S.A.)
 Earth Mark (Imprint)
FPCI0215.AI

3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR

LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE
PREVENTION
Even if the protective housing is removed for servicing purpose, the laser beam will
not possibly leak out of the equipment unless its optical path is intentionally changed.
However, if the optical path is inadvertently changed during optical system installation,
the service engineer or other persons near the equipment may be exposed to laser
radiation.
Optical system related installation procedures must be carefully performed while
observing the instructions set forth in this manual. After completion of installation,
thoroughly restore the removed protective housing to its original state.
 Protective Housing of Equipment

The following shows laser exposure protective housing parts of the equipment.

 Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit

<INSTRUCTIONS>
Never remove the upper cover of scanning optics unit.
<REMARKS>
This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanning optics unit.
l When Using 839Y100057

Upper cover
FPEI0114.AI
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-12

4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS 5. CLASSIFICATION

Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified 1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects 2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a medical
NO APPLIED PART
system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements
of IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local 3) Protection against harmful ingress of water
representative. IPXO
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION

CONTROL SHEET
05.20.2009 01(1) New release for the field (FM5546) All pages
FM-DL 100 SERVICE MANUAL 06.30.2009 02 Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0
(supports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568)
1-3, 3.1, 3.2, 4
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 2

10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 2, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 7
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS-1
1. SPECIFICATIONS Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks

DRYPIX PRIMA Overseas specifications 200 - 240 VAC specifications
200 STRNG PK main unit (Packaged in wooden crate)
1.1 Part Name =E
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size
Individual data CD: 1
Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks
Main unit software CD: 1
100 = E main unit (Packaged in cardboard box) Operation Manual: 1
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size Quick Guide: 1
Individual data CD: 1 DRYPIX PRIMA Overseas specifications 200 - 240 VAC specifications for
200 = CN E main unit China (Packaged in wooden crate)
Operation Manual: 1
Quick Guide: 1
100 STRNG PK main unit (Packaged in wooden crate) Operation Manual: 1
=E
Film tray Tray setting: 35 x 43 cm size Quick Guide: 1
Operation Manual: 1
Quick Guide: 1
200 = E main unit (Packaged in cardboard box)
Operation Manual: 1
Quick Guide: 1
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-1

SPECIFICATIONS-2
1.2 List of Optional Parts

<NOTE>
The following List of Components enumerate items required for each
configuration, so they do not correspond to units (quantities) of orders or
packages.
Use the product codes (Product Code) indicated only as a reference for
unpacking and follow the order lists provided separately when placing orders.
 List of Options for FM-DL 100

Product Code Product Parts No. Remarks
DPX PRIMA Additional option tray 898Y100546 -
TRAY = E
DPX PRIMA Cleaning roller 334Y0097 -
CLEANING
ROLLER E
DPX PRIMA Cart 888Y100004 -
CART = E
DPX PRIMA Fall prevention fixture kit 898Y100545 For securing equipment
FLOOT FIX KIT
=E
DPX PRIMA AC Power cable 136Y9138 -
CORD UL E (U.S.A. hospital grade)
DPX PRIMA AC Power cable (EU) 136N0449 -
CORD EU E
DPX 2000 AC Power cable (U.K.) 136N0450 -
CORD UK E
DPX PRM CT Modality connection software CD- 898Y100624 • CD-ROM for support-
MR CONNECT ROM ing multi modalities
KIT E • Supports V2.0 or later

SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.3 General Specifications  Maximum Number of Recording Pixels

35 x 43 cm size : 3520 x 4280
35 x 35 cm size : 3520 x 3520
 Recording Method 26 x 36 cm size : 2540 x 3600
Laser exposure heat development method 25 x 30 cm size : 2506 x 3016
20 x 25 cm size : 2000 x 2510
 Laser Light Source
 Image Compression Rate
Red semiconductor source (Class 3B, Wavelength: 658 to 659 nm, Maximum
output: 52.8 to 64.9 mW) x1 100 ±0.5%
 Curl After Processing
 First Printing Time
Floating from Shaukasten below 20 mm
Approximately 101 seconds (35 x 43 cm size, test printing)
 Film
 Processing Ability
35 x 43 cm size: Approx. 55 films/hour  Applicable Types
35 x 35 cm size: Approx. 60 films/hour DI-HL (Blue base/ 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm size)
26 x 36 cm size: Approx. 70 films/hour MDI-HLJ (Blue base/ 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm size) (China
25 x 30 cm size: Approx. 70 films/hour only)
20 x 25 cm size: Approx. 70 films/hour
 Applicable Film Size/Number of Sheets in One Pack
 Start-up Time
35 x 43, 35 x 35 cm sizes : 101 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
Approx. 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C) dusts)
Approx. 10 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C/ power save mode) 26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm sizes : 151 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
dusts)
 Image Quality
 Number of Supplies
 Exposure Resolution • One supply
14 bits • Up to five film trays can be used (Changed by the user)
• Film tray size setting is service setting
 Maximum Density (Dmax)
3.0  Loading Method
Daylight conditions loading
 Recording Pixel Size
100 µm  Maximum Ejected Film Capacity
50 films

SPECIFICATIONS-3.1
 Input I/F  DICOM Connection Specifications

 Non-Multi Modality Equipment  Supported DICOM Services
DICOM Network input from CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR • Verification SOP Class
355V CL (V4.1 or later), CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (V5.0 or later) only • Basic GrayScale Print Management Meta SOP Class
 Multi Modality Equipment • Print Job SOP Class
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class
DICOM Network input only
• Print Queue Management SOP Class
 Network Connection Interface • Presentation LUT SOP Class
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (automatic switching) l Number of Connectable Units (Multi Modality Equipment Only)
n Network Connection Maximum 64 (client) can be registered
l Number of Simultaneous Connection Associations (Multi Modality
l DICOM Protocol Equipment Only)
Direct connection
Maximum 10
l TOSHIBA Protocol l Number of Allowable Film Boxes in One Session (Multi Modality
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link Equipment Only)
l FINP Protocol 32
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link l Maximum Input Image Size
n Modality Connection  Non-Multi Modality Equipment
l A/D-I/F Connection (Analog/Digital) Rows: 3520, Columns: 4280
Connection via DRYPIX Link  Multi Modality Equipment

Applicable equipment: Diagnostic devices such as CT/MRI Rows: 7000, Columns: 7000
l E-I/F Connection
Network connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Image reader after FCR 7000, MF-300/MF-300S/MF-
300L, FN-PS551
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-3.1

SPECIFICATIONS-3.2
n Image Processing (Multi Modality Equipment Only)  Earthquake Measures

Fall prevention fixture kit (Optional mounting accessory kit)
l Interpolation
SSM interpolation, A-VR interpolation (Can be switched automatically for each AE
Title by Configuration settings)
l Tone Processing
BAR method, SAR method (Can be switched automatically for each AE Title by
Configuration settings)
l Format
 Standard Format (for all film sizes)

1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40, 42, 48, 49, 54,
56, 63, 64, 70
 Mixed Format
35 x 43 cm size portrait mix: six types
35 x 35 cm size portrait mix: five types
26 x 36 cm size portrait mix: one type
26 x 36 cm size landscape mix: four types
<REMARKS>
Equipments not supporting multi modalities only have the one frame format.
 Image Spooling
Received image data is spooled in the DRAM until completion of printing.
Image spool amount: Equivalent to two images
 Density Correction
Automatic density correction function (AUTO F. D. C.)
 Annotation
Provided only in multi modality equipmets
 Noise
Printing : Approx. 55 dB (excluding transient noises)
Stand-by : Approx. 45 dB
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-3.2

SPECIFICATIONS-4
BLANK PAGE

SPECIFICATIONS-5
1.4 Dimensions and Weight Weight

 Main Unit Only
 Dimensions
Approx. 85 kg
 Main Unit Only  Main Unit with Cart
610 mm x 630 mm x 620 mm (W x D x H) Approx. 110 kg
 Main Unit with Cart

610 mm x 630 mm x 1080 mm (W x D x H)
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-5

SPECIFICATIONS-6
1.5 Environmental Requirements  Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement

Frequency : 10 to 55 Hz
 Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure Amplitude : 0.0075 mm or less
 Floor Levelness
 Operating
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
Temperature : 15 ˚C (40%RH) to 30 ˚C (70%RH)
Relative humidity : 15%RH (30 ˚C) to 70%RH (30 ˚C) (No condensation)  Floor Flatness
Atmospheric pressure : 750 to 1060 hPa
10 mm or less
 Non-operating (not including film)

Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C
Relative humidity : 10 to 90%RH (No dew condensation)
 Transit or Storage
Temperature/Relative humidity : -10 (10%RH) to 50 ˚C (90%RH)
(No freezing/No condensation)
 Exhaust Air of Equipment

 Maximum Exhaust Air in Standby State
31.3 m3/hour
 Maximum Exhaust Air in Printing
63 m3/hour

SPECIFICATIONS-7
1.6 Electrical Requirements  Overload Protection

100/110/120 V ～ : 15 A
 Frequency 200/220/230/240 V ～ : 10 A
50-60 Hz n Power Cable

Acceptable variation: ±3%
 Line Voltage l For U.S. and Canada
100/110/120 V ～ • Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
200/220/230/240 V ～ • Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
Acceptable variation: ±10% • Cable Type: SJT
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines) • Cable length: 3 m or less
<REMARKS>
l For U.S. Only
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply. • Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
 Capacity • Hospital Grade Plug
1.2 kVA l For Canada Only
 Rated Current • Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
100/110/120 V ～ : 12 A
200/220/230/240 V ～ : 6 A • Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
 Power Consumption l For Europe

Maximum 1.5 kW
 Electric Energy • Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
Printing : Approx. 350 Wh • Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Ready : Approx. 180 Wh • Rated amperage: 6 A
Power saving mode : Approx. 60 Wh • Cable type: H05VV-F
 Maximum Heat Generation
Printing : Approx. 1300 kJ  Network Cable
Ready : Approx. 700 kJ
{IN:6.1_Connecting Network Cable}
 Grounding Resistance
100 Ω or less

SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.7 Equipment Installation Space 1.8 Disposing the Equipment

When disposing the equipment, remove the CPU board first. Be sure to return the
1.7.1 Installation Space removed CPU board to the Service Parts Center.
 When Not Fixed with Fixtures

Front: More than 800 mm
Rear: More than 0 mm
Left: More than 50 mm
Right: More than 200 mm
 When Fixed with Fixtures

1.7.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work

<REMARKS>
To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.

Top: More than 400 mm

SPECIFICATIONS-9
BLANK PAGE

CONTROL SHEET

02 Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0
1, 1.1, 1.2, 2, 6, 13.1, 13.2, 15-17,
29, 31-47
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 1, 1.1, 2, 8, 13, 16, 42, 43, 45
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1, 1.1, 16, 27-29, 43, 47-49
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

MD-1
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT n List of Functions by Connected Equipment
: Can use , -: Cannot use
Modality Equipment connected
1.1 Functions of Equipment connection

software
Function CR-IR 391CL/ CR-VW 674/ CR-IR 346CL/ Other
CR-IR 391V CR-IR 355V CL CR-IR 348CL manufacturer
CL (V4.1 or later) (V5.0 or later) equipment
n Outline of Equipment Uninstalled Film output    *2 -
• This equipmet is a network printer dedicated to DICOM protocol, and adopts the Simultaneous power ON by WakeONLan  *1  *1  *3 -
laser exposure heat development method. Use of ART-PC (Simultaneous power
• Film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 35 x 35 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm and 20 x 25 cm can be OFF, film size/error information display)
  - -
used. Automatic log saving when equipment

   *3 -
• It has a processing ability of 55 sheets/hour for 35 x 43 cm size film, 60 sheets/hour ends
for 35 x 35 cm size film, 70 sheets/hour for 26 x 36, 20 x 25 and 25 x 30 cm size Use of PC-Utility    *3 -
film.
Software uninstallation/upgrade    *3 -
• This equipment has one film tray insert slot which can recognize up to seven
different film trays. By replacing the film trays, various types of films can be used. Installed Film output    
Data identified at each film tray include film size, number of remaining films, and Simultaneous power ON by WakeONLan  *1  *1  *3 -
density correction data.
Use of ART-PC (Simultaneous power
• Films can be loaded with the film tray set in the equipment in a completely bright OFF, film size/error information display)
  - -
room. Automatic log saving when equipment
• The equipment has an automatic density measurement function which automatically ends
   *3 -
outputs image patterns required for density measurement and measures density. Use of PC-Utility    *3 -
• Power consumption of the equipment can be saved by setting the power saving
mode. Software uninstallation/upgrade    *3 -
• The following DICOM protocols are supported.

*1: WakeOnLan needs to be set using the installation CD provided with the equipment connected.
• Verification SOP Class (SCP)
*2: Supported by FM-DL 100 main unit software V2.0 or later.
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class (SCP) *3: Supported by FM-DL 100 main unit software V2.1 or later.
• Print Job SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Queue Management SOP Class (SCP)
• User Preference LUT SOP Class (SCP)
• Perform the various settings of this equipment on CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL,
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL (V4.1 or later), or using the externally connected PC
for servicing.
• Installing the modality connection software in this equipment allows various
modalities to be connected. (This software is supported in V2.0 or later.)
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-1

MD-1.1
1.2 System Configuration n Connecting with DICOM Compatible Devices
l System Configuration Example 1
n Connecting the PRIMA system (One to One Connection)
Without connecting to hospital network
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-1.1

MD-1.2
l System Configuration Example 2 n Connecting with Non-DICOM Compatible Devices (Multi
Modality Equipment)

MD-2

MD-3
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts
1.3.1 External View
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MD-3

MD-4
1.3.2 Operation Panel l Example Display
Display Meaning
Indicates that the equipment is currently starting up. (From
power ON to initialization)
Indicates that the equipment is currently initializing

Indicates the remaining number of film (61 sheets in this exam-
ple)
Indicates that the film tray is open.
Error code (203 in this example)
No. Name Function

Indicates sleep state
1 Utility button Pressing this button switches to U-Utility. U-Utility
can be set only when the equipment is in the ready
state. Indicates currently service utility mode.
2 Enter button • Pressing this button releases the tray lock.

• For executing the menu displayed. If a lower menu Indicates currently service utility mode.
exists, shifts to the next menu.
3 Display panel • 7-segment LED indicating the status of the equip- Indicates that the equipment is currently being terminated
ment.
(See “l Example Display” in the right table.)
• Blinks when film jam occurs.
Pilot Lamp Lights up when the main power switch is ON and
goes off then the switch is turned OFF.
4 Stand-by switch • Turn ON/OFF the equipment power.
• Press five seconds longer to turn OFF the equip-
ment power.
<REMARKS>
There is a buzzer at the back of the operation panel board.

MD-5
1.3.3 Layout of Units

MD-6
1.3.4 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
n Film Loading Unit Film load- SOLA1

ing unit (A)
Tray lock solenoid Linear solenoid Releases tray lock
SA1 Film pack/shutter detec- Reflection type ON in presence of film
tion sensor sensor pack/shutter
SA2 Tray detection switch Microswitch Conduction state when
tray is loaded
SA3 Film size detection sen- Penetration type • Film tray detection
sor 1 sensor • Detection of film size
(PI: 5mm) by combination of sen-
sor state
SA4 Film size detection sen- Penetration type
sor 2 sensor
(PI: 5mm)
SA5 Film size detection sen- Penetration type
sor 3 sensor
(PI: 5mm)
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor : Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor : Film present/Detects actuator

MD-7
n Removal Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Removal MB1 Film removing motor 2-phase pulse Drives suction cup arm
unit (B) motor
MB2 Removal unit convey- 2-phase pulse Film conveyance motor
ance motor motor at upper removal unit
SB1 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration type ON when suction cup
tection sensor sensor arm is at home position.
(PI: 5mm)
SB2 Film surface detection Penetration type ON when suction cup
sensor sensor reaches on film/OFF
(PI: 5mm) when detects film suc-
tion
<REMARKS>

MD-8
n Conveyor Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Conveyor MD1 Film conveyance motor 2-phase pulse Drives conveyor unit
unit (D) motor rollers, and conveys film
MD2 Conveyor unit exit roller 2-phase pulse Drives conveyor unit exit
gripping release motor motor grip roller up/down
SOLD1 Stopper solenoid Linear solenoid Ups/downs the stopper
SD1 Conveyor unit entrance Reflection type ON when film is at con-
sensor sensor veyor entrance
SD2 Conveyor unit exit sen- Reflection type ON when film is at con-
sor sensor veyor exit
SD3 Stopper release detec- Penetration type ON when stopper is at
tion sensor sensor release position
(PI: 5mm)
SD4 Grip roller position de- Penetration type ON when conveyor unit
tection sensor sensor exit grip roller is at grip-
(PI: 5mm) ping position
SD5 Film edge sensor Photo-interru- Detects the left side
puter edge of the film from the
rotations of the rotary
encoder
<REMARKS>

MD-9
n Sub-scanning Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Sub-scan- ME1 Sub-scanning motor 5-phase pulse Sub-scans and conveys
ning unit motor film
(E) ME1 driver board comes
as a set with ME1
SE1 Film leading edge detec- Laser detection Detects leading edge
tion sensor (SED28A) sensor and trailing edge of film

MD-10
n Heat Development Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Heat Devel- MG1 Heat development unit 2-phase pulse Heat develops and con-
opment unit conveyance motor motor veys film
(G)
FANG1 Cooling fan 1 DC fan Ventilates and cools
near heat development
unit
HG1, HG2 Heater 1, Heater 2 Silicon rubber Heat 1st rack develop-
heater ment heat plate
HG3, HG4 Heater 3, Heater 4 Silicon rubber Heat 2nd rack develop-
heater ment heat plate
THG1, Heat development Thermistor Detects 1st rack tem-
THG2 thermistor 1, perature
Heat development
thermistor 2
THG3, Heat development Thermistor Detects 2nd rack tem-
THG4 thermistor 3, perature
Heat development
thermistor 4
THG5 Film cooling section Thermistor Detects film cooling sec-
thermistor tion temperature
TPG1, Thermal protector 1, Manual recov- Shuts off power supply
TPG2 Thermal protector 2 ery type for heaters in overheat-
ing of 1st rack heater
TPG3, Thermal protector 3, Manual recov- Shuts off power supply
TPG4 Thermal protector 4 ery type for heaters in overheat-
ing of 2nd rack heater

MD-11
n Film Release Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Film re- SJ1 Film release unit en- Reflection type ON when film is at film
lease unit trance sensor sensor release unit entrance
(J)
SJ2 Film release sensor Reflection type ON when film is at film
sensor release unit exit
<REMARKS>

MD-12
n Frame Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Frame (K) SK1, SK2 Front cover/right cover Microswith ON when upper front
interlock switch cover is opened
THK1 Film recording seciton Thermistor Detects film recording
thermistor seciton temperature

MD-13
1.3.5 Layout of Boards Name Main function
LED28A (Density measure- Light is emitted for density measurement
ment section light-emitting
board)
LDD28A (Laser drive board) Scanner laser drive
PDD28A (Density measure- Receives penetrating light for density measurement
ment section light-sensing
board)
CPU28A (CPU board) Overall control of equipment, network input, image pro-
cessing
PSU27A (Power supply unit) Converts the input AC power to +24VDC and supplies to
the PSU28B board
PSU28B (Power supply unit) Generates +5V and ±12V from the +24VDC power sup-
plied from the power supply unit and supplies to the SND
board
SND28A (Sensor driver Mechanical drive parts drive/control, I/O parts control, sig-
board) nal counter of film edge sensor signal, thermistor signal/
density measurement section data AD conversion, inter-
lock control, heat development heater control, operation
panel control
Main power switch Supplies AC power to the power supply unit
CF (Compact flash memory) Main program storage, log writing (logs are not saved),
128 MB
DIMM (Memory) Main memory of CPU28A board, 512 MB
PRN28A (Print control board) DA converts processed image signals from CPU28A board
and sends to scanner, laser power strength control, expo-
sure output timing control
HTD28A (Heater drive board) Drives heat development unit heaters based on the control
signal from SND board.

MD-13.1
l Fuse Layout
SND28A PSU28B PRN28A HTD28A
No. Part No. Rating
113Y100327 113Y100328 113Y100330 113Y100331
1 137S1350 250V/10A F1, F2
2 137S1417 48V/1A F8 F1
3 137S1419 48V/1.6A F2
4 137S1420 48V/2A F6, F7 F5
5 137S1421 48V/3.2A F4, F8
6 137S1423 48V/5A F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 F6, F7, F9
7 137S1459 250V/8A F1

MD-13.2
BLANK PAGE

MD-14
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE
EQUIPMENT
2.1 Power ON Operations

The equipment starts up in the following conditions when the main power switch is
ON.
Method Conditions Remarks

Stand-by switch on the Press stand-by switch on the -
operation panel operation panel.
WakeOnLAN function Receive WakeOnLAN packet The network equipment needs
from network connected device to correspond to the WakeOn-
LAN function.

MD-15
2.2 Error Processing n When Level 0 Errors Occur
When errors occur during initialization or in the routine mode, this equipment performs When level 0 errors occur, the equipment completes the current process as much as
the following processes. possible, stops temperature control, and the error display is shown.
The equipment then becomes system down and the power must be turned ON/OFF.
n When Films Run Out Level 0 errors consists of the following.
• Conveyance system fatal error
When the remaining number of films counter becomes 0, the equipment determines • Temperature control system fatal error
that films have run out and shows a display prompting replenishing of films.
• Scanner system fatal error
Information that films have run out will be sent to externally connected devices at the
point a printing request is made. • Image processing fatal error
The replenishing of films by the user is determined by the opening/closing of film • Fatal errors determined by the software
trays, and by the ON/OFF of the film pack/shutter detection sensor. • Failed in reading external files when equipment is started.
• Discovered contradiction of various software environment when equipment is
n When Level 1 Errors Occur started.
When level 1 errors occur, for errors which can be recovered by the user, displays on • Discovered contradiction in service settings when equipment is started.
user recovery operations are shown. Initialization was performed after recovery by the • Discovered malfunction of various electric parts when equipment is initialized.
user, and if printing is currently being performed printing will be continued.
If recovered by retry operations of the equipment, only error logs are performed. Error n Degeneration
logs are also only performed for reference information for design analysis.
When the density measurement section malfunction, this is taken as degeneration,
l Cover Open/Tray Open/Shutter Detection and operations are continued without using the function.
When these errors are detected, operations of the equipment are stopped, the error
notification screen appears on the operation panel, and operations of the equipment
are continued after errors have been removed by the user.
l When Films Jam
When films jam, printing of films ahead of the jammed position are completed, and the
film jam screen appears.
Images which have not been printed will be re-output automatically after recover.

MD-16
2.3 Power OFF Operations
When the power of this equipment is ON, it can be ended in the following conditions.
Method Conditions Remarks

Stand-by switch on the Press the stand-by switch for -
operation panel five seconds on the operation
panel.
Main power switch Turn OFF the main power All power supplies are cut off
switch. regardless the state of the
equipment.
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR Monitor Tool must be running When the equipment is ended,
391V CL or CR-VW on CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V the equipment log is transferred
674/CR-IR 355V CL CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V to CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V
power OFF CL CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V
CL
<REMARKS>
• Shut down the software before turning off the power when ending the equipment.
• The conditions for the equipment to shut down or not shut down when the power of
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is turned OFF are as
follows;
• Conditions for shutting down together
When the equipment is in the standby mode/when level 0 error has occurred
(V1.2 or later)/during the energy saving mode (V1.2 or later)
• Conditions for not shutting down together
When the equipment is currently printing/currently receiving images/when level
0 error has occurred/during use of the U-Utility/during use of the PC-Utility
• Whether to end the equipment at the same time the power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is turned OFF can be set using the PC-
Utility.
• As CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL is displayed full-screen, the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor
Tool cannot be displayed on the PC screen at the same time, and therefore cannot
be used together with it.
This also means that the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool cannot be turned off together
with CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL.
However, by setting the PC-Utility’s “Logging Mode” to “ON”, logs of the DRYPIX
PRIMA Monitor Tool will be saved in CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL automatically when
the equipment is shut down.

MD-17
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL 3.1.2 Film Tray Detection/Film Size Identification
The presence of film tray is detected by the film size detection sensors (SA3/SA4/
OPERATIONS SA5).
When a film tray is inserted into the equipment, the actuator attached to the tray turn
ON the sensors to detect the tray. The attached position of this actuator can be varied
according to the film size. (service setting)
3.1 Film Loading Unit When a tray is inserted into the equipment, film size is identified from the combination
of the ON/OFF status of the three film size detection sensors.
3.1.1 Film Sizes
This equipment is compatible with film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm,
and 20 x 25 cm. The following figure shows the arrangement of guide pins and guide
plates for each film size.
The following procedures are required to change the film size.

• Change the position for attaching the guide pin and guide plate in the film tray Sensor
Film tray
• Change the film size at the configuration setting of the PC-Utility SA3 SA4 SA5
{IN:5.2_Setting the Film Tray} No film tray is loaded OFF OFF OFF
35x43 cm size film ON OFF OFF
35x35 cm size film ON ON OFF
26x36 cm size film ON ON ON
25x30 cm size film OFF ON ON
20x25 cm size film OFF OFF ON

MD-18
3.1.3 Film Pack/Shutter Detection 3.1.4 Shutter Lock Mechanism
To prevent exposure of films in trays when trays are opened, this equipment is This equipment is provided with a shutter lock mechanism to prevent
provided with sensors to detect film packs in the trays or the shutter. The tray open exposure of film to light when the shutter is disconnected during film
operation via the operation panel can be received only when reflected light from tray removal to replace film.
the film pack or shutter is detected by the film pack/shutter detection sensor (SA1: A pin which moves up and down according to the insertion and removal movements
reflection type sensor). of the film tray is attached to the left back side of the film tray. This pin moves down
when the film tray is inserted and moves up when removed. When the pin enters the
hole on the shutter, it locks the shutter so that the shutter does not disconnect when
the film tray is removed.

MD-19
3.1.5 Tray Detection/Tray Lock
Film tray detection is performed by the tray detection switch (SA2). When a film tray is
inserted, SA2 turns OFF, thereby detecting the film tray presence.
SA2 also serves as an interlock function, which cuts off the +24V power of the film
removing motor (MB1) and removal unit conveyance motor (MB2) when tray is
opening.
Tray lock is released by SOLA11. By the tray open operation via the operation panel,
SOLA1 turns ON and the tray lock is released.

MD-20
3.2 Removal Unit 3.2.2 Film Suction
The film removing motor (MB1) rotates at high speed in the reverse direction (CCW)
by the removal enable signal, and the suction cup arm starts moving.
3.2.1 Suction Cup Arm Home Position The suction cup arm curves according to the groove on the removal unit frame and
In the standby state, the suction cup arm is positioned at the suction cup arm home passes the upper dead-point.
position. The suction cup arm home position is the position at which the suction cup
arm HP detection sensor (SB1) switches from ON to OFF. At this time, the removal
conveyance roller (upper) is not touching the removal unit conveyance roller (lower).
When the removal unit conveyance roller (upper) reaches the film surface turning ON
the film surface detection sensor (SB2), MB1 switches to low speed rotation.

MD-21
After MB1 switches to low speed rotation, it continues to rotate in the reverse direction 3.2.4 Film Release
until SB2 goes OFF. At this time, the suction cup arm pushes the bellows in, and
generates negative pressure so that the film is suctioned to the suction cup. After flapping operations complete, MB1 rotates in the normal direction, and moves
the film to the removal conveyance roller (lower).
If SB1 turns ON while it is moving, MB1 switches to low speed, and continues rotating
in the normal direction for the specified number of pulses.
3.2.3 Film Flapping Operations

With the suction cup suctioning the film, MB1 rotates in the normal direction for the
specified pulse at low speed, the suction cup arm rises and stops once. From this
position, MB1 switches to middle speed, and performs flapping operations which
repeat rising/lowering of suction cup arm five times. After the film reaches the removal conveyance roller (lower), the bellows is pushed in
Flapping operations supply air to the trailing edge of the film by moving the leading even further, which pushes the air inside out. The film separates from the suction cup.
edge up and down, to prevent improper conveyance due to adherence of the trailing Upon release of film from the suction cup, the removal unit conveyance roller (upper)
edges of the films. In addition, the films stuck together due to static are separated falls by its own weight, and the film is gripped by the removal unit conveyance roller
while they are moving after fanning operations by fanning the lead edge of the film (upper) and removal unit conveyance roller (lower).
with the claw provided on the film loading unit.

MD-22
3.2.5 Removal Conveyance 3.2.6 Returning to Home Position
After film separation, the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2) rotates, conveying the When SD1 detects the leading edge of the film via the conveyance operation, MB1
film until it stops at the conveyer unit entrance sensor (SD1). rotates in the normal and reverse direction, returning the suction cup arm to the home
At this time, if SD1 does not turn ON within the specified time, the film is detected as position, and waits for the next removal enable signal.
having been dropped or film jam occured, and an error code is displayed.
When the trailing edge of the preceding film passes the film leading edge detection
sensor (SE1), film conveyance resumes.

MD-23
3.3 Conveyor Unit 3.3.2 Striking against Stopper
Upon the start of conveyance, the stopper solenoid (SOLD1) turns ON and raises the
stopper located at the conveyor unit exit. The stopper release detection sensor (SD3)
3.3.1 Conveyance detects whether the stopper is raised or lowered.
Upon receiving the conveyance start signal, conveyance into the conveyor unit starts.
The film conveyance motor (MD1) and removal unit conveyance motors (MB2) rotates
to feed the film until its leading edge is detected by the conveyor unit exit sensor (SD2).
The film that has been temporarily at rest after being detected at SD2 is conveyed at
low speed until it strikes against the stopper. Because the conveyance by the motor
<REMARKS> is still continued, the film gets arched to correct skew with respect to the conveyance
This equipment does not have a sensor for detecting cleaning roller. Therefore in the direction.
event users forget to reinstall back the cleaning roller after cleaning, film will not be
conveyed to the conveyor, resulting in film jamming at the removal unit.

MD-24
3.3.3 Gripping by Conveyor Unit Exit Roller 3.3.4 Film Edge Sensor
When the predetermined time has passed since the film struck the stopper, MD1 and Film edge sensor (SD5) is provided in the conveyor unit exit to optimize the start
MB2 stop. position of main scanning/writing (the number of pixels to be skipped).
Then, the conveyor unit exit roller gripping release motor (MD2) rotates in the reverse When the film passes the conveyor unit exit, the edge sensor arm of the film edge
direction (CCW), allowing the conveyor unit exit roller to grip the film. The grip roller sensor assembly provided on the front side of the conveyor unit is pushed, thereby
position detection sensor (SD4) detects whether the conveyor unit exit roller is in the allowing the sector gear concentric to the edge sensor arm to rotate the encoder plate.
gripped or released state. The film edge sensor (SD5) measures the distance from the reference position to the
When the film is completely gripped, SOLD1 turns OFF and the stopper is lowered. film edge by counting the number of slits on this rotating encoder plate.

MD-25
3.3.5 Pre-recording Conveyance
After transfer of image data to the print buffer in the formatter, film conveyance to the
sub-scanning unit is started (pre-recording conveyance).
In pre-recording conveyance, MD1 is rotated in the reverse direction (CCW) at high
speed for the specified number of pulses, and is switched to low speed in the reverse
direction in synchronization with the sub-scanning conveyance roller to send the film
to the sub-scanning unit.
After conveying the film for the specified time, MD1 is rotated in the normal direction
(CW) to disengage the conveyor gears in the rear of the conveyor unit to free the
conveyor unit exit roller, thereby preventing .
Thereafter, when image recording is started and SD2 goes OFF, the conveyor unit exit
grip roller is released.

MD-26
3.4 Sub-scanning Unit 3.4.2 Recording Conveyance
When the leading edge of film is detected by the film leading edge detection sensor
(SE1), image recording by means of the laser light from the scanner unit starts.
3.4.1 Sub-scanning Conveyance After Image recording ends, and the film is conveyed for a distance according to the
Upon film conveyance from the conveyer unit, the sub-scanning motor (ME1) rotates film length, ME1 stops.
driving the sub-scanning conveyance roller via the flat belts (rear/front). <REMARKS>
When performing service, the sub-scanning motor shall be replaced as a set because
it consists of the pulse motor and ME1 driver board. The drive speed of ME1 is corrected according to the temperature measured by the
{MC:6.3_Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1)} recording unit thermistor (THK1) near the sub-scanning unit.

MD-27
3.5 Scanning Optics Unit 3.5.2 Laser Exposure
Red laser of maximum power 52.8 to 64.9 mW/658 to 659 nm is radiated to the six-
face polygon mirror from the laser diode mounted to the laser unit of the scanner unit.
3.5.1 Scanner Unit The laser light scanned in the main scanning direction via the polygon mirror is
The scanning optics unit is composed of the LDD board (laser diode control board), synchronized by detecting the scan start timing at the main scanning sync sensor of
LDA board(laser diode emission board), SYN board (start-point detection board) of the the SYN board.
scanner unit, SED board of the sub-scanning unit (film leading edge detection sensor:
SE1), polygon motor, LED board and PDD board of the density measurement section.
The LDD board, LDA board, SYN board, and SED board are controlled by the PRN l When Using 839Y100057
board, while the polygon motor and density measurement section are controlled by the
SND board. These controls are synchronized with film conveyance to record images.
The digital data sent from the MTH board is D/A converted in the PRN board, and sent
to the LDD board as analog image signal.
<REMARKS>
This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanning optics unit.

MD-28
The laser light reflected from the polygon mirror passes through the scanning lens 3.5.3 Density Measurement Section
and is directed via the reflecting mirror to the surface of the film at the bottom of the
scanning optics unit. The exposed film is conveyed to the heat development unit and The density measurement section measures film density after development, and
is heat developed. compiles density correction tables to correct image density.
The film (17-steps pattern/24-steps pattern) printed via the density measurement
menu on the operation panel is read for the light penetration amount when it passes
l When Using 839Y100057 between the light-emitting side of the LED board and light-sensing side of the PDD
board of the film release unit to measure the density data.
3.5.4 Temperature Correction

Film image density varies depending on the cooling temperature after heat
development and the temperature of the equipment. For this reason, the temperature
of the film cooling section and temperature near the sub-scanning unit are detected by
the thermistor, and based on this temperature data, image data before D/A conversion
are corrected.

MD-29
3.6 Heat Development Unit 3.6.2 Temperature Control
Provided in the heat development unit are two heat development rack assemblies: 1st
rack and 2nd rack.
3.6.1 Heat Development Temperature control is performed by the temperature detection signal from the
The exposed image on the film conveyed from the sub-scanning unit is heat thermistors (THG) attached to the heat plate of each rack.
developed by passing through the heat plate and heat development roller of the heat In addition, thermal protectors (TPG) are attached to each heat plate as a protection
development unit. against overheating.
The heat development unit conveyance motor (MG1) starts rotating (CW) upon the
start of removal operation.
There is no sensor for detecting the conveyance state of the film at the heat
development unit, and it is determined as jam at the heat development unit when film
does not reach the ejection unit entrance sensor (SJ1).
The film that has undergone the heat development process is uncurled while being
gradually cooled down by the film cooling section, and conveyed to the film release
unit.
After the last film is released, MG1 stops.

MD-30
3.7 Film Release Unit
3.7.1 Film Discharge

The film that has undergone the heat development is conveyed to the film release unit
and discharged outside the equipment.
When the film release unit entrance sensor (SJ1) turns OFF after the trailing edge
of film passes the film cooling section, the heat development unit conveyance motor
(MG1) swithces to high speed (CW).
When the film is discharged, MG1 stops concurrently upon expiry of the prescribed
time from the passage of film trailing edge through SJ1 to the exit of film trailing edge
from the equipment.
3.7.2 High Speed Discharge

When the trailing edge of film passes SJ1 and the following conditions are satisfied,
MG1 switches to high speed normal rotation to allow the film to be discharged at high
speed.
Conditions High speed shift

Normal film output (film cooling sec-
Shifted to high speed release upon SJ1-OFF
tion temperature is low)
Normal film output (film cooling sec-
tion temperature is high) Shifted to high speed release upon expiry of
the prescribed time after SJ1-OFF
Cleaning film output
Density measurement film output Not available

MD-31
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL
CONTROL
4.1 System Block Diagram

MD-32
4.2 Interlock Control
The drive power supply cutoff by the interlock switch of this equipment is shown
below.

MD-33
n Disconnection Detection by Photocoupler
The ON/OFF state of interlock switches, relays, and fuses are used for software
control after being converted ON/OFF signal by photocoupler.
n Disconnection Detection by Fuse

The ON/OFF state of fuses are used for software control.
n Stop Load by Interlock Switch

When the interlock function operates, the power of the following load is cut off.
：Power cutoff load
SK1, TPG1-
Unit Symbol Name SA2
SK2 TPG4
Film loading unit (A) SOLA1 Tray lock solenoid  
MB1 Film removing motor  

Removal unit (B) Removal unit conveyance
MB2  
motor
MD1 Film conveyance motor  
Conveyor unit exit roller

Conveyor unit (D) MD2  
grippiing release motor
SOLD1 Stopper solenoid  
Sub-scanning unit (E) ME1 Sub-scanning motor  
Heat development unit

MG1  
conveyor motor
Heat development
unit (G) HG1-HG4 Heater 
FANG1 Cooling fan  
Scanner unit LD LDA board  v

MD-34
4.3 Functions of Boards
4.3.1 CPU Board
n Outline
The CPU board performs overall control of the equipment, network input, and image
Processing.
n Main Functions
l CPU
AMD Goede 500 MHz, LX800, cache 128KB
l Chip set
AMD CS5536
l Memory
DDR SDRAM 512MB
l LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T/1 ch
l PCI
1 slot (PCI 104)
l IDE
CF card slot/1 ch
l USB
None
l Lithium Battery
For RTC and backup RAM (CR2032) (Cannot remove/replace)

MD-35
4.3.2 PRN Board n Main Functions
n Outline l LBC block (Image data transfer)
The PRN board converts image data stored in the main memory on the CPU board Performs DMA transfer of image data via the PCI bus, and controls transfer to the
from digital to analog via the following blocks, and sends analog image data to the frame memory.
scanner unit using the coaxial cable.
l CTG block (Image data output)
Performs image data transfer from the frame memory to line memory, and
controls transfer to the DAC based on the start-point/leading edge detection
signal.
l DAC block (Image data analog output)
Converts image data from the line memory from digital to analog, and controls
the laser light power.
l Start-point/leading edge detection signal (Timing generation)
Takes in film leading edge detection sensor (SE1) outputs, and generates output
timing to the exposure area. To accurately obtain start-points in the scanning
direction, a PLL synthesizer is mounted.

MD-36
4.3.3 SND Board n Main Functions
n Outline l Sensor I/F
The SND board performs I/O control of the equipment by controlling the CPU board.
Sensor input
• PI 5 mm GAP type............................................x 7
• PI reflection type...............................................x 5
• Interlock state detection....................................x 1
• Fuse disconnection detection...........................x 9
• Film edge sensor..............................................x 1
A/D conversion
• Thermistor........................................................x 6
• Density measurement photo diode...................x 1
Sensor control
• LED lighting control
(Reflection type, film edge sensor)...................x 4
• Density measurement LED lighting control......x 1
l Drive I/F
Control
• 2-phase pulse motor control.............................x 5
• 5-phase pulse motor control.............................x 1
• Solenoid control................................................x 2 (Power down is 1)
• Polygon motor control.......................................x 1
• Cooling fan control............................................x 1 (2 simultaneously controlled)
Drive
• 2-phase pulse motor drive................................x 5
• Solenoid drive...................................................x 2 (Power down is 1)
• Polygon motor drive..........................................x 1
• Cooling fan drive...............................................x 1 (2 simultaneously controlled)
l Interlock
Micoroswitch
• Cover................................................................x 1 (2 serially connected)
• Tray...................................................................x 1

MD-37
l Operation Panel I/F
• LED ON/OFF control........................................x 21 (7-segment x 3)
• Switch...............................................................x 1
• Buzzer..............................................................x 1
l Others
For Analysis
• Fuse disconnection detection circuit
• Board version information is controlled by the difference of pullup/down
resistance inplementation

MD-38
4.3.4 HTD Board 4.3.5 PSU27A (Power Supply Unit)
n Outline n Outline
The HTD board controls the heater of the heat development unit by control of the SND When the main power switch is turned ON, PSU27A (power supply unit) outputs
board. DC+24V based on the AC power input.
 Input AC voltage
100-120 VAC ±10% (50-60Hz)
 Output DC voltage
+24V
 Rating current
10A
 Overcurrent protection
Provided
 Current leakage
0.22A or less

MD-39
4.3.6 PSU28B (Power Supply Unit) n Main Functions
n Outline  Input DC voltage
The PSU28B board steps down the +24V power output from PSU27A to five types of +24 V/10 A
voltage and outputs them. To ensure laser safety, the ±12V output, which is the laser
power, is interlock-controlled by the relay.  Output DC voltage 1 (Continuous output)
+5 VS (+5 V ±4%/0.5 A): Standby power
 Output DC voltage 2 (Output control)
• +5 V ±4%/10 A : All control boards
• +3.3 V ±4%/4 A : All control boards
• ±12 V ±4%/0.5 A : Analog power (Image output, thermistor, density
measurement)
• +24 V ±4%/5 A : Drive power (Motor, solenoid, etc.)
<REMARKS>
Only +5 VS is output for the CPU board and operation panel when the main
power switch is turned ON.
 Output AC voltage
100-240 VAC ±10%(Max. 10.3 A)
<REMARKS>
For the output AC voltage, the input AC power is output via the HTD board for the
heat development heater.
 Laser protection interlock

The ±12 V output of the laser power supply is interlock controlled by relay.

MD-40
5. IMAGE PROCESSING 5.1.2 Service Availability
The following shows the transition conditions for enabling/disabling reception of image
This equipment receives image data from devices connected by DICOM protocol from data.
the network, spools them on the SDRAM, and prints them after performing image
processing. This section describes DICOM services supported by this equipment,
l Transition Conditions for Reception Disabled→Reception Enabled
operation timing, and image processing. • After start, use of the communication function was enabled
• If the number of associations which can be accepted does not meet the upper limit
5.1 Image Input l Transition Conditions for Reception Enabled→Reception Disabled
• System end
5.1.1 Valid Services • System down error occurs
The following table shows the DICOM services supported. • The number of association simultaneous acceptances reaching the upper limit
No. Service Name Details <REMARKS>
1 Verification SOP Class Returns response for Echo request (C-Echo). If the service
has been started and response can be returned to the re- Receives image data during start of utility/power save mode. In this case, this
quest, Success is returned. equipment prints film when it returned to the routine status.
2 Basic Grayscale Print Consists of the following four services.
Management Meta 1) Basic Film Session SOP Class
SOP Class 2) Basic Film Box SOP Class 5.1.3 Image Data Reception Availability
3) Basic Grayscale Image Box SOP Class When request for printing of film size not loaded on the equipment is received,
4) Printer SOP Class processing is carried out according to the DICOM substitution specification. Error is
1 Basic Film Session Indicates the parameter common to all film sessions. returned when no corresponding film.
SOP Class For example, number of films, film destination, etc.
2 Basic Film Box Indicates common parameter for one film in the film session. 5.1.4 DICOM Settings and Restrictions
SOP Class Common for all images on one film. The following shows details and restrictions which can be set. (Multi modality
3 Basic Grayscale Indicates parameter applicable for single films in one film and equipment only)
Image Box SOP image pixel data. Item Details
Class
DICOM tag enable/disable Service can be set whether to adopt modality request/configu-
4 Printer SOP Class Exchanges data on printer status. ration setting value for the DICOM tag. Can be set for each
3 Basic Annotation Box Indicates film annotation (normally displays character string). client.
SOP Class Created according to the annotation display format ID (2010, Number of simultaneous The upper limit for associations which can be communi-
0030) value of the Basic Film Box SOP. connection associations cated with the client at the same time is 10. Settings can be
4 Print Job SOP Class Executes print process. Created by ACTION such as Basic changed using PC-Utility.
Film Session SOP, Basic Film Box SOP, etc. Deleted after Number of permitted film The number of permitted film boxes in one session is 32.
completion of output or output failure. boxes in session
5 Print Queue Manage- For performing status monitoring of print queue, deletion Maximum input image size The maximum input image size is 7000 (Rows) x 7000 (Col-
ment SOP Class of jobs for which job information in queue or owner ID are umns).*
known, change of priority.
Requested Decimate/Crop “FAIL” is specified for this tag, and if images which do not fit
6 Presentation LUT Prints using LUT information sent from client. Behavior tag (2020,0040) into the recordable image frame are sent, reception is denied.
SOP Class (Normally, LUT information is registered at this equipment)
Maximum number of con- 64
nection clients registered
*: 3520 (Rows) x 4280 (Columns) for equipments not supporting multi modalities.

MD-41
5.2 Image Spool Management Function
The following four image spool functions are available.
• Manages print request of image data received.
• Ensures spool space in the space for two maximum size images.
• As it may not be possible to print due to reasons such as film empty, etc., the print
request is deleted after the completion of printing on film.
• If the tray is replaced, check if image data of the previous size is remaining as
print request. If remaining, the DICOM service is set to offline, and error is notified.
DICOM does not recover from offline until tray of the previous size is loaded.
<REMARKS>
Three levels of priority (HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW) can be set for the print request
managed as the priority of spooled images. Amongst images with the same priority,
those with older print request time have higher priority.
Though DICOM service is supported, it cannot be changed from this operation panel.

MD-42
n Approximate Image Spool Amount
l Input Image Area
Image memory board Standard
- 512 MB
- 7000*7000
OS, image information 31 MB
Print buffer 88 MB
Image processing area 42 MB
Input image interpolation 94 MB
area
Log file, etc. 22 MB
Input image area 235 MB
(117 MW)
l Spool Amount
Standard
Data size (Maximum image size: 7000*7000)
Source Image size
(235 MB)
2 byte image 1 byte image 2 byte image 1 byte image
CR 35x43 cm size (3520*4280) 28.7 MB - 7 sheets -

(2 byte image) 26x36 cm size (3600*2540) 17.4 MB - 12 sheets -
7000*7000 93.5 MB 46.7 MB 1 frame 3 frames
5000*5000 47.7 MB 23.8 MB 3 frames 8 frames
Modality 2000*2000 7.6 MB 3.8 MB 29 frames 59 frames

(1 byte or 2 byte image) 1024*1024 2.0 MB 1.0 MB 114 frames 230 frames
(9 bits or more) (8 bit image)

MD-43
5.3 Image Processing (Multi Modality n Tone Processing
Equipment Only) This equipment corresponds to Dmax=3.0.
It supports two tone processing methods (BAR method/SAR method). Which method
This section describes image processing details and information added to film. is used depends on the Configuration information of each AE-Title. The default setting
5.3.1 Image Processing 1 is SAR method.
5.3.2 Image Processing 2 In the case of the SAR method, the Type 1/Type 2 density processing calculation
5.3.3 Annotation method can be selected. The default value is Type 2.
<REMARKS>
5.3.1 Image Processing 1 Type 1: Density calculation method implementing compensation for the measured
With image processing 1, compensation magnification/reduction processing, tone density
processing, and format processing are implemented. Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tone expression than
Type 1. Tone continuity improves in low density areas below 0.4
n Compensation Magnification/Reduction Processing
Corresponds to the SSM and A-VR processes. The following table shows the n Format Processing
processing details.
Print format processing for arrangement in one film is performed. The maximum
Priority Evaluation conditions Processing details number of image frames is 70. Supports film annotation function for displaying the
High NONE is specified for Magnifica- Compensation magnification/reduction processing hospital name, etc.
tion Type (2010, 0060) using the is not performed Also supports the Extension Format of the following devices.
DICOM tag
DICOM output size specification Increases the magnification/reduction rate to 1/255- Manufacturer Model ID
(Reqested Image Size:2020,0030) 255/1 and processes in specified unit of 0.1 mm Siemens -- SM
↓
Configuration information available Processed according to the configuration Phillips EasyVision EV
(For AE-Title)
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM
Configuration not available Processed according to the default configuration
Low (For AE-Title) Clavis View HM
Processing is carried out according to the following if recording of images larger than FUJIFILM HI-C655QA CR
the image frame is requested. HI-C655D CR
Priority Evaluation conditions Processing details CR-IR346CL CR
High When Requested Decimate/Crop DECIMATE: Reduced in size so that fits inside im- (Console for FCR XG-1)
Behavior tag is present age frame CR-IR348CL CR
CROP: Recordable area center is adjusted to (Console for FCR 5000)
the center of the specified image and
excess parts are cut off Synapse CR
FAIL: Reception is rejected. As rejection is
↓ returned during image input, no pro-
cessing is carried out
Configuration information available Processed according to the configuration
(For AE-Title)
Configuration not available Reduced until fits the image frame
Low (For AE-Title)

MD-44
5.3.2 Image Processing 2
In image processing 2, sharpness correction, density correction, and uniformity
correction are performed.
n Sharpness Correction
Secondary vagueness masking is performed on input images. The calculation
parameters are mask size (main scanning, sub-scanning directions), and emphasis
(main scanning, sub-scanning directions).
n Density Correction
Converts image data to output 12-bits according to the density correction table to set
the total density tone of the system to the designated tone characteristics. The density
correctable table is provided for each tray.

MD-45
5.3.3 Annotation Item Details
This equipment supports the following functions for annotation. Macro support Supports macro. The following table shows the supported macro.
Macro Expanded data
Item Details
%YYYY% Year accepted
Character layout Six patterns can be specified for the character layout setting.
1) Only upper (lower) left is defined %MM% Month accepted
Characters are left-aligned and printed. The whole film printing area
width is used. %DD% Day accepted
2) Only upper (lower) right is defined %MON% Month accepted in English
Characters are right-aligned and printed. The whole film printing area
width is used. %TIME% Time accepted
3) Only upper (lower) center is defined
Characters are center-aligned and printed. The whole film printing %IPADDR% IP address
area width is used. %AET% AE title
4) The two layouts upper (lower) left and upper (lower) right are defined.
The printing area width is divided into two left and right, and printed. %ALIAS% Name by client
They are printed left-aligned and right-aligned. The respective two-byte displays are also supported except for “%AET%”
5) The two layouts upper (lower) left and upper (lower) center, or upper and “%ALIAS%”. This equipment outputs “%RESOLUTION%” by “STD”.
(lower) right and upper (lower) center are defined.
The printing area width is divided into three areas and printed. Image annotation By using the (2031, 1020) Annotation Image Sequence private tag (on
6) The three layouts upper (lower) left, upper (lower) right, and upper condition that it is used between FUJIFILM equipment), image data is ar-
(lower) center are defined. ranged on the film as annotation.
The printing area width is divided into three areas and printed.
Character code One-byte kana and two-byte kanji are support. The character code fol-
lows the tag specification (0008, 0005).
The following table shows the corresponding character set.
Character set Supported characters
Without tag/ISO_IR_6 Default repertory
ISO_IR100 Latin alphabet No. 1
ISO_IR13 One-byte kana
ISO 2022 OR13\ISO 2022 IR One-byte Kana+ Kanji. This is
87 the Japanese supported pattern.
Priority order of Synthesis is performed by the following priority order (high to low).
synthesis 1) Image data from client
2) Character data from client
3) Client setting default annotation
4) Default client setting default annotation
When set to “Use default annotation: No” using the extension format, this
equipment will operate as “No annotation output”.
Display area Annotation area which is twice/three times/four times the default can be
set by client in the height direction.

MD-46
6. PRINTING FORMATS 6.2 Standard Formats
This equipment supports the following standard formats for all film sizes.
This chapter describes printing formats such as format names, standard formats, and No. of frames/film: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40,
mixed formats. 42, 48, 49, 54, 56, 63, 64, 70
6.1 Reading the Format Name Portrait Landscape

In “STANDARD\c, r”, c and r indicate the following values. STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\5,5 STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\6,6
c (Column) : No. of frames in the horizontal direction STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\5,6 STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\7,4
r (Row) : No. of frames in the vertical direction
STANDARD\1,3 STANDARD\5,7 STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\7,5
For example, they are as shown in the following for “STANDARD\3, 4”. STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\5,8 STANDARD\2,2 STANDARD\7,6

STANDARD\4,7 STANDARD\6,4
STANDARD\4,8 STANDARD\6,5

MD-47
6.3 Mixed Formats l 10” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
The following shows the frame layout of the mixed formats of each film size supported
by this equipment.
l 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT

l 10” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT
l 14” x 14” (35 cm x 35 cm) MIXED FORMAT l 10” x 12” (25 cm x 30 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT

MD-48
l 8” x 10” (20 cm x 25 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT

MD-49
BLANK PAGE

CONTROL SHEET
62, 63
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 1, 62

10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1, 1.1-1.8, 62
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)

MT-1
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error code and perform
the required corrections.
n Troubleshooting from Error Codes

When an error code is displayed on the screen, analyze the malfunction from that
error code.
When no error codes are displayed, the malfunction can be analyzed if an error
message is logged in the error log.
When analyzing malfunctions from error codes, refer to “3. ERROR CODE TABLE”.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1

MT-1.1
2. ERROR CODE
2.1 Checking Error Codes

For details on error codes, refer to “3. ERROR CODE TABLE” for the meaning of the
error which has occurred, suspected cause, and remedy.
When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code provided.
To differentiate the place of error (printer or formatter), look up the name displayed
under “Component” on the error code table in the following table.
Component Error Type Place of Error

FLH Film conveyance related error
MFC Data setting/system related error
DEN Internal densitometer related error
Temperature control system related
DEV
error Printer error
POL Polygon motor control related error
PNL Panel control related error
SCN Scanner related error
ESN Film edge sensor related error
DICOM DICOM error
Spooler Spooler error
ImgPrc Image processing error
Output Output control error
JobMake Test pattern generation error
Main MAIN control error
Formatter error
File transfer error
PCUTL
(Using the PC Tool in normal state)
File transfer error
Satellite (Using the PC Tool during initializa-
tion error)
StartUp Initialization error
File transfer error (Using the PC
Installer
Tool at initialization
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-1.1

MT-1.2
2.2 Format of Detailed Information 2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information
Perform this check only for analyzing error codes of the printer. n 2-A (Sensor Related Errors)
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve Errors occurring in initialization self-diagnosis, removal, recording, constant
the problem. monitoring, etc. (Including mechanism, etc.)
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check Convert the hexadecimal 4-digit code to binary, compare the bit maps, and investigate
the following detailed information to analyze the problem. the input state corresponding to each bit.
1=ON (Close), 0=OFF (Open)
n Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes
1. Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at

the error message display, or at [Display Error Log] of the PC-Utility.
2. Check the detailed information format number at “3. ERROR CODE l 2-A-1 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1))
TABLE” and refer to the corresponding format. Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
3. Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and
analyze the problem.
l 2-A-4 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S4))

Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.

MT-1.3
l 2-A-5 (Electric Related Information (Type E)) n 2-B (File I/O Error)
Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
l 2-B-1 (Type F)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number
of the file causing the error and the causes.
File number
201: Conveyance timer file (For mechanism)
202: Conveyance timer file (For size)
203: Conveyance timer file (For M-Utility)
204: Conveyance counter file
205: PM control parameter file (For mechanism)
206: PM control parameter file (For size)
207: PM control parameter file (For M-Utility)
208: Timer file for PM time monitoring
Causes
1: Open error
2: Read error
3: Write error
4: Conversion error
5: Line specification error
6: Column specification error
7: Size specification error
8: External file data error
A: Data range error (Detected by application)

MT-1.4
n 2-E (PC-Utility Operation Error) n 2-F (For Error Analysis)
l 2-E-1 (Type U) l 2-F-4
Displays the PC-Utility command number and parameter of errors which occur when Displays the temperature when an error occurs in subscanning speed correction
the removal operation of the PC-Utility was not executed as specified. calculation. (unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99 °C), “F” will be displayed at the first
digit.
PC-Utility command number

08: Unit Operation..................................................................... (1)
10: Grip (Action:MD2 only)........................................................ (2)
Parameter number
When (1)
0: Home Positioning
1: Film Surface
2: Film Suction
3: Upper Limit
4: Film Fanning
5: Film Release
6: Film Convey
7: Removing
When (2)
0: Home Positioning
3: Grip

MT-1.5
2.2.2 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed 2.2.3 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors
Information Detailed Information
n 4-A (File I/O Error) n 8-B (Outside Range Data)

Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes. Displays the error value when the edge sensor data value is abnormal (outside range).
n 8-C (No Acquired Data)

Displays the file number during edge sensor related data file acquisition when the file
could not be created due to no data.
n 4-B (Insufficient Effective Density Measurement)
Displays the effective data acquired by AD data analysis in decimal 4-digits when the
number of effective AD data measured by the density measurement section is less
than the minimum number of effective data (NOTE).
NOTE: The number of effective data is 90% of the number of data logically measured. File number
The number of effective data required for 24-steps pattern is above 5613, that
for 17-steps pattern is above 4158, and that for QC pattern is above 1300. 0: Edge sensor data file
1: Nonvolatile memory edge sensor data file
2: Edge sensor monitoring data file
3: Edge sensor average value data file

MT-1.6
2.2.4 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors n 9-C (Film Cooling Section, Recording Section Thermistor
Detailed Information Disconnection Error)
Error which occurs when the thermistor of the film cooling section or recording section
n 9-A (Temperature Error) is disconnected. Displays the thermistor temperature (A/D value).
Displays the temperature when the temperature is outside the specified range in
heater temperature control. (Unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99°C), “F” will be displayed at the second
digit from the left.
n 9-D (File I/O Error)

Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes.
n 9-B (Heater Thermistor Disconnection Error) n 9-E (Heater Control Task Start Error)
Error which occurs when the heater thermistor is disconnected. Displays the heater Displays the heater number when the heater temperature control task start ends in
number and thermistor temperature (A/D value). error.
n 9-F (General Error Details)

Displayed when no detailed information.

MT-1.7
n 9-H (Heat Development Control Parameter Value Error)
Displays the causes when heat development control parameter value errors are
detected.
Code details
Cause
0001: Target temperature setting error
0003: Heater control TCYC1 value error
1004: A system fan control TCYC2 value error
1005: A system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
0009: Heater control DUTY value error
000A: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC1 value error
000B: Photosensing material correction parameter KBC value error
000C: TRAY number error at photosensing material correction parameter setting
000D: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC4 value error
2004: B system fan control TCYC2 value error
2005: B system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
000E: Voltage DUTY parameter value error
000F: Equipment voltage parameter value error
001F: Language information parameter value error

MT-1.8
3. ERROR CODE TABLE
<NOTE>
The error codes of this equipment are displayed in three digits on the 7-segment LED of the operation panel. Error logs are logged using error codes (four digits) and
details codes (four digits), and therefore need to be reread.
LED Error Detailed

Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy Component Error Message
Display Code Information
201 Front cover open The front cover is open. Close the front cover. 1212 2-A-4 FLH Close the cover.
The tray was open in initialization 285RU: IP TRAPPED

203 Tray open error
and removal.
Close the tray. 1225 2-A-1 FLH
INSIDE READER.
Tray shutter present The shutter was inserted in the tray
204 error in initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the tray. 1227 2-A-1 FLH Pull out the shutter.
The shutter is inserted (degenerated state).

Or malfunction of the SA1 sensor or SA1 port of
The shutter is inserted in the tray the SND board.
(degenerated state) at startup 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Tray shutter present
205 error at startup
initialization by user operations. Or perform mechanism adjustments. 02C0 2-A-1 FLH Pull out the shutter.
all trays cannot be used due to the 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
corresponding error. motors.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND
board.
Tray shutter uninserted Attempted to open the tray, but the Insert the shutter and open
206 error shutter was not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the tray. 1233 2-A-1 FLH
the film tray.
Density measurement The automatically measured Execute automatic density measurement again. If 290RU: IP TRAPPED
207 error density value is incorrect. the error persists, contact your dealer.
1801 None DEN
INSIDE READER.
The measured density of the QC Execute QC output again. If the error persists, 291RU: IP TRAPPED
208 QC failure
printed film is abnormal. contact your dealer.
1802 None DEN
INSIDE READER.
The laser lifespan is about one 292RU: IP TRAPPED
209 Laser lifespan notice
month.
Contact your dealer to replace the laser unit. 1803 FFFF SCN
INSIDE READER.

MT-2
LED Error Detailed
The laser lifespan has been 293RU: IP TRAPPED
210 Laser lifespan warning
exceeded.
Contact your dealer to replace the laser unit. 1804 FFFF SCN
INSIDE READER.
The size of the film on which
received images are printed and Change to the tray loaded with 35x43 cm size 289RU: IP TRAPPED
211 Film size differences
that of the film in the currently set film.
1811 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
1812 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
1813 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
1814 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
1815 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
tray are different.
Unregistered tray An unregistered tray has been 289RU: IP TRAPPED
219 inserted inserted.
Changed to a registered tray. 1819 None MAIN
INSIDE READER.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MT-2

MT-3
LED Error Detailed
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 port
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB2
At completion of removal process, controller.
Tray removal unit jam did not detect normal SD1 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped. A film jams in the removal
220 error (film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
1291 2-A-1 FLH
unit.Please removing Film.
(Retryover) perform mechanism adjustments.
3. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board.
The remainder is not discharged normally from
the removal unit.
Or malfunction of the SD1 sensor, or MB2 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 ports
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit
Tray removal unit controller.
by discharge remainder, but did not A film jams in the removal
221 jam error (Discharge
detect SD1 CLOSE (film leading
1. Check if film has dropped. 12A9 2-A-1 FLH
remainder) 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
edge detection).
perform mechanism adjustments.
motors.
board.
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Open the right cover, and remove the jammed
film.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyor unit jam but did not detect SD2 CLOSE (film perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the conveyor
222 error leading edge detection). SD2, MD1, MB2
2294 2-A-4 FLH
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board.

MT-4
LED Error Detailed
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Open the right cover, and remove the jammed
film.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyor unit jam but did not detect SD2 CLOSE (film perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the conveyor
223 error leading edge detection). SD2, MD1, MB2
1295 2-A-4 FLH
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board
the conveyor unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, MB2
motors.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD1, MB2
Conveyor unit jam
by discharge remainder, but did not controller. A film jams in the conveyor
224 error
detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B1 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder)
edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
motors.
board.
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the
jammed film.
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning A film jams in the sub-
Sub-scanning unit jam perform mechanism adjustments.
225 error
unit, but did not detect SD2 OPEN
SD2, MD1, ME1
1296 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
(film trailing edge detection). removing Film.
motors.
board.

MT-5
LED Error Detailed
jammed film.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning A film jams in the sub-
Sub-scanning unit jam perform mechanism adjustments.
226 error
unit, but did not detect SG1 CLOSE
SG1, MD1, ME1
1297 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
(film leading edge detection). removing Film.
motors.
board.
the sub-scanning unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, ME1
motors.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD1, ME1
Sub-scanning unit jam A film jams in the sub-
unit by discharge remainder, but controller.
227 error
did not detect SD2 OPEN (film 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B2 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
(Discharge remainder) removing Film.
trailing edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
motors.
board.
the sub-scanning unit.
Or malfunction of the SG1 sensor, or MD1, ME1
motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SG1 port
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD1, ME1
Sub-scanning unit jam A film jams in the sub-
unit by discharge remainder, but controller.
228 error
did not detect SG1 CLOSE (film 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B3 2-A-4 FLH scanning unit.Please
leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
motors.
board.

MT-6
LED Error Detailed
Jam occurred during heat development
conveyance.
Open the front cover, and remove the jammed
film.
Conveyed film to the heat
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and A film jams in the heat
Heat development unit development unit, but did not detect
229 jam error SJ1 CLOSE (film leading edge
perform mechanism adjustments. 1299 2-A-4 FLH development unit.Please
SJ1, ME1, MG1 removing Film.
detection).
motors.
board.
the heat development unit.
Or malfunction of the SG1 sensor, or ME1, MG1
motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SG1 port
Conveyed film to the heat of the SND board, or malfunction of the ME1,
Heat development unit A film jams in the heat
development unit by discharge MG1 controller.
230 jam error
remainder, but did not detect SG1 1. Check if film has dropped.
12B4 2-A-4 FLH development unit.Please
OPEN (film trailing edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
motors.
board.
the heat development unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ1 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port
Conveyed film to the heat of the SND board, or malfunction of the MG1
Heat development unit development unit by discharge controller. A film jams in the heat
231 jam error remainder, but did not detect 1. Check if film has dropped. 12B5 2-A-4 FLH development unit.Please
(Discharge remainder) SJ1 CLOSE (film leading edge 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and removing Film.
detection). perform mechanism adjustments.
motors.
board.

MT-7
LED Error Detailed
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
film.
Conveyed film to the film release
Film release unit jam perform mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the film release
232 error
unit, but did not detect SJ1 OPEN
SJ1, MG1
12A0 2-A-4 FLH
(film trailing edge detection).
motors.
board.
film.
233 error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 CLOSE
SJ2, MG1
12A1 2-A-4 FLH
(film leading edge detection).
motors.
board.
film.
234 error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 OPEN
SJ2, MG1
12A2 2-A-4 FLH
(film trailing edge detection).
motors.
board.

MT-8
LED Error Detailed
the film release unit.
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MG1
Film release unit jam controller.
unit by discharge remainder, but A film jams in the film release
235 error
did not detect SJ1 OPEN (film
1. Check if film has dropped. 12B6 2-A-4 FLH
(Discharge remainder) 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
trailing edge detection).
motors.
board.
unit by discharge remainder, but 310RU: IP TRAPPED
236 error
did not detect SJ2 CLOSE (film
INSIDE READER.
leading edge detection).
motors.
board.
unit by discharge remainder, but A film jams in the film release
237 error
did not detect SJ2 OPEN (film
trailing edge detection).
motors.
board.

MT-9
LED Error Detailed
A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
Open the front cover and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the film release perform mechanism adjustments.
Film release unit A film jams in the film release
238 entrance jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ1 OPEN SJ1, MG1 22D6 2-A-4 FLH
(film trailing edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board.
Film release unit exit A film jams in the film release
239 jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 CLOSE SJ2, MG1 22D7 2-A-4 FLH
(film leading edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board.
Film release unit exit A film jams in the film release
240 jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ2 OPEN SJ2, MG1 22D8 2-A-4 FLH
(film trailing edge detection). 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board.
Jam occurred during front conveyance.
Although film was conveyed to
Open the right covers and remove the film.
the recording unit, failed to detect
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform sensor check,
SD2 CLOSE (film leading edge
Conveyor unit jam motor check, and mechanism adjustments. A film jams in the conveyor
241 error
detection). (Currently retrying)
22E0 2-A-4 FLH
Error occurred again due to motor
motors.
stop.
3. If the problem still persists, replace SND
(Maybe already stopped)
board.

MT-10
LED Error Detailed
Jam occurred during front conveyance.
Although film was conveyed to Open the right (upper and lower) covers and
the recording unit, failed to detect remove the film.
SD2 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Using the PC-Utility, perform sensor check,
Conveyor unit jam A film jams in the conveyor
242 error
detection). (Retry-over) motor check, and mechanism adjustments. 12E1 2-A-4 FLH
Error occurred again due to motor 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
stop. motors.
(Maybe already stopped) 3. If the problem still persists, replace SND
board.

MT-11
LED Error Detailed
Significance Remedy Detailed Information Component Error Message
Display Code Code
1. Install the software.
Contact the Fujifilm service
250 Semaphore table initialization error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0001 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
251 Message ID acquisition error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0002 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
SND connection board Contact the Fujifilm service
252 disconnected
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0003 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
253 Driver error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0004 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
Folder generation error from Contact the Fujifilm service
254 RAMDISK
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
255 File copy error to RAMDISK 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0006 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
256 ISC thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0007 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
257 DBG thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0008 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
258 MFC thread start error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0009 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
Image processing memory Contact the Fujifilm service
259 initialization error
2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000A StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.

MT-12
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
260 PNL thread error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000B StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
261 7-segment LED display error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000C StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
262 Message error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000D StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
263 Th2ONFLG deletion error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 000E StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
264 Unexpected message error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 000F StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
265 Install processing error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 000C 0010 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
266 Disc flash error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0011 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
Occurred inconsistency in the file Contact the Fujifilm service
267 system.
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
File open error during file open Contact the Fujifilm service
268 checking
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.
269 Disc unmount error 2. Check that the CF is set correctly. None 200C 0014 StartUp
personnel.
3. Replace the CF.

MT-13
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Failed in securing area for Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
300 communication processing. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0001 Main
personnel.
Mounted memory does not satisfy Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
301 operating conditions of the system. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0002 Main
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
302 Invalid parameter was specified.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0003 Main
personnel.
Failed in DICOM control execution Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
303 start request. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0004 Main
personnel.
Failed in communication end Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
304 request to DICOM control. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0005 Main
personnel.
305 Failed in calling GUI method.
0008 0006 Main
personnel.
Failed in JOB completion Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
306 communication processing. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0007 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling the print request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
307 method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0008 Main
personnel.
308 Failed in image initializing request.
0008 0009 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
309 request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000A Main
personnel.
Failed in re-reading instruction of Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
310 density correction table. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB generation
311 request (SMPTE/execution)
0008 000C Main
personnel.
method.
Failed in calling JOB generation
312 request (scanner diagnosis)
0008 000D Main
personnel.
method.
Failed in calling JOB generation Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
313 request (flat pattern) method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 8000E Main
personnel.

MT-14
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Failed in calling JOB generation Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
314 request (cleaning) method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 000F Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB priority order Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
315 change completion method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0010 Main
personnel.
Failed in initializing output control Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
316 unit. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0011 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling utility request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0012 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling energy-saving Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
318 instruction method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0013 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling print request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0014 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling transfer request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0015 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling output control end Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
321 instruction method CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0016 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling removal permission Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
322 notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0017 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling end request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0018 Main
personnel.
324 Failed in calling PC-Utility method.
0008 0019 Main
personnel.
325 completion setting request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001A Main
personnel.
Failed in calling removal process Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
326 JOB acquisition request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001B Main
personnel.
0008 001C Main
personnel.

MT-15
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Failed in calling RAW data transfer Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 001D Main
personnel.
Failed in calling tray information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
329 renewal notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001E Main
personnel.
Failed in calling output processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
330 completion notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 001F Main
personnel.
Failed in spooler control execution Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
331 start request. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0020 Main
personnel.
Failed in spooler control transfer Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
332 completion notification. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0021 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB spool request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0022 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling unprocessed JOB Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
334 recovery request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0023 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB priority order Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
335 change request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0024 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling deletion request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0025 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling initialization method Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
337 of output control. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0026 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling Queue deletion Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
338 request results notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0027 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling JOB start Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0028 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling preprint response Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0029 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling printer information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
341 request response method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002A Main
personnel.

MT-16
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Failed in calling image reception Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
342 completion notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling system information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
343 printing method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002C Main
personnel.
344 Request in unexpected mode.
0008 002D Main
personnel.
Failed in calling uniformity table re- Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
345 reading method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002E Main
personnel.
Failed in calling printer image Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
346 correction mode setting method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 002F Main
personnel.
Failed in calling tray state change Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0030 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling delete all JOB Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
348 request method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0031 Main
personnel.
355 Failed in reprint verification request.
0008 0038 Main
personnel.
356 Failed in reprint spool request.
0008 0039 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling QC test pattern Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
357 output method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 003A Main
personnel.
Failed in calling printer state change Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 003B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling system information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
369 acquisition method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0046 Main
personnel.
370 Failed in copying file.
0008 0047 Main
personnel.

MT-17
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
371 Failed in loading file.
0008 0048 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling resistance Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
372 correction reloading method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0049 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling main scanning
373 image position adjustment
0008 004A Main
personnel.
parameter table reloading method.
Failed in calling resistance Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
374 correction reloading method CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004B Main
personnel.
Failed in calling setting method of
375 the number of films remaining in
0008 004C Main
personnel.
tray.
Failed in loading setting file of the Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
376 energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004D Main
personnel.
Failed in calling direction method of Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
377 the energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004E Main
personnel.
Failed in calling transferring request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
378 method of the energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 004F Main
personnel.
Failed in calling recovering request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
379 method of the energy-saving. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0050 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling control notification Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
380 method of the status lamp. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0051 Main
personnel.
Failed in renewing number of the Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
383 accumulated used films. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0054 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling power off request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0055 Main
personnel.
Recheck the software to be installed and replace Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
385 Failed in copying installation data.
the CF. source code
0008 0056 Main
personnel.

MT-18
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Failed in creating the version up Recheck the software to be installed and replace Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
386 direction file. the CF. source code
0008 0057 Main
personnel.
Failed in creating the full installation Recheck the software to be installed and replace Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
387 direction file. the CF. source code
0008 0058 Main
personnel.
388 Failed in deleting log files.
0008 0059 Main
personnel.
Failed in creating normal completed Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
389 flag file. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 005A Main
personnel.
390 Failed in starting up the Web task.
0008 005B Main
personnel.
391 Notified unknown state.
0008 005C Main
personnel.
Occurred inconsistency in the file Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
392 system. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 005D Main
personnel.
Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
393 Did not end normally the last time. Reboot the system and observe conditions.
source code
0008 005E Main
personnel.
394 Failed in deleting pas log.
0008 005F Main
personnel.
Failed in acquiring log acquisition Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
395 mode. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0060 Main
personnel.
Failed in creating initialization skip Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
396 flag file. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0061 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling display information Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
397 update notification method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0062 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling PNL/ART Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0063 Main
personnel.
Failed in calling file transfer request Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0064 Main
personnel.

MT-19
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Failed in calling equipment
400 termination notification request
0008 0065 Main
personnel.
method.
Failed in calling termination Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
401 response method. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0066 Main
personnel.
Print stop notification method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
402 error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0067 Main
personnel.
403 Options.txt read error
0008 0068 Main
personnel.
Tray open request method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 0069 Main
personnel.
Tray open response method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 006A Main
personnel.
Alert open response method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 006B Main
personnel.
JOB in time request method calling Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
0008 006C Main
personnel.
Tray constant monitoring start Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
408 instruction method calling error CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 006D Main
personnel.
409 Failed in bc_sbc.txt file reading.
0008 006E Main
personnel.
410 Failed in bc_sbc/txt file reading.
0008 006F Main
personnel.
Failed in film_information.txt file Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
411 reading. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0008 0070 Main
personnel.
Failed in starting DICOM main Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
420 thread. CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0001 0001 DICOM
personnel.
Save equipment individual data (requires Dicom.dat Contact the Fujifilm service
421 Invalid Dicom.dat contents
analysis).
Tag number with error 0001 0002 DICOM
personnel.

MT-20
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Failed in starting DICOM Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm Contact the Fujifilm service
422 communication main thread. analysis).
Port number 0001 0003 DICOM
personnel.
1:No file
Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm Contact the Fujifilm service
423 Invalid Netinf.prm contents
analysis).
2:Non existing keyword 0001 0004 DICOM
personnel.
3:Non existing value
1:No file
Save equipment individual data (requires Contact the Fujifilm service
424 Invalid UserImageNum.txt
UserImageNum.txt).
2:Non existing keyword 0001 0005 DICOM
personnel.
3:Non existing value
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
425 Insufficient virtual memory
CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0001 FFFF DICOM
personnel.
Failed in creating thread. (Internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
430 error) CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0001 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in sending messages. Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
431 (Internal error) CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0002 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in securing memory. (Internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
432 error) CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0003 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in creating Print Job objects Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
433 in recovering unprocessed JOBs. flm analysis). source code
0002 0004 Spooler
personnel.
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
434 Failed in reading PrintJob files.
flm analysis). source code
0002 0005 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in acquiring PrintJob and Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
435 FILM object data. flm analysis). source code
0002 0007 Spooler
personnel.
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
436 Failed in registering spooler queue.
flm analysis). source code
0002 0008 Spooler
personnel.
Invalid film object, or insufficient Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
437 data flm analysis). source code
0002 0009 Spooler
personnel.
438 Invalid status
CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code, status
0002 000B Spooler
personnel.

MT-21
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
439 Failed in accessing PrintJob.
0002 000C Spooler
personnel.
440 Specified Film number is invalid.
0002 000D Spooler
personnel.
Could not find Print Job deleted Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
441 when requesting queue deletion. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 000E Spooler
personnel.
Specified change priority level is Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
442 invalid. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0002 0010 Spooler
personnel.
Failed in setting PrintJob and FILM Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
443 object data. flm analysis). source code
0002 0011 Spooler
personnel.
Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
444 Failed in opening and creating files.
analysis). source code, file name
2002 0012 Spooler
personnel.
445 Requested print ID is illegal.
0002 0013 Spooler
personnel.
446 Failed in moving file.
0002 0014 Spooler
personnel.
447 Unexpected case occurred.
0002 0015 Spooler
personnel.
450 Error occurred due to system call.
0003 0001 ImgPrc
personnel.
451 Failed in acquiring memory.
0003 0002 ImgPrc
personnel.
Failed in creating image processing Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
452 objects. CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0003 0003 ImgPrc
personnel.
Data to be acquired was not found Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
453 in PrintJOB, FILM object, nor image prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code
2003 0004 ImgPrc
personnel.
processing parameter. xxx.job/xxx.flm).

MT-22
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
454 Failed in opening and creating files. prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code, file name
2003 0005 ImgPrc
personnel.
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Execution of image processing Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
455 resulted in error.
prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code
2003 0006 ImgPrc
personnel.
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
As the leading edge margin
Equipment individual data save (TOP_MARGIN.txt) Contact the Fujifilm service
456 parameter is outside the range, use
analysis is required.
Type, outside range value 2003 0007 ImgPrc
personnel.
the default value.
Re-executed format calculation Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
457 without annotation information
prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
source code
2003 0008 ImgPrc
personnel.
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Failed in starting output main Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
460 thread. CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0004 1EB1 Output
personnel.
Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Contact the Fujifilm service
461 Level 0 error occurred in formatter.
CF), repalce CPU/memory board.
None 0004 1F7C Output
personnel.
Density correction calculation Save equipment individual data (requires log Contact the Fujifilm service
462 results are abnormal. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None 0004 1F84 Output
personnel.
Unable to continue operations due Save equipment individual data (requires log Contact the Fujifilm service
463 to internal error. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
Detailed information 0004 1F85 Output
personnel.
Failed in creating thread (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
470 error). CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0007 0001 JobMake
personnel.
Failed in sending message (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
471 error). CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code
0007 0002 JobMake
personnel.
Failed in securing memory (internal Re-install the software, replace the CD (remake the Place of occurrence in Contact the Fujifilm service
472 error). CF), repalce CPU/memory board. source code, request size
0007 0003 JobMake
personnel.
473 Failed in opening and creating files.
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. source code, file name
0007 000A JobMake
personnel.
474 Invalid status
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. source code, status
0007 000B JobMake
personnel.

MT-23
LED Error Detailed
Display Code Code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
480 Failed in FTP data transfer.
equipment, and observe conditions. transfer
200A 0001 PCUTL
personnel.
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the
481 FTP port does not open. path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None 200A 0002 PCUTL
personnel.
servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but Name of file which failed Contact the Fujifilm service
482 did not exist.
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again.
transfer
200A 0003 PCUTL
personnel.
200D 0001 Satellite
personnel.
484 FTP port does not open. path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None 200D 0002 Satellite
personnel.
485 did not exist.
transfer
200D 0003 Satellite
personnel.
200B 0001 Installer
personnel.
487 FTP port does not open. path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None 200B 0002 Installer
personnel.
488 did not exist.
transfer
200B 0003 Installer
personnel.

MT-24
LED Error Detailed
Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
No response from FL-SS that it has the CPU board or CF.
600 FLH-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain 1. Re-install the software. 0332 FFFF MFC
personnel.
period of time. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CPU board.
No response from SCN-SS that it the CPU board or CF.
601 SCN-SS start timeout has completed start even after a 1. Re-install the software. 0335 FFFF MFC
personnel.
certain period of time. 2. Replace the CF.
No response from DEV-SS that it the CPU board or CF.
602 DEV-SS start timeout has completed start even after a 1. Re-install the software. 0339 FFFF MFC
personnel.
certain period of time. 2. Replace the CF.
Heat development Failed in reading the heat the CF.
610 control parameter file development control parameter file 1. Re-install the software. 0901 9-D DEV
personnel.
reading error when the system was started up. 2. Replace the CF.
Failed in TMS driver (temperature the CF or CAN communication error.
611 TMS driver setup error measurement task) setup when 1. Re-install the software. 0902 9-F DEV
personnel.
system was started up. 2. Replace the CF.
3. Replace the CAN cable.
Heat development Failed in reading the heat
the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
612 calculation parameter development control parameter file
1. Re-install the software.
0903 9-D DEV
personnel.
file reading error when the system was started up.
2. Replace the CF.
Temperature Failed in reading the temperature
613 conversion table file conversion table file when the
0904 9-D DEV
personnel.
reading error system was started up.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-25
LED Error Detailed
Failed in starting the plate control
614 Plate setup error task when the system was started
0905 9-E DEV
personnel.
up.
2. Replace the CF.
Failed in starting the fan control
615 Fan setup error task when the system was started
0906 9-E DEV
personnel.
up.
2. Replace the CF.
Power voltage setting Failed in power voltage setting file the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
616 file reading error reading when starting the system. 1. Re-install the software.
0907 None DEV
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
Sensitivity correction Failed in sensitivity correction
617 (SBC) file reading (SBC) file reading when starting
0908 None DEV
personnel.
error the system.
2. Replace the CF.
Sensitivity correction Failed in sensitivity correction
618 (KBC) file reading (KBC) file reading when starting
0909 None DEV
personnel.
error the system.
2. Replace the CF.
Failed in equipment individual
Equipment individual the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
619 data file reading error
data file reading when starting the
0910 None DEV
personnel.
system.
2. Replace the CF.
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the
SND board and thermistor, or malfunction of the
thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board, or
disconnection of the CAN cable.
Detected that the current
1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable
temperature of a heater dropped
Plate thermistor to the thermistor, and connector of the SND Contact the Fujifilm service
620 disconnection error
below -20°C for three times
board are set correctly.
0911 9-B DEV
personnel.
continuously (detection interval:
2. Replace the thermistor.
600 ms), and deter
3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and
SND board.

MT-26
LED Error Detailed
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Malfunction of the temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the heater or I/F cable
between the heater and SND board, reset of
heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of
the heater port.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to
the heater, and connector of the SND board
are set correctly, and check that the thermal
protector reset has been cleared.
The temperature of all plates 2. Check the operations of each heater using the
did not become the appropriate PC-Utility.
temperature (within target Check the peripheral temperature of each
temperature ±1°C) even after the heater with the hand.
specified time from the start of If hot, the heater is OK.
initialization. The thermistor/CAN/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 5.
Note: If not hot, the heater/CAN/SND board may be
1. Generally, as the low faulty. Proceed to step 4.
3. Check the operations of the heat development
temperature error (2911) and
Initialization time unit fan using the PC-Utility. Contact the Fujifilm service
621 timeout
heater disconnection error
The FAN is OK if operations are normal. 0920 9-F DEV
personnel.
(0961), etc. occur before this
The film cooling section and recording section
error, the rate of occurrence of thermistors/CAN/SND board may be faulty.
this error is low. Proceed to step 5.
2. The target temperature (approx. If operations are abnormal, the connector or
90°C to 130°C) varies according fan is defective.
to internal conditions. Replace the connector and heat development
unit fan.
<Specified time> 4. Replace the heater.
100 V model: 30 minutes 5. Replace the PRN board.
200 V model: 25 minutes 7. Replace the thermistor.
8. Replace the cooling section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and
SND board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-27
LED Error Detailed
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the CF, temperature detection
thermistor, heat development unit fan, heater, or
heater port.
1. Check if the CF is controlled properly
according to the state LEDs, etc. (hang up,
bus error, etc.).
are set correctly.
unit fan using the PC-Utility.
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be
faulty. Proceed to step 4.
If operations are abnormal, the connector or
fan is defective.
Replace the connector and heat development
Detected that the current unit fan.
temperature of a heater exceeded 4. Check the operations of each heater using the Contact the Fujifilm service
622 Overheat 2 error
138°C for three times continuously PC-Utility. 0951 9-A DEV
personnel.
(detection interval: 600ms). Check the peripheral temperature of each
heater with the hand.
If not hot, the heater is OK.
The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 7.
If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 5.
5. Replace the heater.
6. Replace the CF.
9. Replace the recording section thermistor.
SND board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-28
LED Error Detailed
The plate temperature is low.
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the
temperature detection thermistor, disconnection
of the heater or I/F cables between the heater
and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal
protector, or malfunction of the heater port.
The temperature of a heater
remained lower than the target
temperature even after the specified
time from the start of temperature
2. Check the operations of each heater using the
control (detection interval: 600ms,
PC-Utility.
measured 2000 times continuously)
Check the peripheral temperature of each
and did not become the appropriate
temperature.
Heater disconnection If hot, the heater is OK. Contact the Fujifilm service
623 error The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
0961 9-A DEV
personnel.
Note:
Proceed to step 4.
1. The target temperature (approx.
If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be
90 °C to 130 °C) varies according
to internal conditions.
4. Replace the CF.
<Specified time>
100 V model: 20 minutes
SND board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.
Heat development Abnormal heat development control
624 control parameter parameter was detected when the
09A0 9-H DEV
personnel.
value error system was started up.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-29
LED Error Detailed
Abnormal rise in the plate temperature.
Connector malfunction, temperature detection
thermistor malfunction, disconnection of the I/F
cable between heaters or between the heater and
SND board, heater reset by the thermal protector,
or malfunction of the heater port.
are correctly set, and the thermal protector
reset is cleared.
The average rising temperature of
PC-Utility.
the plate remained less than 10 °C
Check the peripheral temperature of the each
even after 5 minutes from system
start-up.
Cold start timeout If hot, the heater is OK. Contact the Fujifilm service
625 error The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
09B0 9-F DEV
personnel.
Note:
Proceed to step 4.
Error which occurs when heater
control fails due to electric
faulty. Proceed to 3.
malfunctions.
4. Replace the CF.
SND board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-30
LED Error Detailed
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of plate temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the I/F cable between
the thermistor and SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor
and SND board are set properly.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor
using the PC-Utility.
Check the temperature of each thermistor
At system start, the initial
visually.
measured value (average of four)
Check if the temperature is a feasible value
Temperature of the temperature of a heater was Contact the Fujifilm service
626 measurement error outside the -15°C to 150°C
(about 0°C to 130°C). 2907 9-A DEV
personnel.
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to
range approximately 5 seconds
step 3.
after the setup of the TMS driver
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor
and SND board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-31
LED Error Detailed
The plate temperature is low.
of the heater or I/F cable between the heater
The temperature of a heater
the heater, and connectors of the SND board
remained lower than the target
temperature even after the specified
time from the start of temperature
control (detection interval: 600ms,
PC-Utility.
measured 1000 times continuously)
and did not become the appropriate
temperature.
If hot, the heater is OK. Contact the Fujifilm service
627 Low temperature error
The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
2911 9-A DEV
personnel.
Note:
Proceed to step 4.
90°C to 130°C) varies according
4. Replace the CF.
<Specified time>
SND.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-32
LED Error Detailed
thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board.
The film cooling section thermistor 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable
Film cooling
has disconnected (Detected to the thermistor, and connector of the SND Contact the Fujifilm service
628 section thermistor
temperature dropped below board are set correctly.
2918 9-C DEV
personnel.
disconnection error
-20°C.). 2. Replace the thermistor.
SND board.
thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board.
The recording section thermistor 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable
Recording
has disconnected (Detected to the thermistor, and connector of the SND Contact the Fujifilm service
629 section thermistor
temperature dropped below board are set correctly.
2919 9-C DEV
personnel.
disconnection error
-20°C.). 2. Replace the thermistor.
SND board.

MT-33
LED Error Detailed
of the heater or I/F cable between the heater
During temperature control, the
temperature of a heater dropped
below the appropriate temperature
PC-Utility.
range (within target temperature
±1°C), and did not return to the
appropriate temperature even
If hot, the heater is OK.
Temperature control after 5 minutes (detection interval Contact the Fujifilm service
630 abnormally low error 600ms, measured 500 times
The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty. 2921 9-A DEV
personnel.
Proceed to step 4.
continuously).
Note:
4. Replace the CF.
90°C to 130°C) varies according
SND.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-34
LED Error Detailed
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Disconnection of the plate temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the heater or I/F cable
between the heater and SND board, reset of
heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of
the heater port.
PC-Utility.
The temperature of all plates
did not become the appropriate heater with the hand.
temperature (within target If hot, the heater is OK.
temperature ±1°C) even after The thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
20 minutes from the start of Proceed to step 5.
initialization. If not hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be
Note: 3. Check the operations of the heat development
Temperature control Contact the Fujifilm service
631 timeout
1. Generally, as the temperature unit fan using the PC-Utility. 2930 9-F DEV
personnel.
control abnormally low error The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
(2921) and heater disconnection The film cooling section and recording section
error (0961), etc. occur before thermistor/CF/SND board may be faulty.
this error, the rate of occurrence Proceed to step 5.
of this error is low. If operations are abnormal, the connector or
2. The target temperature (approx. fan is defective.
90°C to 130°C) varies according Replace the connector and heat development
unit fan.
5. Replace the CF.
8. Replace the film cooling section thermistor.
SND board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-35
LED Error Detailed
Malfunction of the CF, heat development unit fan,
temperature detection thermistor, heater, or heater
port.
are set correctly.
During temperature control, the faulty. Proceed to step 3.
temperature of a heater exceeded If operations are abnormal, the connector or
the appropriate temperature fan is defective.
range (within target temperature Replace the connector and heat development
±1°C), and did not return to the unit fan.
appropriate temperature even 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
Temperature after 5 minutes (detection interval PC-Utility. Contact the Fujifilm service
632 abnormally high error 600ms, measured 500 times Check the peripheral temperature of each
2931 9-A DEV
personnel.
continuously). heater with the hand.
Note: The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
1. The target temperature (approx. Proceed to step 6.
90°C to 130°C) varies according If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
to internal conditions. Proceed to step 4.
5. Replace the CF.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND
board.
the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-36
LED Error Detailed
port.
are set correctly.
If operations are abnormal, the connector or
fan is defective.
During temperature control, the Replace the connector and heat development
temperature of a heater exceeded unit fan.
the appropriate temperature 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
Temperature control range (within target temperature PC-Utility.
633 abnormally high 2 ±1°C), and did not return to the Check the peripheral temperature of each 2932 9-A DEV
personnel.
error appropriate temperature even heater with the hand.
after 10 minutes (detection interval If not hot, the heater is OK.
600ms, measured 1000 times The thermistor/SND board may be faulty.
continuously). Proceed to step 6.
If hot, the heater/CF/SND board may be faulty.
Proceed to step 4.
5. Replace the CF.
board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-37
LED Error Detailed
port.
are set correctly.
The temperature of a heater If operations are abnormal, the connector or
remained higher than the target fan is defective.
temperature even after 5 minutes Replace the connector and heat development
from the start of temperature unit fan.
control (detection interval: 600ms, 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
measured 500 times continuously) PC-Utility.
634 Overheat 1 error and did not become the appropriate Check the peripheral temperature of each 2941 9-A DEV
personnel.
temperature. heater with the hand.
5. Replace the CF.
board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-38
LED Error Detailed
port.
are set correctly.
The temperature of a heater If operations are abnormal, the connector or
remained higher than the target fan is defective.
temperature even after 10 minutes Replace the connector and heat development
from the start of temperature unit fan.
control (detection interval: 600ms, 3. Check the operations of each heater using the
measured 1000 times continuously) PC-Utility.
635 Overheat 1-2 error and did not become the appropriate Check the peripheral temperature of each 2942 9-A DEV
personnel.
temperature. heater with the hand.
5. Replace the CF.
board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-39
LED Error Detailed
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of the plate temperature detection
thermistor, disconnection of the I/F cable with the
SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor
and SND board are set properly, and if the
AD converter for temperature measurement is
affected by unidentifiable noise.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor
using the PC-Utility.
Check the temperature of each thermistor
visually.
Temperature Difference between two continuous
Check that the measured value becomes the Contact the Fujifilm service
636 measurement noise temperature measurements
feasible value (about 0°C to 130°C) and if
2971 9-A DEV
personnel.
(Level 2) (detection interval: 600 ms) > 2°C
there is a difference of 2°C within one second.
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to
step 3.
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor
and SND board.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-40
LED Error Detailed
The target temperature is abnormal or the film
compensation information parameter is abnormal,
or malfunction of the barcode reader.
1. If the target temperature is abnormal, set the
target temperature using the PC-Utility again.
The target temperature (individual 2. If the film compensation information parameter
Heat development
data) or film compensation (SBC) is abnormal, enter the correct barcode. Contact the Fujifilm service
637 control parameter
information value obtained from the 3. If the barcode reader has malfunctioned,
29A0 9-H DEV
personnel.
value error
barcode are abnormal. replace the barcode reader.

the CF.
2. Replace the CF.
Failed in creating data file when
acquiring temperature data.
Temperature data Note: the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
638 writing error As “Acquiring temperature data” is 1. Re-install the software.
2991 9-D DEV
personnel.
a function for design and evaluation 2. Replace the CF.
(PC-Utility only), this error does not
occur in actual user operations.
Density drop Failed in creating density drop
639 prevention file writing prevention file when initialization
2992 None DEV
personnel.
error completed.
2. Replace the CF.
Upper 2 bytes:
Fixed
Automatic notification of Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Lower 2 bytes: Contact the Fujifilm service
640 CAN related error temperature from SND board 1. Check the CAN cable. 09FD Returned value
DEV
personnel.
stopped. 2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
from motor
reset API.

MT-41
LED Error Detailed
641 Software logic error Failed in software control sequence
09FE None DEV
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
642 Software logic error Failed in software control sequence
29FE None DEV
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
Upper
two bytes:
Board malfunction/CAN communication error
Processing Contact the Fujifilm service
643 API/driver related error Return value from API is error. 1. Check the CAN cable. 09FF Lower two
DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CPU board/SND board.
bytes: Return
value from API
Upper
two bytes:
DEN
personnel.
bytes: Return
value from API
Density measurement Failed in reading density Incorrect software installation error, malfunction of
645 control parameter file measurement control parameter
1. Re-install the software. 0401 None DEN
personnel.
read error files at system start. 2. Replace the CF.
Density measurement Failed in software control sequence the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
646 sequence error during density measurement. 1. Re-install the software. 2402 None DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-42
LED Error Detailed
The density value measured by the density
measurement section is abnormal.
1. Check if the density measurement sections
such as density measurement LED, LED
board, PDD board, connectors between
boards, density measurement sensor power
The density value measured by the fuse, etc. are normal.
Density measurement Contact the Fujifilm service
647 data error
density measurement section is 2. Check if the film sensitivity is normal. 2403 None DEN
personnel.
abnormal.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the
SND board or CF.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND
board.
5. Replace the CF.
Density measurement Failed in creating files when writing the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
648 data write error density measurement AD data. 1. Re-install the software. 2404 4-A DEN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
No density measurement data as density
No density No density measurement AD data measurement was not performed. Contact the Fujifilm service
649 measurement data in the DRAM of the PRT. After performing density measurement, acquire 2405 None DEN
personnel.
AD data.
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is
normal.
2. Check if the film conveyance position and
Failed to detect starting point of the speed are correct.
Density measurement
density pattern from the number of Contact the Fujifilm service
650 staring point detection
effective AD data measured by the
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the 2406 None DEN
personnel.
error SND board or CF.
density measurement section. 3. Re-install the software.
board.
5. Replace the CF.

MT-43
LED Error Detailed
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is
normal.
speed are correct.
Failed to detect the ending point of
Density measurement
the density pattern from the number Contact the Fujifilm service
651 ending point detection
of effective AD data measured by
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the 2407 None DEN
personnel.
error SND board or CF.
the density measurement section.
board.
5. Replace the CF.
The number of effective AD data measured by
the density measurement section is less than the
minimum number of effective data (Note).
1. Check if the density of the film is normal.
speed are correct.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the

The number of effective density SND board or CF.
Insufficient number
measurement data measured by 3. Re-install the software. Contact the Fujifilm service
652 of effective density
the density measurement section is 4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND
2408 4-B DEN
personnel.
measurement data
insufficient. board.
5. Replace the CF.
Note:
The number of effective data is 90% of the
number of data logically measured. The number
of effective data required for 24-steps pattern is
above 3105, that for 17-steps pattern is above
2300, and that for QC pattern is above 864.
Upper
two bytes:
DEN
personnel.
bytes: Return
value from API

MT-44
LED Error Detailed
Upper
two bytes:
DEN
personnel.
bytes: Return
value from API
Polygon control
Failed in reading the polygon control the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
655 parameter file read
parameter file during system start. 1. Re-install the software.
0502 FFFF POL
personnel.
error
2. Replace the CF.
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRN board, or
LDD board
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the PC-
Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
Detected polygon rotation error for following.
Polygon error Contact the Fujifilm service
656 (FATAL)
three times continuously during 1. Check and replace the wiring connector 0510 FFFF POL
personnel.
scanner initialization diagnosis. between the scanner unit, LDD board, etc. and
PRN board.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRN board, or
LDD board
Detected polygon rotation error following.
Polygon error Number of Contact the Fujifilm service
657 (WARNING)
during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector 2510 diagnosis
POL
personnel.
diagnosis. between the scanner unit, LDD board, etc. and
PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Failed in reading the film edge
Parameter file reading the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
660 failure
sensor control parameter file during
0810 FFFF ESN
personnel.
system startup.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-45
LED Error Detailed
Film is not conveyed to the correct position,
malfunction of the film edge sensor LED,
malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of
the SND board.
1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor
The average value read by the film monitoring.
Edge sensor average Contact the Fujifilm service
661 value data error
edge sensor is abnormal (outside 2. Replace the film edge sensor if operations are 2811 8-B ESN
personnel.
range). unstable in the above.
board.
4. If the problem still persists, check the
mechanism if film conveyance is carried out
properly.
Data file cannot be created because printing was
No data or cannot create file when
not carried out once or there is no data acquired Contact the Fujifilm service
662 No acquired data acquiring film edge sensor related
from the film edge sensor.
2812 8-C ESN
personnel.
data files.
After printing, acquire the file.
Failed in data write when creating the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
663 Data write failure
film edge sensor related data file. 1. Re-install the software.
2813 FFFF ESN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.
Value of the PLL initial value data
PLL initial value illegal the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
664 data acquisition
received from the SCN unit during
2814 0 ESN
personnel.
system start was 0.
2. Replace the CF.
Value of the PLL current value data
PLL current value the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
665 illegal data acquisition
received from the SCN unit during
2815 0 ESN
personnel.
system start was 0.
2. Replace the CF.
Failed in opening the file when
666 File open failure creating film edge sensor related
2816 FFFF ESN
personnel.
data file.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-46
LED Error Detailed
Film is not conveyed to the correct position,
malfunction of the film edge sensor LED,
malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of
the SND board.
1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor
Film edge sensor The film edge sensor read value monitoring.
667 acquired value data (data) was abnormal (outside 2. If operations are still unstable after the above, 2819 8-B ESN
personnel.
error range). replace the film edge sensor.
board.
4. If the problem still persists, check the
mechanism if film conveyance is carried out
properly.
Film edge sensor has not returned to home
position.
Or malfunction of film edge sensor LED, film edge
Film edge sensor Value was abnormal (outside sensor, SND board.
acquisition value data range) in the home position check 1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor Contact the Fujifilm service
668 error (Pre-reading before film edge sensor data monitoring.
2820 8-B ESN
personnel.
home position check) reading. 2. If operations are still unstable after the above,
replace the film edge sensor.
board.
Scanner control system related
external file access error
• File read error
Scanner control the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
680 system file error
• File write error
0501 FFFF SCN
personnel.
• File conversion error
2. Replace the CF.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Scanner control driver Failed in scanner control driver the CF. Contact the Fujifilm service
681 setup error setup when system was started up. 1. Re-install the software.
0504 FFFF SCN
personnel.
2. Replace the CF.

MT-47
LED Error Detailed
Detected frame memory error the PRN board. Contact the Fujifilm service
682 Frame memory error
during memory diagnosis. 1. Re-install the software.
0505 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Detected line memory error during the PRN board. Contact the Fujifilm service
683 Line memory error
memory diagnosis. 1. Re-install the software.
0506 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Malfunction of the scanner unit or PRN board.
Detected LD error for three times
following. Contact the Fujifilm service
684 LD error continuously during scanner
1. Check and replace the wiring connector
0512 FFFF SCN
personnel.
initialization diagnosis.
between the scanner unit and PRN board.
Detected starting point detection Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
starting point detection error for three times continuously following. Contact the Fujifilm service
685 error during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector
0513 FFFF SCN
personnel.
diagnosis. between the scanner unit and PRN board.
Detected leading edge detection Utility, and if errors are detected, perform the
Leading edge error for three times continuously following. Contact the Fujifilm service
686 detection error during scanner initialization 1. Check and replace the wiring connector
0514 FFFF SCN
personnel.
diagnosis. between the scanner unit and PRN board.

MT-48
LED Error Detailed
jammed film.
SD2, MD1, ME1
motors.
Leading edge Failed in detecting film leading Contact the Fujifilm service
687 detection timeout edge during recording.
board. 0515 FFFF SCN
personnel.
following.
jammed film.
SD2, MD1, ME1
motors.
Image recording Failed in detecting image recording Contact the Fujifilm service
688 completion timeout completion during recording.
board. 0516 FFFF SCN
personnel.
following.

MT-49
LED Error Detailed
Failed in setting of leading edge
Leading edge search following. Contact the Fujifilm service
689 power setting error
search power.
0517 FFFF SCN
personnel.
(Laser amount fault)
Malfunction of the PRN board.
PRN board fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
690 disconnection
PRN board fuse disconnection Perform the following. 0518 FFFF SCN
personnel.
1. Check and replace the PRN board fuse.
Main scanning width Contact the Fujifilm service
691 adjustment error
Input number of PLL value is illegal. Re-enter PLL value. 1521 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Scanning position Input number of start point pixels is Contact the Fujifilm service
692 adjustment error illegal.
Re-enter the start point pixels. 1523 FFFF SCN
personnel.
Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the
PDM task panel driver PDM task panel driver initialization Contact the Fujifilm service
695 initialization error error
conditions. If no improvements are seen, replace 0701 arbitrary value PNL
personnel.
the CF.
PNL task setting Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the
PNL task setting information file Contact the Fujifilm service
696 information file read
read error
personnel.
error the CF.
PNL task setting Reboot the system or reinstall and observe the
PNL task setting information file Contact the Fujifilm service
697 information file
description error
personnel.
description error the CF.
Setup error of sensor driver, FPMC
driver
Error caused by software bug and incorrect Contact the Fujifilm service
700 Device set error • FPMC time monitoring setting
settings which essentially does not occur.
02FF 2-D-1 FLH
personnel.
error
• Message ID specification error

MT-50
LED Error Detailed
Conveyance system related
external file access error
• File read error
Conveyance system the CF, inappropriate data, or insufficient data. Contact the Fujifilm service
701 file error
• File write error
0201 2-B-1 FLH
personnel.
• File conversion error
2. Replace the CF.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Error caused by software bug and incorrect Contact the Fujifilm service
702 FPMC error (At start) FPMC motor drive failure
control timing which essentially does not occur.
3202 2-C-1 FLH
personnel.
Disconnection of the power supply fuse (F08).
1. Using the PC-Utility, perform monitoring and
Power supply fuse Disconnection of power supply fuse Contact the Fujifilm service
703 (F08) disconnection (F08).
mechanism adjustments 0215 2-A-5 FLH
personnel.
2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
personnel.
personnel.
personnel.
personnel.

MT-51
LED Error Detailed
personnel.
personnel.
personnel.
Malfunction of SA2 sensor or malfunction of SA2
port of SND board.
Attempted to check the tray open/
Tray detection sensor perform mechanism adjustments. Contact the Fujifilm service
711 error
close state in initialization and
0224 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
removal, but failed.
motors.
board.
Malfunction of SA1 sensor or malfunction of SA1
port of SND board.
Attempted to check whether 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Tray shutter detection the tray shutter is present in perform mechanism adjustments. Contact the Fujifilm service
712 sensor error initialization and removal, but 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
0226 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
failed. motors.
board.

MT-52
LED Error Detailed
Malfunction of the SA3 sensor, or SOLA1
solenoid.
Or malfunction of the SA3 port of the SND board,
or malfunction of SOLA1.
Attempted to open the tray, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
713 Tray lock release error
SA3 did not become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments.
0232 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
motors.
board.
Malfunction of SB1 sensor or MB1 motor.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB1 port
Attempted to deviate the removal
controller.
Tray removal unit HP arm from HP (home position) in
1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
714 deviation detection initialization, but SB1 does not
2236 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error become OPEN.
(Currently retrying)
motors.
board.
Attempted to deviate the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
arm from HP (home position) in controller.
Tray removal unit HP
initialization, but SB1 does not 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
715 deviation detection
become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments. 0237 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error
motors.
board.

MT-53
LED Error Detailed
Attempted to return the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
controller.
arm to HP (home position) in
Tray removal unit HP 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
716 return detection error
initialization, but SB11 does not
perform mechanism adjustments. 2238 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE.
(Currently retrying) motors.
board.
controller.
arm to HP (home position) in
initialization, but SB11 does not
personnel.
become CLOSE.
(Retryover) motors.
board.
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or MD2 motor.
of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
Attempted to set grip roller to HP controller.
Grip HP detection (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
718 error SD4 does not become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments. 2244 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board.
Grip HP detection (home position) in initialization, but 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
719 error SD4 does not become OPEN. perform mechanism adjustments. 0245 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
motors.
board.

MT-54
LED Error Detailed
Attempted to set grip roller from HP of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
controller.
(home position) to gripping position
720 Grip detection error in initialization, but SD4 does not
personnel.
become CLOSE.
board.
Attempted to set grip roller from HP of the SND board, or malfunction of the MD2
controller.
(home position) to gripping position
721 Grip detection error in initialization, but SD4 does not
personnel.
become CLOSE.
(Retryover) motors.
board.
Malfunction of the SD3 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Attempted to set stopper plate from of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
stop position to release position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate release Contact the Fujifilm service
722 detection error
in initialization, but SD3 does not perform mechanism adjustments. 2248 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Currently retrying) solenoid.
board.
stop position to release position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate release Contact the Fujifilm service
723 detection error
personnel.
become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Retryover) solenoid.
board.

MT-55
LED Error Detailed
release position to stop position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate Contact the Fujifilm service
724 detection error
personnel.
become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Currently retrying) solenoid.
board.
release position to stop position 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Stopper plate Contact the Fujifilm service
725 detection error
personnel.
become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
(Retryover) solenoid.
board.
Set film trays or check files.
All film trays not- Error when all film trays were set 1. Using the PC-Utility, check settings of film Contact the Fujifilm service
726 mounted error as unmounted used. 0253 FFFF FLH
personnel.
2. If no problem, check the files.
Malfunction of the SB2 sensor or MB1 motor.
Attempted to lower the removal of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
arm from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray film surface position to surface detection 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
727 detection error position in removal, but SB12 does perform mechanism adjustments. 2258 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
not become CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
board.

MT-56
LED Error Detailed
arm from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray film surface position to surface detection 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
728 detection error position in removal, but SB12 does perform mechanism adjustments. 0259 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
(Retryover) motors.
board.
arm from surface detection position controller.
Tray film suction to suction detection position in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
729 detection error removal, but SB2 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 2262 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
board.
arm from surface detection position controller.
Tray film suction to suction detection position in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
730 detection error removal, but SB2 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 0263 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
board.
Attempted to rise the removal arm of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray removal unit HP position to HP (home position) in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
731 rise detection error removal, but SB1 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 2270 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
board.

MT-57
LED Error Detailed
Attempted to rise the removal arm of the SND board, or malfunction of the MB1
from upper dead point detection controller.
Tray removal unit HP position to HP (home position) in 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
732 rise detection error removal, but SB1 does not become perform mechanism adjustments. 0271 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
(Retryover) motors.
board.
controller.
Tray removal unit HP arm from HP (home position) after
733 deviation detection removal operation, but SB11 does
personnel.
error not become OPEN.
board.
controller.
Tray removal unit HP arm from HP (home position) after
734 deviation detection removal operation, but SB11 does
personnel.
error not become OPEN.
(Retryover) motors.
board.
controller.
arm to HP (home position) after
removal operation, but SB1 does
personnel.
not become CLOSE.
board.

MT-58
LED Error Detailed
controller.
arm to HP (home position) after
removal operation, but SB1 does
personnel.
not become CLOSE.
(Retryover) motors.
board.
controller.
Although the grip roller is in the HP
737 Grip HP absent error (home position) state, but SD4 is
personnel.
already closed.
motors.
board.
controller.
Although the grip roller is in the
738 Grip absent error gripping state, but SD4 is already
personnel.
open.
motors.
board.
controller.
Attempted to set grip roller to HP
Grip HP detection 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
739 error
(home position) in printing, but SD4
personnel.
does not become OPEN.
motors.
board.

MT-59
LED Error Detailed
Grip HP detection (home position) while checking the 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
740 error gripping operation using PC-Utility, perform mechanism adjustments.
0285 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
but SD4 does not become OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/
motors.
board.
Attempted to set grip roller from controller.
HP (home position) to gripping 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and Contact the Fujifilm service
741 Grip detection error
position in printing, but SD4 does perform mechanism adjustments.
2286 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
motors.
board.
Attempted to set grip roller from
controller.
HP (home position) to gripping
742 Grip detection error position while checking the grip-
0287 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
ping operation using PC-Utility, but
SD4 does not become CLOSE.
motors.
board.

MT-60
LED Error Detailed
of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Attempted to set stopper plate from
Stopper plate release stop position to release position in Contact the Fujifilm service
743 detection error printing, but SD3 does not become
personnel.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
CLOSE.
solenoid.
board.
of the SND board, or malfunction of the SOLD1.
Attempted to set stopper plate from
Stopper plate release position to stop position in Contact the Fujifilm service
744 detection error printing, but SD3 does not become
personnel.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/
OPEN.
solenoid.
board.
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB2 motor.
At completion of removal process, controller.
Tray conveyor unit
did not detect normal SD1 CLOSE 1. Check if film has dropped. Contact the Fujifilm service
745 entrance detection
(film leading edge detection). 2. Using PC-Utility, check sensor, motor, and
2290 2-A-1 FLH
personnel.
error
(Currently retrying) perform mechanism adjustments.
motors.
board.
A sub-scanning speed correction The thermistor in the recording section is not in
calculation was performed based stable operation.
Sub-scanning speed
on the film recording section Or the machine temperature fluctuates greatly. Contact the Fujifilm service
746 correction calculation
temperature before recording, but 1. Check the recording section thermistor.
22D5 2-F-4 FLH
personnel.
error
the result is out of tolerance range 2. Collect the internal temperature data.
of speed. 3. Review the correction calculation.

MT-61
LED Error Detailed
Malfunction of the SND board.
Failed in driving motor due to 1. Using PC-Utility, check sensors, motors, and
Tray removal unit Contact the Fujifilm service
747 motor drive error
muting of MB1 with initialization of perform mechanism adjustments. 22E2 2-A-4 FLH
personnel.
removal unit. 2. If the problem still persists, replace SND
board.

MT-62
4. ACQUIRING ART-PC LOGS
When ART-PC related problems occur, acquire ART-PC logs.
<REMARKS>
The “ART-PC” folder is hidden.
1. Open Internet Explorer, enter the following path directly at the address
area, and press the [ENTER] key to open.
l Windows Vista
C:\ProgramData\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
l Windows XP
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
2. Acquire both “ART-PC.log” and “ART-PC_old.log”.

MT-63
BLANK PAGE

CONTROL SHEET
3, 10, 49, 57, 67, 67.1, 67.2, 86-93
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 3, 45, 49, 57, 57.1, 57.2, 66, 67,
68, 78, 83-92
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 3, 65-67, 67.1, 67.2, 83, 87, 94, 95
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

MC-1
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, <INSTRUCTIONS>
The diagrams in this manual display the CHECK and FIT ON icons where
REPLACEMENTS, AND ADJUSTMENTS necessary.
When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.
This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in • CHECK icon
: When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if
removal and installation. reinstalling positions must be checked or adjusted.
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Service Parts List. This symbol is shown in illustrations of parts removal
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and procedures. Whenever this is shown, be sure to refer to “n
adjustments of parts. CHECK/Adjusting procedure”.
WARNING • FIT ON icon : When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the
boss is required. However, this is not indicated on bosses
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment used for enhancing assembly and preventing assembly
before starting work. accidents.
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “SAFETY PRECAUTION”.
{SAFETY PRECAUTION}
CAUTION
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards and optical units. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause
damage to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
• Never remove the screws painted in red.
• Never remove the upper cover of the optical unit.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts.
When installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.
• When removing the covers, insert shutter into the film tray to prevent
exposure of film to light.
• Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power
cable and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing
the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and
retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original
states upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to
the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service
manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly
secure the parts.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-1

MC-2
CONTENTS 4. REMOVAL UNIT 4.
4.1
REMOVAL UNIT
Removal Unit
MC-22
MC-22
4.2 Suction Cup Arm MC-24
4.3 Removal Drive Cam MC-25
1. COVERS 1. COVERS MC-4 4.4 Suction Cup MC-29
1.1 Covers which can be Removed Individually MC-4 4.5 Bellows MC-30
1.2 Covers which Need to be Removed 4.6 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB2) MC-32
in Certain Order MC-5 4.7 Film Removing Motor (MB1) MC-33
4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB2) MC-34
4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB1) MC-35
FPEC004A.AI
5. CONVEYOR UNIT 5. CONVEYOR UNIT MC-37

FPEC001A.AI
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly MC-37
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly MC-39
5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower) MC-40
2. FRAME 2. FRAME MC-9 5.4 Stopper Assembly MC-41
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly MC-9 5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1) MC-42
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower) MC-43
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5) MC-44
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide MC-45
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller MC-46
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1) MC-47
5.11 Conveyance Gear MC-49
FPEC005A.AI
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT 6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT MC-50

FPEC002A.AI
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit MC-50
6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller MC-53
6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) MC-56
3. FILM LOADING UNIT 3. FILM LOADING UNIT MC-11 6.4 Flywheel MC-58
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit MC-11 6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1) MC-61
3.2 Film Tray MC-13
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA2) MC-14
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly MC-18
3.5 Shutter Lock Mechanism MC-19
3.6 Squeezing Roller (Upper) MC-20
3.7 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor (SA1) MC-21
FPEC006A.AI
FPEC003A.AI

MC-3
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT MC-65 10. CONTROLLER 10. CONTROLLER MC-79
7.1 Scanner Unit MC-65 10.1 PSU27A/PSU28B Board MC-79
10.2 PRN28A Board MC-81
10.3 CPU28A Board MC-83
10.4 DIMM MC-84
10.5 CF (Compact Flash Memory) MC-85
FPEC007A.AI FPEC010A.AI
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT MC-68 11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT 11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE MC-86
8.1 Film Cooling Section MC-68 SOFTWARE 11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing
8.2 Heat Development Rack Assembly MC-69 (or Settings-Changeable Models) MC-87
8.3 Heat Development Roller MC-71
8.4 Thermal Protector MC-72
8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor
(MG1) MC-74
8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide MC-75
12. RESTORING THE COMPACT 12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH

FPEC008A.AI
FLASH MEMORY (CF) MEMORY (CF) MC-91
12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for
Servicing MC-91
12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF MC-92
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT 9. FILM RELEASE UNIT MC-76
9.1 Film Release Unit MC-76
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board
(LED28A) MC-78
13. C l e a n i n g t h e D u s t - P r o o f 13. CLEANING THE DUST-PROOF GLASS OF

Glass of the Scanner Unit THE SCANNER UNIT (839Y100057 ONLY) MC-94
(839Y100057 only)
FPEC009A.AI
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-3

MC-4
1. COVERS 1.1.2 Belt Cover
n Removing Procedure
1.1 Covers which can be Removed
1. Open the front cover.
Individually
2. Remove the belt cover.
1.1.1 Rear Cover
FPEC0110.AI
1. Remove the rear cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

MC-5
1.2 Covers which Need to be n Reinstalling Procedure
Removed in Certain Order Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
1.2.1 Left Cover

FPEC0111.AI
Removing Procedure
n

2. Remove the left cover.

MC-6
1.2.2 Upper Cover 1.2.3 Film Release Unit Cover
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the rear cover. 1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the left cover. 2. Remove the left cover.
3. Open the front cover. 3. Open the front cover.
4. Open the right cover. 4. Open the right cover.
5. Remove the upper cover. 5. Remove the upper cover.
6. Remove the film release unit cover.
n Reinstalling Procedure n Reinstalling Procedure

Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

MC-7
1.2.4 Film Loading Unit Cover 1.2.5 Lower Right Cover
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray. 1. Remove the film tray.

{MC:3.2_Film Tray} {MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Open the front cover. 2. Open the front cover.

3. Remove the film loading unit cover. 3. Remove the film loading unit cover.
4. Remove the lower right cover.
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. n Reinstalling Procedure

MC-8
1.2.6 Right Cover
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray.

{MC:3.2_Film Tray}

3. Remove the film loading unit cover.
4. Remove the lower right cover.
5. Remove the right cover.

MC-9
2. FRAME <NOTE>
To remove the interlock switch assembly, disconnect the connector (faston
terminal) by pressing in the unlocking latch located on the connector as
shown below.
2.1 Interlock Switch Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the following covers.

• Rear cover FPEC0210.AI
• Right cover
• Upper cover n Reinstalling Procedure
2. Remove the interlock switch assembly. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
If the interlock switch has been removed from the interlock switch assembly,
refer to “n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure” and adjust the attaching position.
{n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure}

MC-10
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 2. Close the right cover and front cover.
1. Temporarily secure the interlock switch assembly. 3. Adjust the attached position of the interlock switch assembly.
<NOTE> <NOTE>
Move the interlock switch assembly to the very back and temporarily • After confirming the “click” sound of the interlock switch, move it by
secure it. another 1 mm towards the front of the equipment.
• When moving the interlock switch assembly to the front at #2 in the
following figure, move it horizontally.
4. Open and close the front cover, and check that the interlock switch
turns ON/OFF from the sounds made.
5. Using the PC Utility, check that the interlock function is working

normally.
{MU:2.4 [10-4]_Interlock Function}

MC-11
3. FILM LOADING UNIT 4. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film tray. FPEC0340.AI
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Remove the film loading unit cover.

3. Move the vertical conveyor unit drive transmission gear assembly.
Reinstalling Procedure
n

MC-12
Engagement Adjustment of Vertical Conveyance Unit Drive
n
Transmission Gear
When the bracket of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission gear has been
removed or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to
adjust the engagement of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission gear.
<REMARKS>
The fixing screws (TP3x6) of the bracket of the vertical conveyance unit drive
transmission gear are painted in yellow.
1. Loosen the fixing screws of the vertical conveyance unit drive

transmission gear.
2. Align the flanges of the vertical conveyance unit drive transmission

gear and vertical conveyance roller gear, and secure the fixing screws.

MC-13
3.2 Film Tray <NOTE>
The manual release arm can be operated with moderate force, and may damage
if pushed in too strongly or pushed with a screwdriver.
Removing Procedure
n
<NOTE>
When pulling out the film tray from the equipment, insert the FPEC0341.AI
shutter into the film tray to prevent exposure of film to light.
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.

• Rear cover
• Left cover

<REMARKS>
The length from the hole for inserting a screwdriver to the manual release arm is
120 mm horizontally and 15 mm vertically.
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removal. Note that there is no need to move the
manual release arm with a screwdriver, simply push in the film tray.

MC-14
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA2) Reinstalling Procedure
n
Removing Procedure
n 1. Temporarily secure the tray detection switch bracket.
<NOTE>
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0342.AI Temporarily secure with the tray detection switch bracket moved to the very
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit} end.
2. Remove the film tray detection switch (SA2).
<NOTE> 2. Insert the film tray into the film loading unit.
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, press in the <NOTE>
unlocking latch located on the connector as shown below.
• If the switch clicks with a sound when pushing in the tray, perform steps
3 to 6.
• If it does not click with a sound, perform only step 8.

MC-15
3. At the point when the switch clicks with a sound, measure the length 5. Measure the length from the rear end of the film tray to the film loading
from the rear end of the film tray to the film loading unit frame (A). unit frame again (B).
4. Push in the film tray and check that it locks, and then pull out the tray. 6. Perform one of the following procedure using the value obtained by
subtracting (B) from the measured value (A).
<REMARKS>
• When above 0mm : Step 7
The film tray may shake slightly even when locked. To improve the precision of • When value is negative : Step 8
attaching the tray detection switch, pull out the film tray towards the front of the
equipment in the locked state, and then proceed to the next step.

MC-16
7. Push the tray detection switch in the arrow direction as shown in the 8. Push the tray detection switch in the arrow direction as shown in the
following figure, and tighten the screw firmly. following figure, and tighten the screw firmly.
<NOTE> <NOTE>
If the value obtained by subtracting (B) from the measured value (A) in step Tighten the screw after pushing the tray detection switch by another 2 mm
6 is as follows, completely tighten the screw at the indicated position. after pushing it in the arrow direction and the actuator releases the switch
• 0 mm : Move the film detection switch by 2mm in the arrow direction, button with a click sound.
and completely tighten the screw.
• +1 mm : Move the film detection switch by 1 mm in the arrow direction,
and completely tighten the screw.
• +2 mm : Completely tighten the screw there.

MC-17
n CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
• Check that when the tray is pushed in the locked state, there is still extra actuator
stroke.
• Check that when the tray is pulled in the locked state, the switch does not make a
click sound.
<NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, ensure that they are
facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect
when performing periodic maintenance, etc.

MC-18
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly Reinstalling Procedure
n
Removing Procedure
n <NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, ensure that they are
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. FPEC0343.AI
facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to disconnect
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit} when performing periodic maintenance, etc.
2. Remove the tray lock assembly.
<NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, press in the

MC-19
3.5 Shutter Lock Mechanism Reinstalling Procedure
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removal procedure.
Removing Procedure
n <REMARKS>
This shutter lock mechanism works to lock in the shutter when it is inserted to pull out
1. Remove the film tray. FPEC0344.AI
the tray by moving the pin into the hole on the shutter.
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
2. Remove the shutter lock mechanism.

MC-20
3.6 Squeezing Roller (Upper)
Removing Procedure
n
{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}

<NOTE>
When removing the squeezing roller, be sure to not drop or lose the roller.
2. Remove the squeezing roller (upper).
n

MC-21
3.7 Film Pack/Shutter Detection
Sensor (SA1)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0346.AI

{MC:3.2_Film Tray}
3. Remove the film loading unit cover

4. Remove the film pack/shutter detection sensor (SA1).
n

MC-22
4. REMOVAL UNIT 3. Disconnect the connectors, and release the clamps.
<NOTE>
4.1 Removal Unit To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, press in the
Removing Procedure
n

2. Remove the removal exit cover.

MC-23
4. Remove the removal unit. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<NOTE>
When removing part and/or adjusting the removal unit removed, place it
on the film loading unit to prevent deformation of the bottom part of the • When reinstalling the removal unit, first attach the following circled screw.
removal unit.
• When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA2, ensure that they
are facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to
disconnect when performing periodic maintenance, etc.

MC-24
4.2 Suction Cup Arm 3. Remove the suction cup arm.
Removing Procedure
n
2. Move the suction cup arm.

<NOTE>
When the suction cup arm is at its home position, as the auxiliary plate is
touching the suction cup arm and is therefore difficult to remove, move the
suction cup arm in the arrow direction.
n

MC-25
4.3 Removal Drive Cam 5. Disconnect the connectors from the gear fixing cover (front inner).
Removing Procedure
n 6. Remove the gear fixing cover (front inner).
1. Remove the removal unit. FPEC0442.AI
{MC:4.1_Removal Unit}
2. Move the suction cup arm to the home position.

3. Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2).
{MC:4.6_Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB2)}
4. Remove the gear fixing cover (front outer).

MC-26
7. Remove the removal drive cam (front) together with the crank. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE> <NOTE>
When removing the removal drive cam (front), be careful not to drop or lose • As the procedure for installing the removal drive cam is the same for the
the suction cup arm assembly bearing. front and rear, only the installing procedure for the front is described.
• When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm to
the home position.
1. Reinstall the removal drive cam to the removal unit together with the
crank.
2. Reinstall the idle gear to the shaft.

3. Reinstall the link gear to the gear fixing cover (front inner).
<NOTE>
At this time, the two holes on gear 1 should be at the following positions
(top).
8. Remove the removal drive cam (rear) in the same way as removal
drive came (front).
<NOTE>
If removing the front and rear removal drive cams together, it will be
necessary to adjust the phases of these cams.

MC-27
4. Insert the pins into the two holes on link gear, adjust the phase of the 5. Pull out the pin, and check that the link gear is attached correctly.
removal drive cam, and reinstall the gear fixing cover (front inner).
<NOTE>
<NOTE>
The two holes on link gear should be aligned to the holes on the removal
• Do not install the bearing of the idle gear at this time. drive cam.
• The pins to be used must not be extremely thin or easy to deform and
should fit the holes on the gear as closely as possible.
<REMARKS>
Any gear in position of the removal drive cam can be checked by visually
checking the mark on the cam from the long hole of the link gear.

MC-28
6. If with the phases of the front removal drive cam and that of the rear 9. Reinstall the gear fixing cover (front outer).
removal drive cam corresponding, disengage idle gear, align the rib
position of idle gear and that of link gear, and adjust the front and rear 10. Reinstall the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2).
phases.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
After reinstalling the removal drive cam, check that the suction cup arm moves
smoothly. Also visually check that the suction cup arm is horizontal.
<REMARKS>
When moving the suction cup arm, rotate the shaft by a slotted screwdriver as shown
in the following figure.
<NOTE>
After checking the operation, move the suction cup arm to the home position.
7. Reinstall the bearing to the shaft of idle gear.

8. Reinstall the exit roller gear.
MC-29
4.4 Suction Cup
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the suction cup arm. FPEC0443.AI
{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
2. Remove the suction cup.
n

MC-30
4.5 Bellows 3. Remove the bellows.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When removing the bellows, be sure to not lose the springs.
1. Remove the suction cup arm. FPEC0444.AI
2. Remove the suction cup unit.

MC-31
n Reinstalling Procedure nCHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check for air leak by the following steps.
<INSTRUCTIONS> 1. Suction the film with the suction cup manually and check that the film
• When reinstalling, insert the second groove from the top of the bellows into does not drop off for about 60 seconds.
the plate.
• Leave a clearance of about 1.5 to 2.0 mm between the bellows anf holder. 2. Press the suction cup arm against the film until the bottommost
position of the actuator for detection SB2 passes the SB2 detection
point.

MC-32
4.6 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor
(MB2)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0445.AI
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.

2. Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB2).
n

MC-33
4.7 Film Removing Motor (MB1)
Removing Procedure
n
2. Remove the film removing motor (MB1).
n

MC-34
4.8 Film Surface Detection Sensor
(SB2)
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the suction cup arm.

FPEC0447.AI
2. Remove the film surface detection sensor (SB2).
n

MC-35
4.9 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection 3. Remove the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB1).
Sensor (SB1)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0448.AI
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.

2. Move the suction cup arm from the home position.

MC-36
n
<NOTE>
After installing the sensor, if the cable in the removal unit is loose, pull it outside
slightly without disconnecting the connector, and secure with the clamp.

MC-37
5. CONVEYOR UNIT 2. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the following covers. FPEC0530.AI

• Belt cover
• Rear cover

MC-38
n
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check that the hook of the rear gear is hooked onto the groove of the shaft.
<NOTE>
• When installing the conveyor unit exit assembly to the sub-scanning unit/
upper conveyor unit, insert the protrusion on the conveyor unit exit assembly
base into the slide guide hole and slide to the end.
• Attach the rear gear while pressing the shaft shown below from the front of
the equipment.

MC-39
5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller
Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0531.AI
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.

{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
n

MC-40
5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide
(Lower)
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0532.AI


{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
n

MC-41
5.4 Stopper Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly. FPEC0533.AI


{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
4. Remove the stopper assembly.
n

MC-42
5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1) 4. Remove the stopper solenoid (SOLD1).
Removing Procedure
n


n

MC-43
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller Reinstalling Procedure
n
(Lower) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
FPEC0535.AI




{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
5. Remove the conveyor unit exit roller (lower).

MC-44
5.7 Film Edge Sensor (SD5) 5. Remove the film edge sensor (SD5).
Removing Procedure
n



{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
n

MC-45
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Engagement Adjustment of Conveyance Unit Drive
n
Transmission Gear
Guide
When the bracket of the conveyance unit drive transmission gear has been removed
or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to adjust the
Removing Procedure
n engagement of the conveyance unit drive transmission gear.
<REMARKS>
FPEC0537.AI
The fixing screws (TP3x6) of the bracket of the conveyance unit drive transmission
2. Open the right cover. gear are painted in yellow.
3. Remove the upper conveyor unit open/close guide. 1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Loosen the fixing screws.
3. While ensuring appropriate backlash (clearance) between the
conveyance unit drive transmission gear and turn roller gear shown in
the figure, secure the fixing screws.
n

MC-46
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the upper conveyor unit open/close guide. FPEC0538.AI
{MC:5.8_Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide}
2. Remove the conveyor unit turn roller.
n

MC-47
5.10 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1) 4. Remove the plate of the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit. FPEC0540.AI
{MC:6.1_Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}
2. Remove the scanner unit.

{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
3. Turn over the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.

<NOTE>
When turning over the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit, do so while
rotating it in the direction which does not add load on the upper conveyor
unit open/close guide.

MC-48
5. Remove the film conveyance motor (MD1).
n

MC-49
5.11 Conveyance Gear
n Engagement Adjustment of the Conveyer Unit

Exit Gear
When the bracket of the conveyer unit exit gear has been
removed or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow
FPEC0541.AI
the steps below to perform engagement adjustment of the

conveyer unit exit gear.
<REMARKS>
The fixing screws (TP3x6) for the bracket of the conveyer unit exit gear are painted in
yellow.
1. Loosen the fixing screws of the conveyer unit exit gear.

2. Insert a 0.5mm-thick spacer between the conveyer unit exit gear and
the conveyer unit exit assembly gear, and tighten the fixing screws.
<NOTE>
The spacer must be inserted between the flanges of both gears.
<REMARKS>
The thickness of a 150mm steel ruler is 0.5mm. 3. Remove the spacer. Check that the spacer comes out easily.
<REMARKS>
If the spacer does not come out easily, the gear engagement may be too tight.
4. After attaching the removed parts, power on the equipment.

5. After the equipment started up, output a flat pattern from the PC-
Utility.
{MU:2.4 [6-4]_Flat Pattern}
6. Check that there is no horizontal streak unevenness in 55mm pitch on

the output film.
<NOTE>
The unevenness above is caused by tight gear engagement. If the
unevenness appears, perform the adjustment again.

MC-50
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT 4. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing brackets.
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper

Conveyor Unit
Removing Procedure
n

FPEC0630.AI
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}

• Rear cover
• Film loading unit cover
• Rear cover
3. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.

{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}

MC-51
5. Disconnect the connectors.

MC-52
6. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit. WARNING
<REMARKS>
As the stopper has been removed, make sure that the sub-scanning unit/upper
Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit along the slide guide holes on conveyor unit does not fall while pulling it out.
the unit base by 37 mm to the front and by 57 mm to the heat development unit,
and remove it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When removing the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the
following areas with both hands.
n

MC-53
6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller 4. Remove the flat belt (front).
Removing Procedure
n

• Rear cover
• Belt cover

3. Remove the jam removing handle.

MC-54
5. Remove the pulleys (left/right). 6. Remove the sub-scanning unit entrance roller.
<NOTE>
• As the removal procedure of the pulleys is the same for the left and right
sides, only the procedure for the right side is described.
• By rotating the #5 TP4x8, the pulley removing tool and pulley can be
removed together.
• Use the tool only when removing the pulley. It is not required when
reinstalling.
7. Remove the sub-scanning unit exit roller.

MC-55
n
<INSTRUCTIONS>
1. After reinstalling, rotate the jam removing handle four or five times
and check that the sub-scanning unit rollers rotate smoothly, and the
The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the pulley, place the flat belt does not disconnect from the pulley.
marked side out.
<NOTE>
• When attaching the sub-scanning unit roller, be careful not to forget to attach
the waveform washer.
• The pulley has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
pulley coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.

MC-56
6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) 2. Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).
6.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation
Removing Procedure
n FPEC0632.AI
<NOTE>
When replacing the sub-scanning motor (ME1), also replace the ME1 driver
board at the same time.
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.

{MC:6.5_Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1) steps 1 to 6}

MC-57
3. Remove the ME1 driver board. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE>
Reinstall the sub-scanning motor so that the WP3x6 is at the D cut side of the
motor shaft.

MC-57.1
6.3.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor
If the sub-scanning motor (ME1) has been replaced, check/adjust the film conveyance
amount as follows.
1. Print the grid pattern.

{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
2. Measure and calculate “F” and “G” of the output film and check that it
is within the specified value.
{IN:APPENDIX1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
3. If the measured value is out of the specified value, perform “Adjusting

Subscanner” of the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [10-1]_Adjusting Subscanner}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MC-57.1

MC-57.2
BLANK PAGE

MC-58
6.4 Flywheel
Removing Procedure
n

• Rear cover
• Belt cover
2. Remove the flat belt (rear).

MC-59
3. Remove the flywheel. Reinstalling Procedure
n
<NOTE> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• By rotating the #5 TP4x8, the pulley removing tool and flywheel can be
removed together. The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the flywheel, place
• Use the tool only when removing the flywheel. It is not required when the marked side out.
reinstalling.

MC-60
<NOTE>
The flywheel has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
flywheel coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.
CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
n
1. After reinstalling, rotate the jam removing handle four or five times
and check that the flat belt does not disconnect from the flywheel.

MC-61
6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection 4. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing brackets.
Sensor (SE1)
Removing Procedure
n

FPEC0634.AI
{MC:3.2_Film Tray}

• Rear cover
• Film loading unit cover
• Rear cover


MC-62

MC-63
6. Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
<REMARKS>
Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit along the slide guide holes on
and draw it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the

MC-64
7. Remove the film leading edge detection sensor (SE1).
n

MC-65
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 2. Remove the scanner unit.
<NOTE>
7.1 Scanner Unit As the positioning part shown below is mounted accurately by tool, never
attempt to loosen the screws nor remove it even if not painted in red.
CAUTION l When Using 839Y100057

• The LD/IC may damage due to static electricity. When
removing/reinstalling it, take anti-static measures by
wearing a wrist band, etc. FPEC0710.AI
• Do not remove the upper cover of the scanner unit.

• Do not place your finger inside the laser beam window (at the bottom of the
scanner unit).
• Handle the optical unit gently, making sure not to subject it to shock.
<REMARKS>
This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanner unit.
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When changing the 839Y0060 scanner unit to the 839Y100057 scanner unit,
refer to “7.1.3 Replacing the Scanner Unit (When Changing from 839Y0060 to
839Y100057)”.
{MC:7.1.3_Replacing the Scanner Unit (When changing from 839Y0060 to
839Y100057)}
 Removing Procedure
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.

{MC:6.1_Sub-scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}

MC-66
l When Using 839Y0060  Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure. However perform the
following when installing the scanner unit to the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor
unit.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When pushing the scanner unit against the positioning plate, push gently
without subjecting it to shock.
1. Align the scanner unit to the reinstalling position of the sub-scanning

unit/upper conveyor unit, and secure temporarily with the screws.
2. Push the two positioning brackets and protruded part on the scanner
unit against the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit at the
positions shown in the following figure.
3. Secure the scanner unit with the screws.


MC-67
l When Using 839Y0060 7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit
If the scanner unit has been replaced, the data in the scanner unit data FD or CD-R
provided with the scanner unit needs to be sent to the equipment.
1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.

2. Start the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operation}
3. Backup the equipment data in the PC for servicing (or settings-

changeable models).
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data}
4. Load the scanner data FD or CD-R into the FD drive or CD-ROM drive
of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable model), and copy the
file in the FD or CD-R to the “Indv” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPMIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer
Name\Indv).
5. When using CD-R, as files copied from CD-R are for reading only,
right-click the “Indv” file, click Properties, and unselect the “Read-only”
attribute checkbox.
6. Send the equipment data to the equipment.

 CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 7. After sending the equipment data, reboot the equipment and start the
PC-Utility.
• Make sure that there is no gap between the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit
positioning plate and scanner unit positioning parts. 8. Output the grid pattern using the PC-Utility.
• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
9. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALU FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
10. If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of
“Scanning Width” of the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [8-1-1]_Scanning Width}
11. Measure “B” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALU FOR EACH FILM SIZE}

MC-67.1
12. If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of 7.1.3 Replacing the Scanner Unit (When Changing from
“Scanning Position”. 839Y0060 to 839Y100057)
{MU:2.4 [8-1-2]_Scanning Position} If the 839Y0060 scanner unit of an equipment malfunctions, order a 839Y100057
scanner unit and replace the current scanner unit with it.
13. Perform automatic density correction. In this case, there will be a need to attach a ferrite core to the internal wiring cable, so
{MU:2.4 [7-1]_Auto F.D.C.} the kit for attaching the ferrite core together with the scanner unit will be needed.
14. Check the film density. n Parts that Need to be Ordered

{MU:2.4 [7-2]_Check Density} • Scanner unit (839Y100057) (Includes scanner data CD-R)
• Scanner cable kit (898Y100667) (Includes ferrite core, washer, cable)
{SP:7_SCANNING OPTICS UNIT}

MC-67.2
n Replacing Procedure 3. Connect the coaxial cable for 839Y100057 provided in the kit.
1. Replace with the 839Y100057 scanner unit. 4. Attach the ferrite core to the cable from CN2, CN3, and CN4 from the
{MC:7.1.1_Removal/Reinstallation}
PRN board at the positions shown in the figure.
<NOTE>
At this time, secure the scanner unit to the sub-scanning unit with the two
washers (W6) provided in the scanner cable kit.
2. Remove the coaxial cable for 839Y0060 from the equipment.
5. Install the new scanner data.

{MC:7.1.2_Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit}

MC-68
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT Reinstalling Procedure
n
8.1 Film Cooling Section Engagement Adjustment of Film Cooling Section Drive
n
Transmission Gear
Removing Procedure
n When the bracket of the film cooling section drive transmission gear has been
removed or when the fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to
adjust the engagement of the film cooling section drive transmission gear.
1. Remove the following covers. <REMARKS>
• Left cover The fixing screws (TP3x6) of the bracket of the film cooling section drive transmission
• Upper cover gear are painted in yellow.
2. Remove the film cooling section. 1. Loosen the fixing screws of the film cooling section drive transmission
gear.
2. 2. While ensuring appropriate backlash (clearance) between the film

cooling section drive transmission gear and heat development unit
large gear shown in the figure, secure the fixing screws.

MC-69
8.2 Heat Development Rack 3. Remove the heat development harness bracket.
Assembly
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the film cooling section.

FPEC0821.AI
{MC:8.1_Film Cooling Section}
2. Remove the heat development cover.

MC-70
4. Remove the heat development rack assembly.
<NOTE>
When removing the heat development rack assembly, removing the front
and rear fixing pins will separate the heater assembly and roller assembly.
Therefore do not remove these pins.
<NOTE>
Place the removed heat development rack assembly in the direction shown
below.
n

MC-71
8.3 Heat Development Roller Reinstalling Procedure
n
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the heat development rack assembly. FPEC0822.AI
{MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
2. Remove the heat development roller.

<NOTE>
• Heat development rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development
rack assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
• Do not touch the rubber portion of the removed heat development rollers
and heater side of the heater assembly with bare hand.

MC-72
8.4 Thermal Protector 3. Remove the thermal protector.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the heat development rack assembly. FPEC0825.AI
{MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
2. Remove the heater assembly.

<NOTE>
• Heat development rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development
rack assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
• Do not touch the rubber portion of the removed heat development rollers
and heater side of the heater assembly with bare hand.

MC-73
n
<NOTE>
• When attaching the thermal protector, visually check that the tip of the screw
is not protruding out to the film conveyance side. (Reference screw tightening
torque: 0.6Nm = 6kgcm)
• Take note that the attaching direction of the thermal protector connectors
differ between 1st rack assembly and 2nd rack assembly.
• For 1st rack assembly, attach so that the connectors line up in a straight
line.
• For 2nd rack assembly, attach so that connectors line up diagonally.

MC-74
8.5 Heat Development Unit
Conveyance Motor (MG1)
Removing Procedure
n

FPEC0823.AI
• Rear cover
• Left cover

3. Remove the heat development unit conveyance motor (MG1).
n

MC-75
8.6 Heat Development Unit
Entrance Guide
Removing Procedure
n

FPEC0824.AI
n

MC-76
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT 3. Remove the stay.
9.1 Film Release Unit
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the covers.

• Left cover
• Upper cover
• Film release unit cover
2. Remove the operation panel.

MC-77
4. Remove the film release unit.
n
<NOTE>
Secure the table to the clamp so that the table does not slack around the
density measurement light-emitting board and on the stay when reinstalling the
removal unit.

MC-78
9.2 Density Measurement Light- Reinstalling Procedure
n
Emitting Board (LED28A) Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the covers.

FPEC0911.AI
• Rear cover
• Left cover
• Upper cover
• Film release unit cover
2. Remove the density measurement light-emitting board (LED28A).

CAUTION
When removing/attaching the LED28A board, do not apply strong force to the
metal stay.
Loosening/tightening the screw while pushing it with the screwdriver can
deform the metal stay, which may cause film scratches.

MC-79
10. CONTROLLER 4. Remove the PSU27A/PSU28B board assembly.
10.1 PSU27A/PSU28B Board

CAUTION
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing
maintenance of boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to FPEC1020.AI
electronic parts on the boards.
Removing Procedure
n

• Rear cover
• Left cover
3. Remove the left shield plate.

MC-80
5. Remove the PSU27A board and PSU28B board.

n

MC-81
10.2 PRN28A Board 4. Remove the PRN28A board assembly.
CAUTION
maintenance of boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to FPEC1021.AI
electronic parts on the boards.
Removing Procedure
n

3. Remove the rear shield plate.

MC-82
<NOTE>
The PRN28A board is connected to the CPU28A board by the CN7
connector. When disconnecting the CN7 connector, be careful not to
damage the board.
n

MC-83
10.3 CPU28A Board Reinstalling Procedure
n
CAUTION <REMARKS>
• Replace the CPU board if the lithium battery has worn out. The connecting position of the CPU-J33 connector is as follows.
• Return the old CPU board to the Parts Center (factory).
FPEC1022.AI
• Improper replacement of the battery may result in

explosion. Do not remove or replace the lithium battery by
itself.
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts
on the boards.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the PRN28A board.

{MC:10.2_PRN28A Board}
2. Remove CPU28A board. <NOTE>

When the CPU board of this equipment connected to CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V
CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL has been replaced,
there is a need to register the Mac address using the FFWakeOnLAN Utility of
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR
348CL.
MU:2.4 [1-1-4]_Mac Address}
{CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL Service Manual (MC
Appendix)}

MC-84
10.4 DIMM
CAUTION
maintenance of boards and optical units. FPEC1023.AI
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage

to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
Removing Procedure
n
1. Remove the CPU28A board.

{MU:10.3_CPU28A board}
2. Remove the DIMM.

<REMARKS>
DIMM is attached to the back of the CPU board.
n

MC-85
10.5 CF (Compact Flash Memory)
CAUTION
maintenance of boards. FPEC1024.AI
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage

to electronic parts on the boards.
1. Remove the CPU28A board.

{MU:10.3_CPU28A board}
2. Remove the CF.

<REMARKS>
CF is attached to the back of the CPU board.

MC-86
11. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT
SOFTWARE
The main unit software is provided on CD-R. The DPX PRIMA Copy Tool included in
this main unit software CD-R is required for installing the main unit software.
n Installing the Main Unit Software

Copy the main unit software in the main unit software CD-R to the FTP folder of the
PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models), and install in the equipment via
the network.
<REMARKS>
The main unit software can be installed from the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) connected to the equipment.
{MD:1.1_Functions of Equipment}
n Types of Main Unit Software Installations

• Version upgrade:
The concerned files excluding individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.
• Full installation:
The concerned files including individual data of the currently installed software are
overwritten.
CAUTION
Do not perform settings, etc. of the equipment during the installation of the
main unit software.
<NOTE>
• As performing full installation will clear the individual data in the CF (Compact
Flash memory), the individual data needs to be installed after completing full
installation. Use the latest individual data for installation.
• In version upgrades, individual data will be preserved.

MC-87
11.1 Installing from the PC for Servicing (or 3. Enter the drive name into [Input drive].
Settings-Changeable Models) 4. Click [Copy] of [CD->PC (Installation data copy from CD.)].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software using the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models). Use the main unit software copied to the
FTP folder in the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) when performing
full installation or version upgrading of the equipment.
<REMARKS>
To prepare for times when the PC for servicing does not have a CD drive or the main
unit software CD-R was not brought to the place where the equipment is installed, it is
recommended that “11.1.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models)” is performed beforehand at the service center or service
station beforehand, etc.
11.1.1 Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or

Settings-Changeable Models)
Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models), and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of the
PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models).
1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable

model).
2. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive.
→ “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (“Any drive letter”:\
window is displayed. Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA). When completed, the
[Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R 5. [OK]
and start it.
6. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] window.
<NOTE>
7. Unload the main unit software CD-R form the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc.

MC-88
11.1.2 Upgrading the Version from the PC for Servicing 6. [Upgrading] → [Execute]
1. Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models).
{MC:11.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or
Settings-Changeable Models)}
2. Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been

completed. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
{MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
3. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which

the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for servicing)

5. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) to the equipment.
{MU:2.2.2_Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}
→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade) in the equipment.

When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.
7. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance

tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
<REMARKS>
If the PC-Utility is ended by clicking , unless the pop-up blocker setting of
the browser is canceled, the logout screen will not be displayed.
{MU:2.1.1_Environment of PC for Servicing}

MC-89
8. Close the logout window. 11.1.3 Full Installation from the PC for Servicing
9. Reboot the equipment so that the software is upgraded. 1. Copy the latest main unit software to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models).
10. Check that the equipment whose software version has been upgraded {MC:11.1.1_Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or
starts and operates normally. Settings-Changeable Models)}
11. End the PC-Utility. 2. Check that the preparations of the PC for servicing have been
completed. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
12. Shutdown the PC for servicing. (Only when using the PC for servicing) {MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
13. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network 3. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which
to which the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
servicing)
{MU:2.2.2_Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)}
6. If the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) does not

contain the latest individual data, import the individual data from the
equipment.

MC-90
7. [Full Install] → [Execute] 11. Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-
12. Restore the individual data saved in the PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models) prior to the full installation.
<REMARKS>
The individual data restored will become effective after the equipment is
rebooted.
13. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.].
14. Close the logout window.

15. Reboot the equipment so that the individual data becomes effective.
17. Execute [1-3-2.Set Date] of the PC-Utility to set the system date and
time.
{MU:2.4 [1-3-2]_Set Date}
→ The main unit software is transferred (full installation) in the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears. 18. Execute [1-2-1.Set Rem.Films] of the PC-Utility to set the remaining
number of films.
8. End the PC-Utility by clicking the [Logout] button on the maintenance {MU:2.4 [1-2-1]_Set Rem. Films}
tree.
→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [It logged out 19. Check that the equipment which has been fully installed starts and
from the printer. Please close this page.]. operates normally.
<REMARKS>
20. End the PC-Utility.
If the PC-Utility is ended by clicking , unless the pop-up blocker setting of
the browser is canceled, the logout screen will not be displayed. 21. Shutdown the PC for servicing. (Only when using the PC for servicing)
22. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected. (Only when using the PC for
9. Close the logout window. servicing)
10. Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit
software become effective.

MC-91
12. RESTORING THE COMPACT FLASH 12.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the PC
MEMORY (CF) for Servicing
When the CF becomes defective while the equipment is running, it can be restored by <NOTE>
writing the main unit software. If the PC for servicing does not have a CD-ROM drive or the CD-R containing
<NOTE> the main unit software is not available at the site of installation, perform this
procedure beforehand on the service center or service station, etc.
• The CF cannot be restored if it is physically damaged.
• As all settings are initialized after restoring, there is a need to restore the
equipment individual data. 1. Connect the CF reader/writer to the PC for servicing.
• Do no use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder of the PC for
servicing. Instead copy from the CD-R containing the main unit software. 2. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
3. Insert the CD-R with the main unit software into the CD-ROM drive.
l What to Prepare → The DPX PRIMA Copy Tool automatically starts, and the [DPX PRIMA Copy
• CD-ROM drive Tool] screen appears.
• CF reader/writer
4. Click [EXIT] to quit the DPX PRIMA Copy Tool.
5. Open Windows Explorer of the PC for servicing.
6. Create a new folder anywhere in the PC for servicing.
7. Copy and paste “CFImage.zip” and “DDWin.exe” in the CD-R
containing the main unit software to this new folder.
8. Double-click the “CFImage.zip” copied to decompress it.

→ The “CFImage.img” file is created.
9. To enable use of “CFImage.img”, copy the “CFImage.img” file to the

desired folder.
10. Remove the CD-R containing the main unit software from the PC for
servicing.
This ends the procedure for copying the software to the PC for servicing.

MC-92
12.2 Copying the Main Unit Software to the CF 8. Click [Open].
1. Remove the CF from the equipment.
2. Insert the CF into the CF reader/writer connected to the PC for
servicing.
3. Double-click “DDWin.exe” in the PC for servicing to start DD for

Windows.
9. Click [Restore].
4. Click [Choose disk].
→ The [Choosing a disk] screen appears.
5. Select the CF reader/writer disk, and click [OK].
6. Click [Choose file].

7. Select [All files] at [Files of type], and select [CFImage.img].

MC-93
10. Click [Yes] twice until writing starts.
→ When writing ends, the following screen appears.
11. Click [Verify].

12. Click [Yes] twice until comparison starts.
→ When comparison ends, the following screen appears.
13. Execute [Safely Remove Hardware] and remove the CF.

14. Reinstall the CF in the equipment.
15. Start the equipment and then the PC-Utility.
16. Restore the equipment data in the equipment.
17. Reboot the equipment and check that it operates normally.

MC-94
13. CLEANING THE DUST-PROOF
GLASS OF THE SCANNER UNIT
(839Y100057 ONLY)
<NOTE>
The dust-proof glass should not be cleaned inside the equipment. Remove the
scanner unit from the equipment first, and clean it outside the equipment.
If cleaned inside the equipment, dust and dirt will disperse inside the equipment,
causing other problems.
1. Remove the scanner unit from the sub-scanning unit.

{MC:7.1.1_Removal/Reinstallation}
2. Use the airblow to remove the dirt (dusts) on the dust-proof glass
attached to the laser irradiation opening.

MC-95
BLANK PAGE

CONTROL SHEET
1, 1.1, 1.2, 2, 7, 12, 15, 15.1-15.4,
17, 17.1, 17.2, 18, 21-69
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 1, 2-4, 7, 12, 21, 24-27, 56, 57, 59,
60
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1, 7, 21, 60
SERVICE MODE (MU)

MU-1
1. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) 1.3 Details of U-Utility Commands
The U-Utility functions are intended for both the user and service engineer. [U-1] Automatic Density Correction
<NOTE>
Menus which can be executed differ according to the state before transition. <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Outputs the 24-steps density pattern and performs automatic density correction.
1.1 U-Utility Menu Tree [U-2] Outputting QC Test Pattern
U-Utility
[U-1] Automatic Density Correction <FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
[U-2] Outputting a QC Test Pattern Outputs the QC test pattern and performs density measurement for image evaluation
[U-3] Reset Film Counters of this equipment.
[U-4] Setting the Sensitive Material Correction Parameter
[U-3] Reset Film Counters
[U-5] Setting the Date and Time
[U-6] SMPTE Pattern (V2.0 or later)
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
<REMARKS>
Resets the number of films remaining on the tray to the default value (number of films
Every time the [Utility] button is pressed, the display changes to the next menu. in the film pack).
Pressing the Utility button while [U-6] is being displayed exits the Utility menu and sets Use this function to replace films which have been accidentally exposed during tray
the idling state. (The number of films remaining will be displayed.) exchange, etc. (The total number of films used will not be reset.)
[U-4] Setting the Sensitive Material Correction Parameter

1.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
n Starting the U-Utility
Used for setting the sensitivity information of film. If this setting has been changed,
In the stand-by mode, press the [Utility] button on the operation panel. the changes made will not be valid unless "[U-1] automatic density correction” is
executed. If the execution timing of automatic density correction is set to “Every film
n Ending the U-Utility pack”, perform this setting with no films on the tray. If this setting is performed after
U-Utility ends when its execution is completed. executing automatic density correction after replacing film, there will be a need to
execute automatic density correction again.
[U-5] Setting the Date and Time
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Set the date and time of this equipment. As this equipment does not have an
automatic summer time setting function, change the time accordingly when using in
countries with summer time.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-1

MU-1.1
[U-6] SMPTE Pattern
<FUNCTION/PURPOSE>
Command for outputting SMPTE test patterns.
<REMARKS>
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS>
Select the SMPTE pattern output pattern number to be output.
<REMARKS>
The output parameters must be set using the PC-Utility beforehand.
{MU:2.4 [1-3-1]_Set SMPTE}
020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-1.1

MU-1.2
BLANK PAGE

MU-2
2. PC-UTILITY 2.1.1 Environment of PC for Servicing
PC-Utility is used for changing the settings of the equipment by directly accessing
OS
l
setup files in the equipment and editing them using FTP communication as interface. Microsoft Windows 2000 (SP4), Windows XP Professional (SP2), or Windows Vista
Edit this setup file on the browser of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable Business SP1
models).
{MD:1.1_Functions of Equipment}
Accessories
l
CD-ROM drive
<NOTE>
This chapter describes only an outline of the PC-Utility. Network Interface
l
For details on the functions of the PC-Utility, refer to the separate “CR-IR 391CL/ Ethernet port should be usable.
CR-IR 391V CL Service Manual”.
External Connecting Device
l
CD-ROM drive
2.1 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing Browser
l
In order to use the PC-Utility, the Service Center or Service Station, etc. must first set Internet Explorer version 6 or 7 should be installed.
the directory of the FTP site.
<NOTE>
<NOTE>
When any pop-up blocker tool such as Google Toolbar is installed, the pop-up
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T straight cable is required for blocker feature must be disabled.
connecting the PC for servicing.
<REMARKS>
Others
l
The FTP of the Internet Information Service should be operating.
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T crossing
cable.

MU-3
2.1.2 Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing 2.1.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
l Setting a Windows Account for the PC for Servicing need to set the FTP site directory of the PC for servicing.
The userrname and password should be registered. Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
• User: dryprinter Settings are performed in the same way basically for Windows XP, however
• Password: fujifilm precautionary items and addition setup items may be provided.
• Access permission: Administrator {MU:2.1.6_Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC for Servicing}
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS)
The above are already set and need not be set for PCs for servicing using DI Tools for
function (one of the Windows 2000 components) is required.
FUJIFILM imager equipment other than this equipment.
This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard
installation of Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
l Setting the FTP Site Directory
The FTP site directory should be set as follows Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)
n
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\fujifilm\DRYPIX”
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
Panel].
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.

3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
4. Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
5. Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog

to install the Internet Information Services (IIS).
If the message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the
“Windows 2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted, insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive and click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.
6. After completing installation, click [Finish].

7. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.

MU-4
Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
n 9. Set the directory of the FTP site (“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX) at [Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read],
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control [Write], and [Log visits].
Panel].
<NOTE>
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon. If the directory of the FTP site is not set to ““Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX”, the PC-Utility will not operate properly. If using
3. Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon. other applications on the same PC, after using the PC-Utility, return to the
settings noted down at step 8.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer] In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and
list. can be changed.
5. Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or

[Pause], right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].
6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the pop-up
menu.
7. Click the [Home Directory] tab.

8. Note down the path set at [Local Path:].
<NOTE>
As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another
directory (folder name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other
applications may be using it.
10. Click [OK].


MU-5
2.1.4 Setting Grouping Symbols 5. Click the [Time] tab.
When the [Regional Options] of the PC for servicing is not English, check the setting
of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below. 6. Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon).
n Checking Procedure

Panel].
2. Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.

3. Click the [Numbers] tab.
4. Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).

<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit
grouping symbol] and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit
grouping symbol].
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual MU-5

MU-6
7. Click the [Date] tab.
8. Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).
9. Click [OK].
10. Close the [Control Panel] window.

MU-7
2.1.5 Creating the Data Storage Folder 4. [Make]
Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment.
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable model).
→ The “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
window is displayed.
<REMARKS>
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-R
and start it.
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.

<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\
Establish name_Printer name
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive of FTP-Home]. • The data storage folder contains the following three empty folders:
{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC} • “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name]. • “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
5. [OK]
6. Close all windows, and unload the main unit software CD-R.

MU-8
2.1.6 Precaution and Settings in the Use of Windows XP PC n Windows Firewall Settings
for Servicing Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software. [Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.
n Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS) 1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] →[Control
Panel].
If IIS has not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, perform
the additional install in the same way.
Also, during the installing procedure, check the following.
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon.
1. Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)] 3. Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
checkbox from the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows
Components], and click [Details...]. 4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]
list.
2. Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol 5. Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
(FTP) Service] checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet
Information Services (IIS):] list. If not selected, select the checkmark,
and click [OK]. 6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
<NOTE> 7. At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:]
If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the of [Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
[Subcomponents of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP
Site] will be disabled, disabling directory settings of the FTP site hereafter.
3. Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions

displayed.

MU-9
8. Click [Cancel]. 14. Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step 7. in
[Port number:] (“21” in the following screen example).
Panel].
11. Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.

12. Click the [Exceptions] tab.
15. Click [OK].
13. Click [Add Port...].

MU-10
16. Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in 17. Click the [Advanced] tab.
the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
18. Click [Settings] of [Network Connection Settings].
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of
the Windows Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents
displayed will differ according to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different
programs and service names may be registered).

MU-11
19. Select the checkbox of [FTP Server] of [Advanced Settings] window. 21. Click [OK] of the [Advance Settings] window.
→ This will display the [Service Settings] window.

22. Click [OK].
20. Check that host name is entered at [Name or IP address (for example
192.168.0.12) of the computer hosting this service on your network:] 23. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
then click [OK].
n Disabling Browser’s Pop-up Blocker
When the PC for servicing runs Windows XP (SP2 or later), the browser’s pop-up
blocker must be disabled.
→ Returns to the [Advanced Settings] window.

MU-12
2.2 Flow of PC-Utility Operations 2.2.2 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models)
to the equipment.
2.2.1 Connecting PC for Servicing to the Network
Connect PC for servicing to the network. (When using the PC for servicing) 1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
1. Connect network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to which 2. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable
the equipment is connected. models).
3. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
http://“default IP address of this equipment:”20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
→ The login screen is displayed.

MU-13
3. Enter the following username and password, select the language <REMARKS>
(English) and click [Login]. • Starting the PC-Utility displays the "oFL" on the operation panel.
Login: dryprinter
Password: fujifilm
• Entering an incorrect user name or password displays “Login failure (Illegal login
name)” or “(Login failure (Illegal password)”.
→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.

MU-14
2.2.3 PC-Utility Operations n Executing Command
Select PC-Utility menu, and perform equipment settings, etc.
l To Change the Equipment Settings
n Selecting Menu Command
1. To change the equipment settings, select/enter the setting values in
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the the command execution window, and click [Execute].
command name.
<REMARKS>
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, scroll the command
execution window until the command is visible.
→ The command execution window appears in the upper right frame of the
window. → When the equipment settings have been changed successfully, [Command
<REMARKS> completed.] is displayed.
When one of [Setting1] through [Setting3] is selected, the setting values already
set for the equipment are displayed in the command execution window.

MU-15
l To Operate the Equipment l To Register A New Client
1. To check the operation of the equipment, select/enter the operation <REMARKS>

conditions, etc. in the command execution window, and click [Execute]. By using the copy function of the client setting, client values already set can be copied
and reused for other client settings.
Client lists can also be edited collectively.
{MU:2.4 [3-4]_Read CLTInfo}
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].
→ The equipment operates according to the operation conditions. When the

operation has completed successfully, [Command completed.] is displayed.

MU-15.1
3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings. l To Delete the Client
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title]. [Delete Client].
<NOTE>
2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
client for the new client. 3. [Execute]
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.
→ If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.

MU-15.2
l To Change the Client Name l To Change the Client Settings
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the 1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Change Client Name]. name of the client whose settings is to be changed.
2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title]. 2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].
3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title]. 3. [Execute]
4. [Execute]
→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.

MU-15.3
→ The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
4. Change the client settings.
5. [Execute]
→ The client settings is changed.

MU-15.4
BLANK PAGE

MU-16
2.2.4 Disconnecting the Equipment 2. Close the logout window after the logout screen shows “It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.”
1. After completing settings, click [Logout] button of the maintenance
tree.
→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [oFL] disappears.

→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [Now logging
out from the printer. Please wait.].
<REMARKS>
If the PC-Utility was ended by clicking , the logout screen will not be
displayed unless the pop-up blocked setting of the browser is canceled.

MU-17
2.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree A B
PC-Utility
[1-3] Setting3
[1] System information and setup
[1-3-1] Set SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
[1-1] Setting1
[1-3-2] Set Date
[1-1-1] Check Version
[1-3-3] Ele Save Mode
[1-1-1a] Input Serial No.
[1-3-4] Set Alarm
[1-1-2] Set DICOM
[1-3-5] Reboot
[1-1-2-1] AE Title
[1-3-6] Set Power Supply Synchronization (V2.0 or later)
[1-1-2-2] Port No.
[1-3-7] Film Characteristic ID
[1-1-3] Set Network
[1-3-8] Power Supply Voltage
[1-1-3-1] IP Address
[1-4] Log data
[1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask
[1-4-1] Display Error Log
[1-1-3-3] Gateway
[1-4-2] Clear Error Log
[1-1-3-4] Host Name
[1-4-3] Display DICOM Log
[1-1-4] Display Mac address
[1-4-4] Logging Mode
[1-1-5] Registration service pc
[1-5] Initialize
[1-2] Setting2
[1-5-1] Save Data
[1-2-1] Set Rem. Films
[1-5-2] Initialize
[1-2-2] Set Tray
[1-5-3] Recover
[1-2-3] Enable QC
[2] Transfer Indv. Data
[1-2-4] Set Target Den.
[3] Client Configuration (V2.0 or later)
[1-2-5] Printing Dmax
[3-1] Add Client
[1-2-6] Auto F.D.C.
[3-2] Delete Client
[1-2-7] Set Film infomation
[3-3] Change Client Name
[1-2-8] Display indv. data
[3-4] Read CLTInfo
A B C D

MU-17.1
C D E F G
[3-5] Clients [3-5-2] Magnify

[3-5-1] Protocol [3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type
[3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning) [3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ Crop Behavior
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range [3-5-2-3] Magnification Type
(0116H Warning) [3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type
(B604H Warning)
[3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type
[3-5-1-5] Change Film Size
[3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout
[3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT
[3-5-2-9] Procedure
[3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up
[3-5-2-10] Edge Detection
[3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density
[3-5-2-11] Detection Level
[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID
[3-5-2-12] Sharpness
[3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation
[3-5-2-13] Character Color
[3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable 110H[F])
[3-5-3] LUT Common
[3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14
[3-5-3-1] Default LUT
[3-5-3-2] Illumination
[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light
[3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
[3-5-3-5] Default Illumination
[3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light
[3-5-3-7] Procedure
E F G H I J

MU-17.2
H I J K L M N
[3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8 [3-5-5-18] Default Polarity

[3-5-4-1] Max Density [3-5-5-19] Mirror
[3-5-4-2] Min Density [3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image
[3-5-4-3] γTable No [3-5-5-21] Image Layout
[3-5-4-4] Contrast [3-5-5-22] Processing Type
[3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points [3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area
[3-5-4-6] Density [3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area
[3-5-4-7] Shift [3-5-6] Annotation
[3-5-4-8] Contrast [3-5-6-1] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/
[3-5-5] Output Format Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right
[3-5-5-1] Film Size [3-6] Common
[3-5-5-2] Medium Type [3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout
[3-5-5-3] Film Orientation [3-6-2] Association Count
[3-5-5-4] Border Density [3-6-3] Logging DICOM
[3-5-5-5] Polarity [3-6-4] Model
[3-5-5-6] Trim [3-6-5] Manufacturer
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width [3-6-6] Default Client
[3-5-5-8] Trim Density [3-7] Sarmaker
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies [4] File Transfer
[3-5-5-10] Print Priority [4-1] Single File
[3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies [4-2] Analysis Data
[3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority [4-3] G-curve Data (V2.0 or later)
[3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type [4-4] Operation Data
[3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation [5] Upgrading
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Size [5-1] Full Install
[3-5-5-16] Default Border Density [5-2] Upgrading
[3-5-5-17] Default Trim
K L M N O

MU-18
O P
[6] Output Film [10] Check Mechanism

[6-1] 24-Steps [10-1] Adjusting Sub Scanner
[6-2] 17-Steps [10-2] Other Actuators
[6-3] Cleaning Film [10-3] Sensor Monitor
[6-4] Flat pattern [10-4] Inter Lock Check
[6-5] Grid
[6-6] Uniformity
[6-7] SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
[7] F.D.C.
[7-1] Auto F.D.C.
[7-2] Check Density
[7-3] 24-Steps
[7-4] Display 24-Steps
[7-5] Manual F.D.C.
[7-6] Set Collect.T.
[7-7] Clear Collect.T.
[7-8] Uniformity
[7-8-1] Clear
[7-8-2] Manual Input
[7-9] DM Sensor Monitor
[8] Check Scanner
[8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner
[8-2] Film Characteristic ID
[8-3] Edge Sensor Monitor
[8-4] Reset Scanner Data
[9] Heat- Developer
[9-1] Temperature
[9-2] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
[9-3] Power Supply Voltage
P

MU-19
2.4 Details of PC-Utility Commands [1-1-2] Set DICOM
[1] System information and setup [1-1-2-1] AE Title
<FUNCTION>
[1-1] Setting1 Command for setting the AE Title of the printer.
<INSTRUCTIONS> <DEFAULT>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network “DRYPIX”
administrator of the installation site.
<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the 1-byte
[1-1-1] Check Version code table.
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
<FUNCTION> remaining number of digits.
Command for displaying various versions of the equipment. • The following are not accepted.
• All spaces
[1-1-1a] Input Serial No. • Space for the first digit
• First character is a number
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the serial number of the equipment and scanner unit.
[1-1-2-2] Port No.
<NOTE>
Do not change the values set. <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the port number used on the network.
<DEFAULT>
“17238”
<NOTE>
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
• 23 : Telnet port
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port
• 20051, 20052 : PC-Utility port
<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 65535

MU-20
[1-1-3] Set Network [1-1-3-3] Gateway
[1-1-3-1] IP Address <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the gateway address used on the network.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the IP address used on the network. <DEFAULT>
“0.0.0.0”
<DEFAULT>
<REMARKS>
“172.16.1.30”
• Input range: 000 to 255
<REMARKS> • Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• Input range: 0 to 255 • If no value is entered or “0.0.0.0” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete setting.
• The following are not accepted.
• “0.0.0.0”
• “255.255.255.255” [1-1-3-4] Host Name
• No value is entered.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the host name used on the network.
[1-1-3-2] Subnet Mask
<DEFAULT>
<FUNCTION> “fujiprinter”
Command for setting the subnet mask used on the network. <REMARKS>
<DEFAULT> • The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
numbers, and hyphen “-”.
“255.255.0.0” • The following are unaccepted.
<OPERATIONS> • Space
• Less than 2 characters
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal). • First character is a number.
<REMARKS>
• Out of input range if no value is input.

MU-21
[1-1-4] Mac Address [1-2] Setting2
<FUNCTION> [1-2-1] Set Rem.Films

The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed.
<FUNCTION>
[1-1-5] Registration service pc
Command for resetting the number of films remaining in each film tray.
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for registering the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) to The number is reset to the default number of films in the film pack of the
enable file transfer. Any unregistered PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) corresponding size, instead of being set to a random number of films.
are limited in function and does not support “Transfer Indv. Data” and “File Transfer” of
PC-Utility.
[1-2-2] Set Trays
<REMARKS>
Only one PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) can be registered. Only the <FUNCTION>
one registered last supports file transfer. Command for setting whether film trays mounted on the equipment are used or not.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
All “ON”
“172.16.1.20”
<REMARKS> [1-2-3] Enable QC
Default IP address of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL/CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL/CR-
IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL: “172.16.1.20” <FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling the image QC function of the U-Utility.
<DEFAULT>
“ON”

MU-22
[1-2-4] Set Target Den. [1-2-7] Set Film infomation
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the density of each step wedge and tolerance used when Command for setting the printing position of film information.
printing the image QC pattern of U-Utility.
<NOTE>
<DEFAULT>
“Upper Left”
The density step to be set is the middle wedge (1 to 3).
"Density 4” (Dmax) and “Density 0” (Fog) cannot be set.
[1-2-8] Display indv. data
<REMARKS> <FUNCTION>
• [Density 1] : Density of the first step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 2)) Command for displaying system file list.
• [Density 2] : Density of the second step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 3))
• [Density 3] : Density of the third step (Range: 192 to 250)]
<DEFAULT>
“Density 1: 48, Density 2: 120, Density 3: 192”
[1-2-5] Printing Dmax
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density
measurement in the QC test pattern of U–Utility.
<NOTE>
“Density4” means the uppermost wedge (density=Dmax).
If set to disable, the guide number (4) is not shown and the density is Fog.
<DEFAULT>
“OFF”
[1-2-6] Auto F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the automatic execution timing of automatic density correction.
<DEFAULT>
“every pack”

MU-23
[1-3] Setting3 [1-3-3] Ele Save Mode
[1-3-1] Set SMPTE <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the timer value when this equipment shifts into the power save
<FUNCTION> mode.
Command for setting parameters for printing SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility. <REMARKS>
<REMARKS> • This software stops the following loads in the running state.
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later. • Heat development section temperature decrease
• Motor excitation OFF
• Polygon motor OFF
<OPERATIONS> • Under the following conditions, the equipment recovers from the power consumption
mode and sets into the standby state.
1. Select the setting number. • Image transfer from external equipment
[1]/[2]/[3]/[4]/[5] • When level 1 error occurs
2. Select [AE Title].

<DEFAULT>
3. Select [Image Matrix]. “15”
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
[1-3-4] Set Alarm
4. Select [LUT Number].
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8] <FUNCTION>
5. Select [Interpolation type]. Command for setting the ON/OFF of the operation panel alarm.
[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH] <DEFAULT>
6. Select [Interpolation algorithm method]. “ON”
[CUBIC]/[NONE] [1-3-5] Reboot
[1-3-2] Set Date
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing command settings, execute
this menu and reboot or shut down the equipment.
Command for setting the system date and time. Even if the “Abnormal Operations” errors occurred, execute this menu and reboot the
equipment.

MU-24
[1-3-6] Set Power Supply Synchronization [1-3-8] Power Supply Voltage
Normally, this equipment is set to shutdown at the same time CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR Command for setting the power voltage of the heater.
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is shutdown. <NOTE>
However, if the equipment is not to be shutdown together with CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL when multiple modalities are connected, set • As 100V models are equipped with a different heater from 200V models, even
this function to “OFF”. if 200V/220V/230V/240V is set, there is no risk of overheating of the heater.
<REMARKS> • If the wrong voltage is set, the equipment may set into the stand-by state
earlier or later than expected, resulting in change in recording density for the
This function is available in main unit software version V2.0 or later. first few films immediately after Ready.
[1-3-7] Film Characteristic ID <REMARKS>

This equipment performs heat development control by changing the pulse width of the
<FUNCTION> heater ON time according to the voltage selected.
Command for setting film sensivity correction value.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“100V”
Film size Correction Correction Correction Correction
information 1 information 2 information 3 information 4 <REMARKS>
14x17 2 2 0 2 The default value of the 200V model is “200V”.
14x14 2 2 0 2
10x14 2 2 2 2
10x12 2 2 2 2
8x10 2 2 2 2
CAUTION
Do not change the settings until instructed by the Servicing Department.

MU-25
[1-4] Initialize [1-5] Log data
[1-4-1] Save Data [1-5-1] Display Error Log
Command for saving various configuration settings (system state after installation). Command for displaying error log list.
<NOTE>
[1-5-2] Clear Error Log
Do not select [Manufact].
<FUNCTION>
<REMARKS>
Command for deleting error logs.
The various configuration settings saved on this menu can be returned to the state
when saved, using “[1-4-3] Recover”. [1-5-3] Display DICOM Log
<FUNCTION>
[1-4-2] Initialize
Monitors the operating state of the software on the equipment in DICOM
<FUNCTION> communication (communication between software tasks, calculation results, etc.) saved
in the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models).
Command for executing initialization of various setting information and returning <REMARKS>
default values set at shipment.
<NOTE> • The data for analysis which will be displayed.
• Error logs and text files of various setting information
Executing this menu initializes the following data other than the data initialized • Communication logs (external input/formatter/formatter to printer/printer ISC)
using “[1-4-3] Recover”.
• Various configuration data • The time stamp of the analysis data is not guaranteed, but is of the date of
execution.
• Data on whether I/O tracer is executed
• The I/O tracer is also saved when jams occur in addition to when this menu is
executed.
[1-4-3] Recover
<FUNCTION>
Command for returning configuration settings to their saved state when [Service] of
“[1-4-1] Save Data”is selected. Also initializes some data managed by the system.
<NOTE>
• To execute this menu, save the various configuration settings beforehand
using “[1-4-1] Save Data”.
• The initialized data are as follows.
• Remaining film count
• User counter
• Error log

MU-26
[1-5-4] Logging Mode <REMARKS>
• If there is a need to acquire logs for analysis of problems, set this setting to [ON],
<FUNCTION> reproduce the phenomenon, and acquire the required log.
Command for setting whether to save log data for equipment analysis in the PC for • This setting differs according to the time the equipment was ended (End display).
servicing (or settings-changeable models) during termination of the equipment. When function is [ON]: Within 35 seconds
: Log to be seved, -: Log not to be saved When function is [OFF]: Within 5 seconds
Log acquisi- Non-log acqui-
Log type Details
tion mode sition mode
Records equipment failures. Cover open
Error log   is also recorded as error. Magazine
open is not taken as error.
Records ON/OFF state of sensors and
IOT   motors in timechart format. Special
viewer is required for referencing.
Operation data log
Records reception of messages be-

ISC   tween tasks of conveyance and print
functions.
Records control of ON/OFF of sensors
Mechanism log  
and motors, etc.
Edge sensor log   Records edge sensor reading values.
Records message transmission/recep-
PFIF log  
tion between the formatter and printer.
Collects logs related to jams when jams
Jam log  
occur.
DICOM communication log with con-
DICOM log  -
nected part. Log volume is heavy.
Log on control of all applications. Re-
Main log  - cords start and termination time, control
transition time with each subsystem, etc.
Analysis log
Records progress to printing after image

Output log  -
processing completes.
PCUTL log  - PC-Utility function processing trace.
Records results of printing request. Also
Spooler log  - records information such as remaining
films when printing is requested.
Records start state between sub-sys-
Trace log  -
tems on chart.

MU-27
[2] Transfer Indv. Data
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring individual data files.
The files to be transferred are the files in the “Indv” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Indv).
<NOTE>
To perform File Transfer, there is a need to perform “[1-1-5] Registration service
pc”.
<REMARKS>
Executing [PC->Printer] transfers the file “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder of the PC
for serving (or settings-changeable models). This file is written in the format in which
the setup information of each client is partitioned by a comma like “Setting item name,
setting value”.

MU-28
[3] Client Configuration 3. Select [Add] to create clients based on default settings.
To copy already set client settings, select [Copy] and then select the
<REMARKS> client name whose settings are to be copied at [Select AE Title].
[Client Configuration] is a function available in main unit software version V2.0 or later. <NOTE>
• When copying client settings, do not use the same name as the copied
[3-1] Add Client client for the new client.
• ”default”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST” cannot be copied.
<REMARKS>
By using the copy function of the client setting, client values already set can be copied
and reused for other client settings.
Client lists can also be edited collectively.
{MU:2.4 [3-4]_Read CLTInfo}
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the [Add
Client].
2. Enter the name of a new client to be registered in [Input AE Title].
4. [Execute]
→ If registration of the new client completes normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.]
will be displayed, and the new client will be registered on the maintenance
tree.

MU-29
[3-2] Delete Client
1. In the maintenance tree in the left frame of the PC-Utility, click the
[Delete Client].
2. Select the name of the client to be deleted from [Select AE Title].

3. [Execute]
→ If the client was deleted normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] will be displayed,
and the client will be deleted from the maintenance tree.

MU-30
[3-3] Change Client Name
[Change Client Name].
2. Select the name of the client to be changed from [Select AE Title].

3. Enter the changed client name at [Input New AE Title].
4. [Execute]
→ If the name has been changed normally, [SUCCESS: Update OK.] is displayed
and the client name on the maintenance tree will be changed.

MU-31
[3-4] Read CLTInfo 2. Open the “Indv” folder, and open “CLTInfo.csv” located in the
Using Microsoft Excel, the “CLTinfo.csv” created when equipment data is saved can equipment individual data using Microsoft Excel.
be edited, and client settings can be added/revised/deleted in lists.
This function is convenient for setting the same clients for multiple FM-DL 100 units.
<NOTE>
• Observe the following precautions when editing with software other than
Microsoft Excel.
• Do not change the filename (“CLTInfo.csv”) and file format (partitioned using
comma).
• Do not use double quotations ( “ ) and commas ( , ) for annotations.
• Do not delete the initially registered clients (“default”, “FCR-CSL”,
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”).
• When adding clients, make sure none of the parameter values are insufficient.
• Make sure that parameter values are within the range prescribed in the DICOM
Confirm Statement.
• Up to 64 clients can be registered.
• Renaming a client using the editing function will register the client as the very
last one and displays it at the bottommost level of the maintenance tree.
• If the extension format has been specified, the annotation cannot be set.
3. Add/correct/delete client settings.
n Procedure for Collectively Editing Client Settings <REMARKS>
Use the “CLTInfo.csv” in the “Indv” folder loaded in the PC for servicing. In the following example, “FCR-CSL” is copied and a client called “FCR-CSL2” is
added.
1. Save the equipment individual data of the printer. (1) Copy the “FCR-CSL” column.
(2) Paste the copied column to the blank column.
{MU:2.4 [2]_Transfer Indv. Data} (3) Change the client name to “FCR-CSL2”.
(4) Change the client settings.

MU-32
4. Save the data by [Save] in the CSV format in the folder where “CLTInfo.
csv” was located.
5. Select [Read CLTInfo] of PC-Utility.

6. Select the folder storing the edited “CLTInfo.csv”.
[Service PC]
7. [Execute]
→ “CLTInfo.csv” is sent to the equipment.
8. Reboot the equipment.

MU-33
[3-5] Clients → The client settings saved in the equipment will be displayed at the bottom
right of the PC-Utility screen.
Command for setting the various parameters for the client (image output device).
<REMARKS>
The parameters related to the image processing of each client set here apply when
image processing parameters are not set for the image data sent by the client.
n To Change the Client Settings
name of the client whose settings is to be changed.
2. Select the client settings in [Select DICOM Configuration].

3. [Execute]

MU-34
4. Change the client settings. [3-5-1] Protocol
5. [Execute] [3-5-1-1] Attribute list error (0107H Warning)
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how unexpected data received should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1: indicate] : Send error message
2. [Execute]
[3-5-1-2] N Event Report RQ
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how N Event Report Requests (report of events to clients)
should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>

• [0: disable] : No report sent
→ The client settings is changed. • [1: enable] : Send report
2. [Execute]

MU-35
[3-5-1-3] Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H Warning) [3-5-1-5] Change Film Size
Command for setting how data out of range should be treated. If the film size/specified by the client differ from that of the printer, set whether to
change film.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select one of the following.
• [1: indicate] : Send error message • [0: 0116H (W)]
Enables film to be changed. Details of errors which occur when the film is
2. [Execute] changed can be set whether to send to the client or not by setting [Attribute
List error (0107H Warning)], [Attribute Value Out Of Range (0116H
3. Reboot the equipment. Warning)], [Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)].
• [272: 0110H (F)]
[3-5-1-4] Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning) Details of errors are sent to the client, without changing the film.
• [21317: 5345H (F)]
<FUNCTION> Details of errors (unique values for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to the client,
In the BIB N-SET mode (when image data is received in frames), images are reduced without changing the film.
if they are too large to fit the image frame. Select whether to notify that the image has <REMARKS>
been reduced.
Set the following according to the client system.
<OPERATIONS>
QA-WS771 • For QA-WS771 software version A05 or later: [21317:5345H
(F)]
1. Select the value to be set. • For QA-WS771 software version A04 or earlier: [272:0110H
(F)]
• [1: indicate] : Send error message HI-C655D • For HI-C655D software version A08/B00 or later:
[21317:5345H (F)]
2. [Execute] • For HI-C655D software version A07 or earlier: [272:0110H (F)]
CR-IR346CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
3. Reboot the equipment. for FCR XG-1)
CR-IR348CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
for FCR5000 series)
Synapse [0:0116H (W)]
Other modalities Set according to operating environment of installation site.
2. [Execute]

MU-36
[3-5-1-6] Use System Timeout [3-5-1-8] Precede Picking Up
If problems occur when the association of clients which are continuously connected is Command for setting whether to use the pre-removal function for starting removal
disconnected at the timeout value set at the printer, set to ignore timeout. operations immediately after receiving the output request to increase the printing
For details, refer to “Modality Connection List”. speed.
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: No] : Ignore timeout • [0: No] : The pre-removal function is not used.
• [1: Yes] : Enable timeout • [1: Yes] : The pre-removal function is used.
<NOTE> 2. [Execute]
Select [0: No] (ignore timeout) for equipment resulting in problems.
2. [Execute] [3-5-1-9] Use Max/Min Density
3. Reboot the equipment. <FUNCTION>
[3-5-1-7] Presentation LUT Command for setting whether to use the minimum density value and maximum density
value of the equipment or client.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for setting whether to use LUT information sent from the client.
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: Modality] : Client side
• [0: No] : LUT sent from the client is not used. 2. [Execute]
• [1: Yes] : LUT sent from the client is used.
2. [Execute] 3. Reboot the equipment.


MU-37
[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID [3-5-1-11] Use Default Annotation
Enter the ID to differentiate the extension format used by the specific client. Select whether to use “Annotation” set at “3-5-6] Annotation”.
<NOTE> {MU:2.4 [3-5-6]_Annotation}
If the extension format is set even though annotation has been set, the following <OPERATIONS>
error message will be displayed.
“ERROR: Both ‘Extension Format ID’ and ‘Annotation’ are set.”
{MU:2.4 [3-5-6]_Annotation}
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS> Select [0:No] if “CR” is set for “[3-5-1-10] Extension Format ID”.
1. Selected the ID referring to the table below. • [0: No] : Not used
• [1: Yes] : Use
Manufacturer Model ID Use Default Annotation
Siemens - SM If user requires annotation output
2. [Execute]
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. 3. Reboot the equipment.
Philips Easy Vision EV No
[3-5-1-12] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F])
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM No
Clavis View HM If user requires annotation output <FUNCTION>
set by this setting, select [Yes],
otherwise select [No]. Command for enabling/disabling base color change function.
FUJIFILM QA-WS771 CR No
<OPERATIONS>
HI-C655D CR No
CR-IR346CL
(Console for FCR XG-1)
CR No 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: disable] : Disables the base color change function
CR-IR348CL CR No
(Console for FCR 5000 • [1: enable] : Enables the base color change function
series)
Synapse CR No
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]

MU-38
[3-5-1-13] Define Film Size of 11x14 [3-5-2] Magnify
Command for setting the default value for enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-2-1] Smoothing Type
Command for setting whether to define 11x14” size as 25.7x36.4 cm or 27.9x35.6 cm.
<NOTE> <FUNCTION>
27.9x35.6 cm is currently not available. Command for setting the default smoothing type.

[1: Sharp]/[2: Medium]/[3: Smooth]
• [0: 27.9x35.6 cm]
• [1: 25.7x36.4 cm] 2. [Execute]

MU-39
[3-5-2-2] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior n Enlargement/Reduction Processing
<FUNCTION> Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Command for setting the default values if the client does not send the Requested Response status 0000H(S) B60AH(W) *1 0116H(W)
Decimate/Crop Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Taking Ignoring (2020,
duction interpolation (CUBIC (2010,0060)=CUBIC, 0030), enlarges/
<OPERATIONS> DECI- interpolation). reduces image by reduces image to
MATE interpolation (CUBIC fit into image box. If
interpolation ). reducing, reduces
1. Select the required settings. image by interpola-
tion (CUBIC interpo-
• [1: DECIMATE] : Reduces images by interpolation to fit into the image box. lation).
• [2: CROP] : Cuts away the outer perimeter taking the image center as
Response status 0000H(S) B609H(W) *1 B609H(W) *1
the origin.
• [3: FAIL] : Rejects reception because the image does not fit into the Enlargement/re- Cuts away unneces- Cuts away unneces- Centers image en-
duction sary parts after cen- sary parts after cen- larged/reduced (CU-
image box. tering the specified tering the specified BIC interpolation) at
CROP
2. [Execute] image and image
box.
image and image
box.
the size specified by
(2020,0030) with the
image box, and cuts
3. Reboot the equipment. away unnecessary
parts.
Response status 0000H(S) C603H(F) C603H(F)
FAIL Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Images are not re- Images are not re-
duction interpolation (CUBIC ceived. ceived.
interpolation).
However, conditions are as follows.

• Condition 1: (2010,0060)=CUBIC. When image is larger than the image box, and
image is reduced.
• Condition 2: (2010, 0060)=NONE. When image is larger than the image box.
• Condition 3: When size specified by (2020,0030) is larger than the image box.
The meanings of response status are as follows.

B609H(W) : Image size is larger than the Image Box size. The Image has been
cropped to fit.
B60AH(W) : Image size or Combined Print Image size is larger than the Image Box
size.
Image or Combined Print Image has been decimated to fit.
*1: If B604H(W) is ignored at Protocol setting, 0000H (S) is returned.

{MU:2.4 [3-5-1-4]_Image Size Is Larger Than imagebox (B604H Warning)}

MU-40
[3-5-2-3] Magnification Type [3-5-2-5] Default Magnification Type
Command for setting the magnification type. Command for setting whether to use the magnification type of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
• [0: NONE] : No magnification is implemented
• [1: CUBIC] : Magnification is implemented • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
[3-5-2-4] Requested Image Size
[3-5-2-6] Default Smoothing Type
<FUNCTION>
Command for specifying the length of the image line printed in one image frame.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use smoothing type of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the length. (Range: 0 to 7000)
2. [Execute] • [0: Printer] : Printer side
2. [Execute]

MU-41
[3-5-2-7] Default Requested Image Size [3-5-2-9] Procedure
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Image Size of the equipment or Command for setting the enlargement/reduction processing.
the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the value to be set. [0: A-VR]/[1: SSM]
• [1: Modality] : Client side 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. [3-5-2-10] Edge Detection
[3-5-2-8] Default Decimate/Crop Behavior <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the edge enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION> If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
Command for setting whether to use the Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior of the and [Smooth].
equipment or the client if the client does not send the Requested Decimate/Crop
Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the value to be set.
• [0: OFF] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is not performed.
1. Select the value to be set. • [1: ON] : Edge enlargement/reduction processing is performed.

MU-42
[3-5-2-11] Detection Level [3-5-2-13] Character Color
Command for setting the edge detection level value. Command for setting the continuous emphasis density settings flag (the color
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium], specified for characters).
and [Smooth]. If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the edge detection level value. (Range: 1 to 1023.)
2. [Execute] [0: White]/[1: Black]
3. Reboot the equipment. 2. [Execute]

[3-5-2-12] Sharpness 3. Reboot the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the sharpness adjustment parameter.
If A-VR method is selected, set fine tuning for each the three modes [Sharp], [Medium],
and [Smooth].
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the sharpness adjustment parameter. (Range: -70 to 300.)

2. [Execute]

MU-43
[3-5-3] LUT Common [3-5-3-3] Ambient Light
Set the common settings for the tone correction processing parameters.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-3-1] Default LUT
Command for setting ambient light.
Command for setting the default LUT number.
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535)
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
1. Select the LUT number. The total of the “[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light” and “[3-5-3-2] Illumination” values
should be less than 4000.
[1] to [8]
2. [Execute] 2. [Execute]
3. Reboot the equipment. 3. Reboot the equipment.
[3-5-3-2] Illumination [3-5-3-4] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
Command for setting illumination. Command for setting whether to use the LUT number of the equipment or the client.
1. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535) 1. Select the value to be set.
<NOTE> • [0: Printer] : Printer side
The total of the “[3-5-3-2] Illumination” and “[3-5-3-3] Ambient Light” values • [1: Modality] : Client side
should be less than 4000.
2. [Execute]

MU-44
[3-5-3-5] Default Illumination [3-5-3-7] Procedure
Command for setting whether to use the illumination settings of the equipment or the Command for setting the tone correction processing method.
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the tone correction processing method.
1. Select the value to be set. [0: SAR]/[1: BAR]
[3-5-3-6] Default Ambient Light
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the ambient light of the equipment or the client.
<OPERATIONS>

2. [Execute]

MU-45
[3-5-4] LUT1 to LUT8 [3-5-4-3] γ Table No
Set the default values for the tone correction processing parameters for each LUT
number (LUT1 to LUT8). <FUNCTION>
Command for setting the γ table number.
[3-5-4-1] Max Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the maximum density. 1. Set the γ table number.
• For SAR: 11 to 99
<OPERATIONS>
• For BAR: 1 to 20 (set within 1 to 10)
1. Set the maximum density value. 2. [Execute]
• For SAR, set the maximum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range:
0 to 300) 3. Reboot the equipment.
• For BAR, set the maximum density by percentage. (Range: 0 to 100)
[3-5-4-4] Contrast
2. [Execute]
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the contrastr.
[3-5-4-2] Min Density
<OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>
1. Set the contrast value.
Command for setting the minimum density.
• For SAR, set the contrast in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 10 to 400)
<OPERATIONS> • For BAR, this contrast setting does not exist for the SAR method.
1. Set the minimum density value. 2. [Execute]

• For SAR, set the minimum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (The 3. Reboot the equipment.
value of the minimum density must be lower than that of the maximum
density.) (Range: 0 to 300)
• For BAR, Min Density setting is not required.
2. [Execute]

MU-46
[3-5-4-5] Number of Tuning Points [3-5-4-7] Shift
Command for setting the number of the tuning points. Command for setting the shift density.
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
used). used).
1. Set the number of tuning points (Range: 0 to 5) 1. Set the shift density in multiples of 100. (Range: -100 to 100)
The [Density], [Shift], [Contrast] values must be set for each tuning point when Follow the rule of Min Density<Density ± Shift<Max Density.
the number of tuning points is set to 1 or more.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
[3-5-4-8] Contrast
[3-5-4-6] Density
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the contrast at the tuning point.
Command for setting the tuning density. For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if
For the SAR method, this setting is also required for the tone correction curve tuning (if used).
used).
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the contrast at the tuning point in multiples of 100. (Range: 10 to
1. Set the tuning density in multiples of 100. (Range: 1 to 300) 400)
Follow the rule of Min Density<Density<Max Density.
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]

MU-47
[3-5-5] Output Format [3-5-5-3] Film Orientation
Command for setting the client-dependent default settings for the output format.
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-5-1] Film Size
Set the film orientation.
Command for setting the default film size.
1. Select the film orientation.
<OPERATIONS> [1: PORTRAIT]/[2: LANDSCAPE]
1. Select the film size. 2. [Execute]

[1: 8x10]/[2: 10x14]/[4: 14x17]/[5: 10x12]
2. [Execute]
[3-5-5-4] Border Density
<FUNCTION>
[3-5-5-2] Medium Type
Command for setting the border density.
Set the default film base color.
1. Set the border density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0 to
<OPERATIONS> 300)
1. Select the film base color. 2. [Execute]

[1: Blue]/[2: Clear]
<NOTE>
Select the [1: Blue]. [3-5-5-5] Polarity
<FUNCTION>
2. [Execute]
Command for setting whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
3. Reboot the equipment. <OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to reverse the black/white of the image.

• [1: Normal] : Black/white reversal off
• [2: Reverse] : Black/white reversal on
2. [Execute]
MU-48
[3-5-5-6] Trim [3-5-5-8] Trim Density
Command for setting whether to print trimming. Command for setting the image trim density.
1. Select whether to print trimming. 1. Set the image trim density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 0
• [0: OFF] : Without trim to 300)
• [1: ON] : With trim
2. [Execute]
[3-5-5-9] Number of Copies
[3-5-5-7] Trim Width
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for setting the default number of print copies.
Command for setting the trim width.
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
If the setting of the “[3-5-5-6] Trim” is [OFF] the value set for the “[3-5-5-7] Trim 1. Set number of print copies. (Range: 1 to 99)
Width” will be invalid.
2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> 3. Reboot the equipment.
1. Set the width of the trim in pixels. (Range: 1 to 9) [3-5-5-10] Print Priority
2. [Execute] <FUNCTION>
3. Reboot the equipment. Command for setting the print priority level.
<OPERATIONS>

• [1: HIGH]
• [2: MEDIUM]
• [3: LOW]
2. [Execute]
MU-49
[3-5-5-11] Default Number of Copies [3-5-5-13] Default Medium Type
Command for setting whether to use the number of copies setting of the equipment or Command for setting the film base color priority level setting of equipment or the
the client. client.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side
[3-5-5-12] Default Print Priority [3-5-5-14] Default Film Orientation
Command for setting whether to use the print priority setting of the equipment or the Command for setting whether to use the film orientation setting of the equipment or
client. the client.

• [0: Printer] : Printer side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [1: Modality] : Client side

MU-50
[3-5-5-15] Default Film Size [3-5-5-17] Default Trim
Command for setting the film size priority level setting of equipment or the client. Command for setting whether to use the print trimming setting of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]
[3-5-5-16] Default Border Density
[3-5-5-18] Default Polarity
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the border density setting of the equipment or
<FUNCTION>
the client. Command for setting whether to use reverse the black/white setting of the equipment
or the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
• [1: Modality] : Client side • [0: Printer] : Printer side
2. [Execute]
2. [Execute]

MU-51
[3-5-5-19] Mirror [3-5-5-21] Image Layout
Command for setting film surface/back. Command for setting how image frames are arranged.
1. Select the value to be set. 1. Select how image frames are arranged.
• [0: OFF(Normal)] : Glossy side to back • [0: concentration]:
• [1: ON(Mirror)] : Glossy side to front Sets the image frames in the center of the film (secures the setting value of
[Margin Between Image]).
2. [Execute] • [1: spread]:
3. Reboot the equipment. Sets the image frames in the center within each of the remaining image blocks
that are secured by the setting value of [Margin Between Image].
[3-5-5-20] Margin Between Image <NOTE>

For [concentration], all images on the film must be of the same size. In
<FUNCTION> the following cases, images will be arranged by [spread] even if set to
[concentration] because image sizes vary.
Command for setting the margin between image frames on the film.
• When images of different sizes are included on one film.
<NOTE> • When the output image size (width of image) on the film is specified
Normally, the default value for the margin between image frames should be (Requested Image Size) in the image data sent from the client.
used. Do not change the default setting unless requested by a user because of
layout problems.
2. [Execute]
<OPERATIONS> 3. Reboot the equipment.
1. Set the margin between image frames on the film in the range of 0 to
50. (unit: pixel)
2. [Execute]

MU-52
[3-5-5-22] Processing Type [3-5-5-23] Image Crop UPDWN Area
Command for setting the density processing calculation method. Command for setting whether the top or bottom is to be trimmed from CR image that
is larger than the image box.
<OPERATIONS> <REMARKS>
1. Select the value to be set. The applicable film sizes are 8x10 (20x25 cm), 10x14 (26x36 cm), 14x17 (35x43 cm).
• [0: Type1]
• [1: Type2] <OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
Type 1: Density processing calculation method which interpolates the measured
density. [0: Upper]/[1: Lower]/[2: Both]
Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tonal representation
than Type1. Tonal conversion continuity is better in low density areas
2. [Execute]
below density of 0.4.
2. [Execute] [3-5-5-24] Image Crop Side Area
3. Reboot the equipment. <FUNCTION>

Command for setting whether the left or right is to be trimmed from CR image that is
larger than the image box.
<REMARKS>
The applicable film sizes are 8x10 (20x25 cm), 10x14 (26x36 cm).
<OPERATIONS>

[0: Left]/[1: Right]/[2: Both]
2. [Execute]

MU-53
[3-5-6] Annotation [3-5-6-1] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/Lower Center/
Set and enter the character string of the annotation to be printed on film. Lower Right
<NOTE>
<FUNCTION>
If annotation is set even though the extension format has been set, the following
error message will be displayed. Select the place for entering the annotation text, and enter the annotation text
“Because ‘Extension Format ID’ is set, ‘Annotation’ cannot be set.” character.
{MU:2.4 [3-5-1-10]_Extension Format ID} <OPERATIONS>
1. Select the place for entering the annotation text.

• [Upper Left] : Character string printed on the upper left corner of the film
• [Upper Center] : Character string printed on the top of the film in the center
• [Upper Right] : Character string printed on the upper right corner of the film
• [Lower Left] : Character string printed on the lower left corner of the film
• [Lower Center] : Character string printed on the bottom of the film in the center
• [Lower Right] : Character string printed on the lower right corner of the film
<NOTE>
• If annotations are set, the image area will be smaller than when
annotations are not set, and image will be printed in reduced size.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/
right of the film), they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when
printing annotations at several locations, check that none is missing
during printing.
2. Enter the annotation text character in the [Value] string.

<REMARKS>
• Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
• In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
• If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make
sure that no characters are missing.
3. [Execute]

MU-54
[3-6] Common [3-6-3] Logging DICOM
[3-6-1] Data Transfer Timeout <FUNCTION>

Command for setting whether to save the record of communication with the client as
<FUNCTION> log information, and the communication record level.
Command for setting the timeout value for network communication.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the timeout value. (Unit: seconds) • [0: none] : No logging of communication record
<REMARKS> • [1: normal] : Normal log information
• [2: detail] : Detailed log information (default)
• The timeout value is the maximum time limit for the printer to wait for data to
arrive. If data does not arrive within the set time, a timeout occurs. 2. [Execute]
• Normally, use the default timeout. If this default value does not work properly
for the connected DICOM client, set the value given by the DICOM client. 3. Reboot the equipment.
• Setting range: 30 to 3600 (default value: 300)
2. [Execute]
[3-6-2] Association Count
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of associations to be established together for
DICOM connection.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set according to the installation environment.

[1] to [10] (default value: 10)
2. [Execute]

MU-55
[3-6-4] Model [3-6-6] Default Client
[3-6-5] Manufacturer <FUNCTION>

Command for setting whether to apply parameters set at [default] for unregistered clients.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the <OPERATIONS>
printer.
<OPERATIONS> • [0: Yes] : Applies the [default] settings. (default)
• [1: No] : The [default] settings will not be applied.
1. Enter the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
printer. 2. [Execute]
<NOTE>
• Both the [Model] (manufacturing model name) and [Manufacturer]
(manufacturer name) must be no more than 64 characters long.
• This name is used by the client to acquire the name of the printer on the
network.
• Normally the default for the model and manufacturer names should be
used (Model: DRYPIX, Manufacturer: FUJIFILM Corporation respectively).
Where multiple printers are installed at a single location, each must be
identified by a unique name determined in consultation with the users.
2. [Execute]

MU-56
[3-7] Sarmaker 6. Double-click “ocsarmk.exe”.
Perform this procedure when adjusting LUT using SAR MAKER. → The SAR MAKER window appears.
1. In the maintenance tree, click [Sarmaker].
2. [Execute]
→ The message [Please use Sarmaker] is displayed in the lower right frame of
the PC-Utility window.
3. Click the [Copy File Path] button.

→ The SAR MAKER directory will be copied to the Windows clipboard.
4. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing.

5. Paste the address copied to the Windows clipboard to the address bar
and press the <ENTER> key on the keyboard.
→ The SAR MAKER directory will be displayed.
<REMARKS>
Location of “ocsarmk.exe”:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXPRIMA\ocsarmk.exe
(FTP site directory\DPXPRIMA\ocsarmk.exe)
7. In the menu bar, click [Mode].

→ The [Mode] window appears.
8. Select [Density] (maximum density).

9. [OK]

MU-57
10. Select [GAMMA No.]. 14. [Adjust]
→ The tone curve (gamma curve) is drawn. (Dark red) → Another tone curve is drawn reflecting the entered data. (Bright red)
11. Select the number of tuning points from [tuning point]. 15. Go back to PC-Utility and open the client settings window. Open the
LUT settings window for the relevant client and enter the value set via
12. Enter [DMAX] (maximum density) and [DMIN] (minimum density). Sarmaker.
13. Enter [density] (density fine adjustment value), [shift] (shift density), 16. [Save]
and [contrast] for each tuning point. → The [save complete] window appears and the converted LUT data is saved
as “sar_savedata.txt”. The save destination is the folder “Any drive letter”:\
Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXPRIMA (the same hierarchical level as
“ocsarmk.exe”).No operation is required for this file.
17. [OK]
18. Click to close SAR MAKER.
19. Click the [Logout] button in the maintenance tree to end the PC-Utility.

MU-58
20. Close the logout window.
<REMARKS>
If the pop-up blocker setting of the browser is not canceled, the logout screen will
not be displayed.

MU-59
[4] File Transfer [4-3] G-curve Data
<FUNCTION>
<FUNCTION> Command for transferring gamma curve data file.
Transfer data files between the equipment and PC for servicing (or settings- <REMARKS>
changeable models).
<NOTE>
To perform file transfer, “[1-1-5] Registration service pc” must have been
performed in advance. <OPERATIONS>
1. Check that the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is

[4-1] Single file registered.
{MU:2.4 [1-1-5]_Registration service pc}
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring manually selected data file to the equipment. 2. Select transfer direction.
<REMARKS> • [PC <- Printer] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
• [PC -> Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
Files which can be sent to the equipment include parameter files and program files.
3. [Execute]
[4-2] Analysis Data → File transfer starts.
When file transfer is completed, the [Command completed.] is displayed. If the
<FUNCTION> file transfer fails, [Command incompleted.] is displayed.
Command for transferring analysis data files from the equipment. [4-4] Operation Data
A log file for analysis is transferred to the “Log” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\Log) of
the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models). <FUNCTION>
Command for transferring operation data files from the equipment.
A CSV format file is transferred to the “Operation” folder (“Any drive letter”:\Program
Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers\Establish name_Printer name\
Operation) of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models).

MU-60
[5] Upgrading 2. Enter the drive name into [Input drive].
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software. 3. Click [Copy] of [Please specify the drive of FTP-Home].
Use the main unit software copied to the FTP folder in the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models) when performing full installation or version upgrading of
the equipment.
For details on version upgrading or full installation procedure using the PC for
servicing, refer to “REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)”.
{MC:11_INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE}
<NOTE>
Before starting this procedure, the individual data should be backed up because
it will be initialized by [Full Install].
[5-1] Full Install
[5-2] Upgrading
n Copying Main Unit Software to the PC for Servicing (or

settings-changeable models)
<OPERATIONS>
servicing (or settings-changeable model). → The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (“Any drive letter”:\
→ “DPXPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\DRYPIXPRIMA\CD-Image).
window is displayed. → When completed, the [Success.] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
4. [OK]
and start it. 5. Click [EXIT] to close [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool] window.
<NOTE> 6. Unload the main unit software CD-R from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” must be started from the CD-ROM drive.
“DPXPRICopyTool.exe” may not function properly if started from a copy on
the desktop, etc.

MU-61
n Transferring the Main Unit Software to the Equipment (Full
Install/Upgrading)
<OPERATIONS>

2. When performing full installation, save individual data first.
3. [Full Install] or [Upgrading] → [Execute]
→ The main unit software is transferred (version upgrade or full installation) in
the equipment.
When transferring completed, the [Command completed.] screen appears.
4. Select [Reboot] of the PC-Utility menu.

Reboot the equipment so that the changes made in the main unit software
become effective.
5. [Reboot] → [Execute]
→ [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
is currently being carried out.
The equipment will reboot after about 75 seconds.
→ “System off. Please close this page.” is displayed on the PC Utility.
6. Close the PC-Utility window.

7. If full installation has been performed, perform the following procedure
as well.
• Restoring the individual data
• Reboot the equipment
• Setting the system date and time
• Setting the number of remaining films

MU-62
[6] Output Film [6-7] SMPTE
<FUNCTION>
[6-1] 24-Steps Command for selecting the number set at “[1-3-1] Set SMPTE”, and outputting
SMPTE patterns.
<FUNCTION> {MU:2.4 [1-3-1]_Set SMPTE}
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern. <REMARKS>
[6-2] 17-Steps
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the 17-steps pattern.
[6-3] Cleaning Film
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the cleaning film.
[6-4] Flat pattern
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the flat pattern.
[6-5] Grid
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the grid pattern.
[6-6] Uniformity
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the uniformity measurement pattern.

MU-63
[7] F.D.C. [7-2] Check Density
<FUNCTION>
[7-1] AUTO F.D.C. Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps data measured by the
density measurement section.
<FUNCTION> <REMARKS>
Command for printing 24-steps patterns and calculating the 24-steps density The number of prints is fixed at 1.
correction value from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
<REMARKS>
l Specified Values
The number of prints is fixed at 1.
Step Dmax 3.0
1 fog
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
4 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11

MU-64
[7-3] 24-Steps [7-8] Uniformity
<FUNCTION> [7-8-1] Clear

Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern using the current setting value.
<FUNCTION>
[7-4] Display 24-Steps Command for returning the uniformity correction data to the state at shipment (?default
value) or clearing the data to zero for all specified film sizes or all sizes.
<FUNCTION>
l Clear Type
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data measured by “[7-1] AUTO F.D.C.”. [Single]/[All]
<NOTE>
l Clear data type
If the equipment is rebooted after executing “[7-1] AUTO F.D.C.”, this density
[Manufacture] : Returns to state at shipment
data will be deleted.
[Zero] : Clears to zero.
l Film Size (When “Single” is selected at “Clear Type”)
[7-5] Manual F.D.C.
[14x17]/[14x14]/[10x14]/[10x12]/[8x10]
<FUNCTION> [7-8-2] Manual Input
Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
densitometer, and creating density correction information. <FUNCTION>
Measure the uniformity measurement pattern output at “[6-6] Uniformity” using an
[7-6] Set Collect.T. external densitometer, and repeatedly enter the required number of measurement
data.
<FUNCTION> (Number=Low Density/High Density: 15 each)
Command for creating densitometer calibration tables for calibrating the built-in <NOTE>
densitometer. Correction is carried out on the film size set on the equipment.
<NOTE> Make sure that the film size to be measured and film size set on the equipment
are the same before executing this command.
To execute this menu, “[7-3] 24-Steps” needs to be executed first.
[7-9] DM Sensor Monitor

[7-7] Clear Collect.T.
Command for monitoring whether the density measurement sensor of the internal
Command for initializing densitometer calibration tables.
densitometer is operating normally or not.
<NOTE>
After completing monitoring, execute [OFF] to end communication with the
equipment. If communication is not ended, it may not be possible to execute
other menus.

MU-65
[8] Check Scanner l Example of Input
[8-1] Adjusting Main Scanner
[8-1-1] Scanning Width
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the main scanning width (compression rate in the main scanning
direction).
<OPERATIONS>
1. Output grid pattern using “[6-5] Grid”.

{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
2. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
3. If out of the specified value, enter the main scanning width adjustment
value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
• As the main scanning length value displayed is subject to rounding, it may not
always be the previously entered value.
• Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
• Entering a negative value reduces the image from the reference position.
• The changes in the value entered can be calculated by: (Value entered) x C x
10 ÷ 37000 (mm)
4. Output and check the grid pattern again.

MU-66
[8-1-2] Scanning Position l Example of Input
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the scanning position in the main scanning direction.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Output grid pattern using “[6-5] Grid”.

{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid}
2. Measure “B” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE}
3. If out of the specified value, enter the scanning position adjustment

value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
4. Output and check the grid pattern again.

MU-67
[8-1-3] Initialize Scanner [8-2] Edge Sensor Monitor
Command for initializing the scanning width adjusting values and scanning position Command for monitoring changes in the film edge sensor (SD5) used in the
adjusting values. correction of the scanning position. This monitoring of changes allows checking of the
quantitative film tilt degree during printing, and checking of the film edge sensor alone.
<REMARKS>
The following are displayed:
• Current value (pixel value and counter value, average value during printing)
• Maximum value (pixel value and counter value: maximum value during monitoring,
value only during printing)
• Minimum value (pixel value and counter value: minimum value during monitoring,
value only during printing)
• Starting Position (Reference value)
• Start position adjustment value (Reference value)
<NOTE>
other menus.
[8-3] Reset Scanner Data
<FUNCTION>
Command for resetting the total running time of the scanner unit to “0”.
Reset the time at this menu when replacing the scanner unit.

MU-68
[9] Heat-Developer
[9-1] Temperature
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor.
<REMARKS>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first
decimal point.
<NOTE>
other menus.
[9-2] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default of the targeted temperature of each heater.
<REMARKS>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first
decimal point.

MU-69
[10] Check Mechanism [10-2] Other Actuator
<FUNCTION>
[10-1] Adjusting Sub Scanner Command for performing individual operations of the tray lock solenoid (SOLA1).
Perform this command to release tray lock.
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for adjusting the film conveyance speed of the sub-scanning unit. To end, execute [OFF] and to turn OFF the solenoid.
<OPERATIONS>
[10-3] Sensor Monitor
1. Print the grid pattern.
{MU:2.4 [6-5]_Grid} <FUNCTION>
2. Select the image printed. Command for performing sensor monitoring.
<NOTE>
[Grid]
3. Select the printed film size. equipment.
[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
[10-4] Interlock Function
4. Enter the four digit average (1/10 mm unit) of “F” and “G”.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE} <FUNCTION>
<REMARKS> Command for checking the interlock function during installation and periodic
maintenance and inspection.
• Enter a value which is 10 times the average value.
<NOTE>
• The adjustment value will be initialized when “0” is entered.
Executing this menu starts the rotation of the conveyance motor (MG1) of the
heat development unit.
5. [Execute]
6. Print the grid pattern and check again.

CONTROL SHEET
3, 4, 6, 7, 10-14, 18-23, 25, 26, 33,
34
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 26
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 3, 15, 19, 20, 22, 23, 26, 33, 34
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

SP-1
How to Use Service Character Significance The alphabet denotes a difference in
the specifications. Parts differing in
 RECOMMENDED QUANTITIES
Consumable parts or parts OF SPARE PARTS
Parts List A that will be replaced at short inter-
vals.
the suffix are not compatible with each
other. Version number is omitted in the It is recommended as a rough guide to
Parts that may become faulty ac- list. keep in stock a certain quantity of parts
B cidentally and have a according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E)
 RANK relatively high failure rate.  PART NAME assigned to the parts, as follows. For
Parts that have a sufficiently long periodically replaced parts, keep them
PART NAME represents a general name
 Handling RANK characters C MTBF, but are expected to have a
in stock separately. Adjust the stock
relatively high failure rate. of a part.
(Parts that are handled in a special quantity of service parts depending on
Parts that have a sufficiently long
manner during parts management, such D MTBF, but are expected to be-  QTY. the number of working units (N).
as replacement) come faulty. Quantity used in a single system : Q
QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty Parts that are necessary for fault N=1
analysis, or parts that may be in each unit.
R
Must be
Repairable A part whose quantity is suffixed with Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
returned. E needed in case of unexpected
accidents such as man-induced -S represents a small part that is Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
Must be Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
returned.
damage. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a
Q
(We use for
Not repairable part is ordered in quantity of 1, a pack 2 ≤ N ≤ 10
<The RANK guide> containing 50 pieces of that part is
analysis.)
The Fault RANK characters, Handling Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
Must not be supplied.) Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
returned. RANK characters, and Export
Rank D = 1 + N × Q × 0.02
(Consumable regulation-applicable character are  REMARKS
T part. Not Not repairable assigned in that order. 11 ≤ N ≤ 300
applicable to Thus, at least one character or up to The REMARKS column indicates a Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
free-of-charge three characters are assigned in the unique name or relevant information of Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
warranty.) RANK column. each part. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
without Must not be
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned.  REF. NO.  SERIAL NUMBER  PRECAUTIONS TO BE
 Export regulation-applicable REF. NO. is a part number indicated in The units may contain different parts OBSERVED WHEN RETURNING
the Service Parts Exploded Views. For depending on their shipment control PARTS FOR REPAIR
character number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates
parts having different functions, they are
(Parts with the following character are clearly distinguished in the REMARKS the shipment control number to which When returning a component for repair,
controlled by Export regulation.) and SERIAL NUMBER columns. the relevant parts are applicable. If the pack it in the same manner as for the
Character Significance SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the supplied substitute, using the substitute
+
Parts applicable to export  PART NUMBER parts are applicable to all the relevant packing materials.
regulations. units. The shipment control number is The use of different packing materials or
PART NUMBER is a code number that represented by lower five digits of eight- packing methods may incur damage to
 Fault RANK characters is unique to each part. An alphabetic digit number indicated on the rating packed component during transit.
letter at the rightmost position of the indication label.
(Which provide reference for code number has the following meaning.
determining the recommended stock
quantity) For hardware  REFER TO
All parts are assigned with one of The alphabet denotes the version The "REFER TO" column shows
characters A through E. number of a part. If parts have different reference sections concerning the part.
version numbers, they are upward- Clicking the reference section in the
compatible. “REFER TO” column jumps to the top
page of the reference section where the
For software related information is in.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-1

SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03 INDEX 10 INDEX 11 INDEX 12

● カバー ● フレーム ● 装填部 ● 制御部 ● 回路図 ● 部品番号検索表
COVER FRAME FILM LOADING UNIT CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH
TABLE
FPEZ001A.AI FPEZ002A.AI FPEZ003A.AI FPEZ010A.AI
INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06 INDEX 13

● 枚葉部 ● 搬送部 ● 副走査部 ● 締結用および配線用の
REMOVAL UNIT CONVEYOR UNIT SUB-SCANNING UNIT サービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for
Securing and Wiring
FPEZ004A.AI FPEZ005A.AI FPEZ006A.AI
INDEX 07 INDEX 08 INDEX 09

●光学部 ● 熱現像部 ● 排出部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT FILM RELEASE UNIT
FPEZ007A.AI FPEZ008A.AI FPEZ009A.AI
020-201-01(1)C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-2

SP-3
01A

カバー 1
COVER 1

カバー 1
COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350Y101032 カバー Cover 1
D 2 350N101291C カバー Cover 1
D 3 405N101308 銘板 Label 1
FPEZ0111.AI D 4 314N100058A 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 5 314Y100018B 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 6 366N100039 ガイド Guide 1
D 7 398Y100017 シャッタ Shutter 1
D 8 382N100323 テープ Sponge 2
D 9 350Y101033 カバー Cover 1
D 10 350N101292D カバー Cover 1
D 11 388N100593 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 4
D 12 398N100015B カバー Cover 1
A 13 393N100002D 刃物 Cutter 1
D 14 309N100065 プラワッシャ Plastic Washer 4
020-201-03C FM-DL 100 Service Manual SP-3

SP-4
01B

カバー 2
COVER 2

カバー 2
COVER 2 01B
D 1 350N101294A カバー Cover 1
D 2 350Y101034 カバー Cover 1
D 3 350N101293B カバー Cover 1
FPEZ0112.AI D 4 314Y100019B 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 5 314N100059B 蝶番 Hinge 2
D 6 316N100152 止め具 Stopper 1

SP-5
01C

カバー 3
COVER 3

カバー 3
COVER 3 01C
D 3 350N101295C カバー Cover 1
FPEZ0113.AI D 4 350N101296B カバー Cover 1

SP-6
02A

フレーム 1
FRAME 1

フレーム 1
FRAME 1 02A
D 1 363N100769B ガイド Guide 2
D 2 367S0135 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 2
D 3 386S1115 緩衝機材 Rubber 3
FPEZ0211.AI D 4 366S0006 アクチュエータ Actuator 2
D 5 128S0987 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 2 SK1, SK2
D 6 376N100044 エアフィルタ Air Filter 1
インターロック解除
D 7 899Y100501 Interlock Releasing Tool 1
ツール
インターロック解除
D 8 899Y100502 Interlock Releasing Tool 1
ツール

SP-7
02B

フレーム 2
FRAME 2

フレーム 2
FRAME 2 02B
D 1 345N100656A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 2 386S1115 緩衝機材 Rubber 1
D 3 367S0135 ゴム足 Rubber Foot 2
FPEZ0212.AI D 4 345N100655A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 5 310N100213 ストッパ Stopper 4
D 6 356N103818B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 7 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 THK1

SP-8
03A

装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1

装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1 03A
D 1 128S0971 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 1 SA2
D 2 366S0011 アクチュエータ Actuator 1
D 3 388N100575 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1
FPEZ0311.AI D 4 107Y100017 ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLA1
D 5 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 SA3, SA4, SA5
D 6 362N100327 受 Guide 4
D 7 334N100216A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 10
D 8 146N0010A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SA1
D 9 363N100798 ガイド Guide 2

SP-9
03B

装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2

装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2 03B
D 1 363N100779A ガイド Guide 4
D 2 363N100761 ガイド Guide 1
FPEZ0312.AI D 4 363N100762 ガイド Guide 2
D 5 317N100055 キャップ Cap 13
D 6 340N100101A つまみ Knob 1
D 7 363Y100253 ガイド Guide 1
D 8 334N100216A ローラ Roller 1
D 9 345N100699 仕切り板 Plate 1
D 10 343N100059A フック Hook 1
D 11 316Y100073 止め具 Stopper 1
D 12 388N100585A ねじりコイルばね Spring 1
D 13 342N100055 レバー Lever 1

SP-10
04A

枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1

枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1 04A
D 1 345N100683A 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 2 356Y100873C アーム Arm 2
D 3 335N100043A フランジ Flange 2
FPEZ0411.AI D 4 322SP201 軸受け Bearing 2
D 5 334N100202 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 7 322N100244A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4
D 9 322N100241A 軸受 Bearing 4
D 10 341N100289A アーム Arm 4
D 11 327N100344A 歯車 Gear 3
D 12 327N100345A 歯車 Gear 1
D 13 335N100046 フランジ Flange 1
D 14 327N100346A 平歯車 Spur Gear 5
D 15 118SX208A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB2
D 16 327N100327 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
D 18 341N100290A アーム Arm 4
D 19 319Y100089 軸 Shaft 1
D 20 334N100201B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 21 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB1
D 22 327N100352 歯車 Gear 1
D 24 327N100322A 歯車 Gear 1
D 25 327N100320 歯車 Gear 1

SP-11
04B

枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2

枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2 04B
D 1 341Y100104 アーム Arm 1
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB2
D 3 356N103803 ブラケット Bracket 1
FPEZ0412.AI D 4 322SY223 軸受け Bearing 26
D 6 402N0020A ベローズ Bellows 3
D 7 375N100126 シール Seal 3
D 8 316Y100071 止め具 Holder 3
D 9 392N100001 吸着盤 Suction Cup 3
D 10 371N100090 ノズル Nozzle 3
D 11 316Y100075B 止め具 Holder 2

SP-12
04C

枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3

枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3 04C
D 1 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SB1
D 2 346N100527B 補助板 Support Plate 3
D 3 347S0281A スペーサ Spacer 4
FPEZ0413.AI D 4 332N100180A ストッパ Stopper 4
D 5 328N100016A 爪 Claw 2

SP-13
05A

搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1

搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1 05A
D 1 327N100315A 歯車 Gear 2
D 2 388Y100007 板ばね Leaf Spring 2
D 3 322N100251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1
FPEZ0511.AI D 4 322SP213 軸受 Bearing 4
D 5 362N100320A 受 Support 2
D 8 334Y100147 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1
D 10 313Y100027 ステー Stay 1
D 11 363N100783 ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 13 327N100338A 歯車 Gear 1
D 14 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SD3, SD4
D 15 -- -- -- --
D 16 341N100288 アーム Arm 1
D 17 107Y0185C ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLD1
D 19 118SX202B パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD2
D 20 327N100316A 歯車 Gear 1
D 21 356Y100865 ブラケット Bracket 1
D 22 327N100317A 歯車 Gear 1
D 23 356Y100882 エッジセンサ Assy Edge Sensor Assy 1 SD5
D 24 332Y100036 ストッパ Stopper 1
D 26 388N100576A 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1
D 27 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD2

SP-14
05B

搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2

搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2 05B
D 1 363N100752 ガイド Guide 1
FPEZ0512.AI D 4 327N100340 歯車 Gear 2
D 5 363N100749 ガイド Guide 4
D 6 388N100564 ばね Spring 2
D 7 363N100754 ガイド Guide 4
D 8 334N100196 ローラ Roller 4
D 9 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD1
D 10 340N100098 取手 Handle 1
D 11 355N100698A フレーム Frame 1
D 12 327N100318A 歯車 Gear 1
D 13 327N100324A 歯車 Gear 4
D 14 327N100323A 歯車 Gear 2
D 15 341N100287 アーム Arm 1
D 16 327N100326A 歯車 Gear 1
D 17 327N100318A 歯車 Gear 1
D 18 360N100219A ハウジング Housing 1

SP-15
05C

搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3

搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3 05C
D 1 342N100054A レバー Lever 2
D 2 363N100757 ガイド Guide 1
D 3 363N100773 ガイド Guide 4
FPEZ0513.AI D 4 363N100772 ガイド Guide 4
D 5 341N100295 アーム Arm 1
A 6 334Y100166 ローラ Roller 1
D 7 341N100294 アーム Arm 1
D 8 334N100196 ローラ Roller 8
D 9 363N100758 ガイド Guide 1
D 10 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD1
D 11 363N100756 ガイド Guide 1

SP-16
05D

搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4

搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4 05D
D 2 363N100775 ガイド Guide 4
D 3 363N100764 ガイド Guide 1
FPEZ0514.AI D 4 334N100196 ローラ Roller 16
D 5 345N100684 遮板 Shield Plate 1
D 6 363N100763 ガイド Guide 4
D 7 363N100776 ガイド Guide 4
D 8 363N100777 ガイド Guide 4
D 9 388N100584A 板ばね Leaf Spring 4
D 10 350N101326 カバー Cover 1
D 12 334N100204A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1

SP-17
06A

副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1

副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1 06A
D 2 386N100282 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 16
FPEZ0611.AI D 4 332N100182A ストッパ Stopper 1
D 5 386N100280A 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 1
D 6 345N100682 遮光布 Shading Cloth 1

SP-18
06B

副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2

副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2 06B
D 1 309S0075 座金 Washer 2
D 2 334Y100146 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
FPEZ0612.AI D 4 343N100061 フック Hook 1
D 5 323N1264B 平ベルト Belt 1
D 6 324N1036D 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2
D 7 339N100012A ハンドル Handle 1
D 10 322SP213 軸受 Bearing 4
D 11 324N100110A 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2
D 13 308N100136 特殊ねじ Special Screw 2
D 14 319Y100086B 軸 Shaft 1
ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly
D 15 113Y100333A 1 SE1
SED28A SED28A
D 16 118YA184A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME1
D 17 324Y100040 平ベルト車 Wheel 1
D 18 309S0127 座金 Washer 1
D 19 324N1038C 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 1
D 20 323N1265A 平ベルト Belt 1
D 21 401N100124 押え板 Pressure Plate 1
D 22 322SF227 軸受 Bearing 2

SP-19
07

光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT

光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 07
DR 1 839Y100057 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1
D 2 898Y100667A キット Kit 1
FPEZ0711.AI
◇参　考◇
・本装置は 839Y100057 または 839Y0060 のスキャナユニットを使用することができる。
ただし、サービスパーツとして供給されるのは 839Y100057 のみである。
・スキャナユニットを 839Y0060 から 839Y100057 へ交換する場合は、REF.2 も同時にオー
ダーすること
<REMARKS>
・ This equipment can be used 839Y100057 or 839Y0060 scanner unit. However, only
839Y100057 is provided as a service part.
・ When replacing the scanner unit from 839Y0060 to 839Y100057, also order REF. 2 at
the same time.

SP-20
08A

熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1

熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 08A
D 1 118SX208A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MG1
D 2 310S9042516 平行ピン Straight Pin 1
FPEZ0811.AI D 4 322SP214 すべり軸受 Bushing 2
D 6 327Y100033A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1
D 7 319N101353 軸 Shaft 1
D 8 363N100768B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 9 347N100422 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 10 363N100767B ガイド板 Guide Plate 1
D 11 322N100248 すべり軸受 Bushing 1
D 12 347N100418 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 13 339N100013A ハンドル Handle 1
D 14 347S0829 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 15 405N101307 銘板 Label 1
D 16 119Y100047 電動ファン Fan 1

SP-21
08B

熱現像部 2

熱現像部 2
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 08B
D 1 327N100332 歯車 Gear 1
D 2 327N100331 歯車 Gear 1
D 3 327N100333A 歯車 Gear 9
FPEZ0812.AI D 4 327N100329A 歯車 Gear 1
D 5 327N100330 歯車 Gear 1
D 6 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1
D 7 356N103818B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 8 334Y100154 ローラ Roller 9

SP-22
08C

熱現像部 3

熱現像部 3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 08C
D 1 350Y100854B カバー Cover 1
D 2.1 117Y100019A ヒータ（100V 第 1） Heater 1 100-120VAC
FPEZ0813.AI D 3 334N100197 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4
D 4 310Y100010A ピン Pin 2
D 5 327N100319 歯車 Gear 4
D 6 348N100158B 側板 Side Plate 1
D 7 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 8
D 8 348N100157B 側板 Side Plate 1
D 9 310Y100009A ピン Pin 2
D 10 115N100002A 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2
現像ラック部
D 11.1 802Y100031 Rack Unit 1 100-120VAC
（100V 第 1）
現像ラック部
D 11.2 802Y100033 Rack Unit 1 200-240VAC
（200V 第 1）

SP-23
08D

熱現像部 4

熱現像部 4
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 08D
D 1 350Y100855B カバー Cover 1
FPEZ0814.AI D 3 334N100197 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 6
D 4 310Y100010A ピン Pin 2
D 5 327N100319 歯車 Gear 6
D 6 348N100156C 側板 Side Plate 1
D 7 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 12
D 8 348N100155C 側板 Side Plate 1
D 9 310Y100009A ピン Pin 2
D 10 115N100002A 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2
現像ラック部
D 11.1 802Y100032 Rack Unit 1 100-120VAC
（100V 第 2）
現像ラック部
D 11.2 802Y100034 Rack Unit 1 200-240VAC
（200V 第 2）

SP-24
09A

排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1

排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 09A
D 3 322NY156 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 4
FPEZ0911.AI D 4 322N100240A 軸受け Bearing 8
D 7 334N100214 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1

SP-25
09B

排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2

排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 09B
D 1 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2
D 2 113Y100334A 1
LED28A LED28A
FPEZ0912.AI D 3 313N100175C ステー Stay 1
D 6 363N100753B ガイド Guide 1
D 7 387N0165 帯電防止材 Antistatic Material 1
D 8 363N100727 ガイド Guide 5
D 9 334N100196 ローラ Roller 15
D 10 113Y100335A 1
PDD28A PDD28A

SP-26
10

制御部
CONTROLLER

制御部
CONTROLLER 10
D 1 113Y100329C 1
PNL28A PNL28A
D 2 128S1102 スイッチ Switch 1
FPEZ1011.AI D 3 119S0096 電動ファン Fan 1
C 4 113Y100328E 1
PSU28B PSU28B
Board Assembly
125N100032A/ ボードアセンブリ
C 5 PSU27A (Power 1
B PSU27A（電源）
Supply)
C 7 113Y100331C 1
HTD28A HTD28A
CR 8 113Y100327C 1
SND28A SND28A
CR 9 113Y100330D 1
PRN28A PRN28A
CR 10 113Y100326D/E 1
CPU28A CPU28A
D 11 347S0911 スペーサ Spacer 1
D 12 308S2760308 ネジ Screw 3
C 13 102N100022 メモリボード Memory Board 1 512MB DIMM
メモリカード（コンパ
C 14 114Y2108300A Memory Card (CF Card) 1
クトフラッシュカード）
250V/10A for
A 15 137S1350 ヒューズ FUSE 2
HTD28A F1,F2
48V/1A for
A 16 137S1417 ヒューズ FUSE 2 SND28A F8,
for PRN28A F1
48V/1.6A for
PSU28B F2
48V/2A for
SND28A
F6,F7, for
PSU28B F5
48V/3.2A for
PSU28B F4,F8
48V/5A for
SND28A F1,
A 20 137S1423 ヒューズ FUSE 8 F2,F3,F4,F5,
for PSU28B
F6,F7,F9
250V/8A for
PSU28B F1

SP-27
11

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
;
㪣㪛㪪㪠㪞 7.5$&8 OO
240%0 .&&%0
240#ၮ᧼ 5/. 㪞㪥㪛 5/.
.&&#

;
A ;
㪣㪛㪛㪦㪥 ; 7.#9)Ἧ
A

㪣㪛㪛㪦㪥㪹 OO
.&&%0
㪞㪥㪛 ;
240%0 .&&%0 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪈㪉㪭㪶㪣㪛㪛 7.#9)ᯍ
㪣㪛㪛㪦㪢
㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘
㪣㪛㪛㪦㪢㪹 OO
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪄㪈㪉㪭㪶㪣㪛㪛
㪞㪥㪛 &('5%

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘

㪪㪪 &($5%#

8↪$TGCMGT
㪪㪪㪹
/CVUWUJKVC 257$ၮ᧼
㪞㪥㪛
$#/ #
&($54 㪂㪌㪭㪝 &($54
; &($5%#

&($5%#
B B
5# ;
7.#9)ᯍ %0, %02
257$%0 㪂㪌㪭 OO 240%0 ; 5'&%0
240%0 㪂㪌㪭㪝 7.#9)Ἧ 㪂㪌㪭㪝

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘㪞㪥㪛

㪞㪥㪛

㪞㪥㪛

5'&#
$TGCMGT 㪂㪈㪉㪭
;
+0.'6 ;
;
7.#9)㤥
; 257#%0
;
7.#9)ᯍ 257$%0

㪄㪈㪉㪭
&('5%
&($5%#

㪪㪜㪛
㪪㪜㪛
7.#9)㤥 7.#9)㤥
㪞㪥㪛
7.#9)Ἧ &(5%
.+0' .1#& OO &($'24% &($'54% ; &(5%(#
+0. 257#%0 㪞㪥㪛
&($54
OO
5256
OO 5256 5256
OO 㪘㪚㩿㪣㪀㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘
&527 &527 &527 OO 257#
㪞㪥㪛 +2$&&

&($5%#
&(2&5%$ &($5%#
+00 7.#9)⊕

.+0' .1#&

㪘㪚㩿㪥㪀㔚Ḯ
㪞㪥㪛 %%4652 240%0
OO OO 㪂㪉㪋㪭
5256
&527
5256
&527
5256
&527
OO 0
㪂㪉㪋㪭

C &('5% C
+0)
5256

#
8*40
58*62

㪂㪉㪋㪭
8*40
&($5%#
&527
㪂㪉㪋㪭 58*62
7.#9)✛㤛 8*40
OO /CVUWUJKVC OO 58*62 OO ;
$#/

‫ޓ‬-$562-
5 7.#9)✛㤛 257$%0
;
7.#9)ᯍ
%27# .#0
.#0

() 7.#9)⊕
㪂㪌㪭㪪㪙 OO
%27, OO
0+%110
(8
()

㪞㪥㪛 %27#
0%( 6$ (8
+2$&5

㪆㪧㪪㪄㪦㪥
:*2
$:*62
ၮ᧼ /+57/+
5 6$176 ‫ޓ‬095+%'5*
D
6$+0 (8
%%4652
; ; 5 D
6$176 257$%0 7.#9)ᯍ %27,
(8 㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚
(8 7.#9)⊕ 㪞㪥㪛 OO %27,
; 20.%0
㪧㪮㪙㪥㪶㪧 7.#9)Ἧ
;QUJKFC
㪞㪥㪛
OO
,62 㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛 &('5%
6$+0 6$176
5 (8

㪂㪌㪭
OO &($5%#
(8 6$176 㪂㪌㪭 OO
(8

+2$&5
ᾲ෼❗䉼䊠䊷䊑
;
%%4652 8*40 &($54
58*62 &($5%#
20.#ၮ᧼
7.#9)㤥 (#0 ; 257$%0 ;
7.#9)Ἧ ;
E 7.#9)⊕ 㪂㪉㪋㪈 7.#9)ᯍ ; E
257$%0 㪊㪅㪊㪭 OO 50&%0 50&%0 㪛㪇 7.#9)Ἧ OO 20.%0
㪥㪚㪉
㪞㪥㪛㪛㪈
(#0 㪘㪣㪘㪩㪤㪊
㪞㪥㪛㪋

+2$&5
%%4652

㪌㪭 50&#ၮ᧼
㪛㪉
㪞㪥㪛㪛㪊
5 OO

㪂㪈㪉㪭

;
㪛㪋

㪞㪥㪛㪛㪌

ਛ⛮↪ࠕ࠳ࡊ࠲
㪄㪈㪉㪭
㪛㪍
OO 㪘㪚㩿㪣㪀 *6&%0 ߇ᔅⷐ 㪞㪥㪛㪛㪎

㪘㪚㩿㪥㪀
㪌㪭㪪㪙
㪛㪠㪞㪈
OO 㪞㪥㪛 +2$&& 㪛㪠㪞㪉
F F
+2$&& %%4652 㪛㪠㪞㪊

%%4652 ; 㪌㪭㪪㪙
7.#9)ᯍ
*6&#ၮ᧼ 257$%0
㪂㪉㪋㪭 OO
50&%0
㪙㪬㪱㪱㪜㪩㪄㪧
㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛
*) ; ; +2$&5
+2$&5
㪜㪥㪫㪜㪩

7.#9)⊕ %%4652
%%4652 㪞㪥㪛
*'#6'4 OO *6&%0
;
7.#9)Ἧ OO 㪟㪦㪫㪚㪦㪥㪈
50&%0

㪧㪮㪙㪥

㪟㪦㪫㪚㪦㪥㪉㪬㪣㪫㪶㪙㪫㪥 &($&54%
&($&54%
&($5%#
㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㩿㪥㪀 *6&%0 㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚 &($5%#
㪟㪦㪫㪚㪦㪥㪊
G 㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㪈
G
㪟㪦㪫㪚㪦㪥㪋

㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㩿㪥㪀
50&%0 ;
㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㪉㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚㪞㪥㪛 7.#9)Ἧ OO
&($54 7.#9)ᯍ OO 㪭㪚㪚
2 &($5%# &($&54% 㪚㪘㪥㪂
2$6. 㪥㪅㪚㪞㪥㪛 &($5%#
㪚㪘㪥㪄
㪥㪅㪚 *6&%0 &('5%

*)
OO 㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㩿㪥㪀

&($5%#
㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㪊 &('5%

&($5%#
50&%0

㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㩿㪥㪀

㪟㪜㪘㪩㪫㪋

機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚 &($&54%

H 㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚 &($5%# 名称装置回路図補助名称 i-BASE H
2 4
2$6. 2$6.
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _
㗁

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-28
11

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
;
7.#9)Ἧ OO
B .&&%0
㪣㪛㪦㪥
.&#%0 B

㪘㪞㪥㪛

㪣㪛㪪㪠㪞㪟

㪘㪞㪥㪛
㪣㪛㪠㪦㪧

㪘㪞㪥㪛

㪣㪛㪘㪉㪏㪘ၮ᧼
㪣㪛㪛㪉㪏㪘ၮ᧼

㪧㪏㪭

;
;
㪘㪞㪥㪛

㪤㪏㪭

㪘㪞㪥㪛
C
㪧㪭㪣㪛 C

㪘㪞㪥㪛

㪤㪭㪣㪛

㪘㪞㪥㪛

㪧㪭㪣㪛

㪧㪏㪭㪉

㪣㪛㪢㪫㪛
&($&54%
㪣㪛㪟㪉 &($&54%
&($5%# &($5%#
D D
;
.&&%0 㪪㪪㪟 7.#9)Ἧ OO 5;0%0

㪪㪪㪣

㪞㪥㪛

㪪㪰㪥㪉㪏㪘ၮ᧼

㪭㪚㪚

;
&(5%
&(5%
&(5%(#
&(5%(#
E E
;
.&&%0 㪩㪜㪘㪛㪰 7.#9)㕍 OO 2%-%0
2%-%0 ;
㪪㪫㪘㪩㪫㪣 7.#9)㕍
㪚㪣㪦㪚㪢 OO 21.%0
㪞㪥㪛

㪞㪥㪛

㪧㪚㪢㪉㪏㪘ၮ᧼
㪩㪜㪘㪛㪰

㪉㪋㪭

;
㪪㪫㪘㪩㪫㪣䊘䊥䉯䊮ၮ᧼
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛

㪉㪋㪭

㪞㪥㪛

㪉㪋㪭

&($54
F &($5%# F
G G
H 名称装置回路図補助名称 i-BASE H
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _

㗁

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-29
11

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
50&#ၮ᧼ ;
; 50&%0
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 7.#9)Ἧ OO
5, 5,

㪪㪡㪈㪭 ឃ಴౉ญ࠮ࡦࠨ
㪞㪥㪛

㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪

)2#.45#(

㪪㪡㪉㪭

㪞㪥㪛
B
㪥㪅㪚
OO 5, 5, B
㪥㪅㪚
㪥㪅㪚 ឃ಴಴ญ࠮ࡦࠨ
&($&54% 㪥㪅㪚

)2#.45#(
&($5%#
&48%0
OO
C C
㪥㪅㪚
;
50&%0 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪉㪋㪭㪶㪚 7.#9)㕍

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪛
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 -8%5$AUS2
OO &48%0
&48%0 ;
㪤㪜㪈㪚㪣㪢㪚 -8%5$AUS2 7.#9)㕍


OO
/' /'

㪤㪜㪈㪚㪮㪙 -8%5$AUS2 /'&48
೽⿛ᩏࡕ࡯࠲

:#&428

㪤㪜㪈㪜㪥 -8%5$AUS2

㧡⋧㩝㨺㩊㩎㩨㩡㨼㩔㩨 %(-$2#
D :#448 D
5:#62 㪥㪅㪚
5:#/62
㪥㪅㪚

㪥㪅㪚

㪥㪅㪚

() ; ()
6$%53
OO

(8 (8
೽⿛ᩏ)0&✢4WD[ຠࠍ૶↪㧔*ᄌᦝ㧕
E E
50&%0 ;
%02 %0, ;
5- ;
7.#9)㕍
5-
7.#9)㕍 OO 7.#9)㕍 OO 5-%1/ 5-0% OO 5-%1/ 5-0%
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪉㪋㪭

&527 &527

&527 &527

.&ࠗࡦ࠲࡯ࡠ࠶ࠢ
5256 5256 5256 5256
8*40 2 4 #/%0 #/%0
F 58*62 F
2$6. 2$6. OO
50&%0 ;
%0, %02 ;
5#
7.#9)㕍 OO 7.#9)㕍 OO 5#%1/ 5#0%

&527
5256
&527
5256
࠻࡟࡯ࠗࡦ࠲࡯ࡠ࠶ࠢ
㪥㪅㪚 4 2 #/%
8*40 2$6. 2$6.
58*62
G G
OO
㪈㪊㪍㪰㪈㪇㪉㪇㪌㪊䋨䉟䊮䉺䊷䊨䉾䉪䋩
㪪㪥㪛ၮ᧼ᡷ 䈮䉋䉍䇮೥㒰機種 2108 ユニット <ユニット>
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _

㗁

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-30
11

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
;
%0, %02 ;
50&%0
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪌㪈 7.#9)Ἧ OO
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪌㪈 7.#9)Ἧ OO 5# 5#

㪪㪘㪈㪭
㪪㪘㪈㪭㩖㨲㩣㩛㩔㩩㨹㩂㧛㩆㨶㨹㩊㨺ᬌ಴
㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛



1*(2
50&#ၮ᧼

㪪㪘㪊㪭

㪪㪘㪊㪭
;
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
B 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 B

㪪㪘㪋㪭

㪪㪘㪋㪭 OO 5# 5#

㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛㩖㨲㩣㩛㩅㨼㩇㩨ᬌ಴
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪
%02 %0,
)2##
5& 5& 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪎
;
7.#9)Ἧ OO
;
7.#9)Ἧ OO
㪪㪘㪌㪭
㪪㪘㪌㪭

㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛
៝ㅍ౉ญ㩈㩧㩅㪪㪛㪈㪭
)2#.45#(
㪞㪥㪛

㪪㪙㪈㪭 :#&428 :#&48

㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚

㪞㪥㪛 5:#62 5:#/62 OO 5# 5#
㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㩖㨲㩣㩛㩅㨼㩇㩨ᬌ಴
C 㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚㪪㪙㪉㪭 C

)2##
5& 5&
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪋 OO
;
7.#9)Ἧ &($'54% &($'24%
㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪛㪉㪭 &($5%# &(2&5%$
៝ㅍ಴ญ㩈㩧㩅
㪥㪅㪚
)2#.45#(
㪞㪥㪛㪥㪅㪚

㪥㪅㪚
OO 5#
㪥㪅㪚 5#
㪥㪅㪚㩖㨲㩣㩛㩅㨼㩇㩨ᬌ಴
&($&54%
㪥㪅㪚

)2##
5& 5&
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 OO 50&#ၮ᧼
&($5%#

㩇㩎㨹㩔㩩૏⟎㩈㩧㩅
㪪㪛㪊㪭
D 㪞㪥㪛 D
)2##
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪎
50&%0
%0, %02
;

㪪㪛㪈㪭 OO 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 7.#9)Ἧ OO 5$ 5$
%02 %0, 㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪙㪈㪭 ᨎ⪲㨻㩛*2ᬌ⍮
OO 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪋
㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪛㪉㪭
)2##
5& 5& 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 OO

㪞㪥㪛

㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 ':6A%#9)
㪪㪙㪉㪭
㩐㨹㩖㩩㩈㩧㩅
㪪㪛㪋㪭

㪞㪥㪛
)2##
㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪛㪊㪭

㪞㪥㪛 :#28 :#448 OO 5$ 5$
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 5:#62 5:#/62

E

㪪㪛㪋㪭

㩖㨼㩣㩛⴫㕙ᬌ಴ E

㪞㪥㪛

)2##
5& 5&
㪪㪛㪌㪶㪣㪜㪛㪘 7.#9)Ἧ

㪪㪛㪌㪶㪣㪜㪛㪘

㨾㨹㩆㩨㩈㩧㩅
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 OO
2+5#ၮ᧼
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪛㪌㪘㪪㪛㪌㪘
;
㪪㪛㪌㪙

㪪㪛㪌㪙

&(5% 㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚
&(5%(#
㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚
&($&'54% &($&'24%
㪥㪅㪚
F F
&($5%# &(2&5%$
㪥㪅㪚
㪥㪅㪚 &($&54%
&($5%#
G G
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _

㗁

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-31
11

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
;
50&%0
㪫㪟㪞㪈㪟 7.#9)Ἧ 㪫㪟㪞㪈㪟 OO
6*) 6*)
㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘

㪫㪟㪞㪉㪟㪫㪟㪞㪉㪟

ࠨ࡯ࡒࠬ࠲㧝㧛㧞
50&#ၮ᧼


262((
;
㪫㪟㪞㪊㪟
㪥㪅㪚
㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘 &($'54%
㪥㪅㪚

㪫㪟㪞㪋㪟 &($5%#

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘

㪫㪟㪞㪌㪟
B

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘 B

㪫㪟㪢㪈㪟㪫㪟㪞㪊㪟 OO
6*) 6*)

㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪㪫㪟㪞㪋㪟

ࠨ࡯ࡒࠬ࠲㧟㧛㧠

㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘 262((
㪣㪜㪛㪶㪦㪥㪶㪚㪹
㪥㪅㪚
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪈㪉㪭㪶㪧㪛㪛 &($'54%
㪥㪅㪚

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘 &($5%#

㪭㪚㪚㪶㪄㪈㪉㪭㪶㪧㪛㪛

㪣㪦㪞㪦㪬㪫
C &($&54% C
&($5%#
㪥㪅㪚
㪫㪟㪞㪌㪟 OO
6*) 6*)
㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘 &($'54% ᓢ಄ㇱࠨ࡯ࡒࠬ࠲
&($5%# 262((
㪫㪟㪢㪈㪟 OO 6*- 6*-

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘

⸥㍳ㇱࠨ࡯ࡒࠬ࠲
&($'54%
&($5%# 262((
D D
;
%0, %02 ;
7.#9)㕍 7.#9)㕍
50&%0
㪤㪛㪈㪘㪙 OO
㪤㪛㪈㪘㪙 OO
/& /&

㪤㪛㪈㪶㪘㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪛㪀
㪤㪛㪈㪶㪘㪚㪦㪤
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪪㪜㪥㪪 OO .'&%0

㪤㪛㪈㪘
㪤㪛㪈㪘 ៝ㅍ㩝㨺㩊㪞㪥㪛 .'&#ၮ᧼
㪤㪛㪈㪙㪙㪤㪛㪈㪙㪙㪣㪜㪛㪶㪦㪥㪶㪚㪹

㪤㪛㪈㪶㪙㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪛㪀

㪤㪛㪈㪶㪙㪚㪦㪤

5: &(5% ;
&(5%(#

㪤㪛㪈㪙
㪤㪛㪈㪙 :#28

㪤㪞㪈㪘㪙 5:#62
㪤㪞㪈㪶㪘㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪙㪀 :#28 :#448 OO

㪤㪞㪈㪙㪙 5:#62 5:#/62 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪈㪉㪭㪶㪧㪛㪛 2&&%0
E E
㪤㪞㪈㪘 7.#9)㕍
㪞㪥㪛㪶㪘

㪤㪞㪈㪶㪙㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪙㪀 OO
/) 㪭㪚㪚㪶㪄㪈㪉㪭㪶㪧㪛㪛

2&&#ၮ᧼

㪤㪞㪈㪙 /) 㪣㪦㪞㪦㪬㪫 &(5% ;
㪤㪛㪉㪘㪙

㪤㪛㪉㪙㪙

ᾲ⃻௝៝ㅍ㩝㨺㩊 &(5%(#

㪤㪛㪉㪶㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪙㪀 5:#

㪤㪛㪉㪘 2*4

㪤㪛㪉㪙 52*625
:#&428
㪤㪛㪉㪶㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪙㪀
F 5:#62 F
%0, %02 ;
7.#9)㕍 OO 㪤㪛㪉㪘㪙 7.#9)㕍 OO /&

㪤㪛㪉㪶㪚㪦㪤 /&
㪤㪛㪉㪙㪙

㪤㪛㪉㪘

㩐㨹㩖㩩⸃㒰㩝㨺㩊

㪤㪛㪉㪶㪚㪦㪤 5:#

㪤㪛㪉㪙 2*4
52*625
:#28 :#448
5:#62 5:#/62
G G
50&%0 ;

㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪉㪋㪭㪶㪜 7.#9)㕍 OO
51.& 51.&
:#28 㩇㩎㨹㩔㩩⸃㒰

㪪㪦㪣㪛㪚㪹
㪥㪅㪚 5:#62 㩉㩤㩓㨼㩎㩨
:#28 㪥㪅㪚
5:#62 5&%
ǡ
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _

㗁

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-32
11

回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
;
%0, %02 ;
/$
50&%0 㪤㪙㪈㪘㪙 7.#9)㕍 OO 㪤㪙㪈㪘㪙 7.#9)㕍 OO
50&#ၮ᧼

㪤㪙㪈㪶㪘㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪘㪀

㪤㪙㪈㪶㪘㪚㪦㪤

/$
; 㪤㪙㪈㪘㪤㪙㪈㪘
B

㪤㪙㪈㪙㪙

㪤㪙㪈㪙㪙

ᨎ⪲㩝㨺㩊 B

㪤㪙㪈㪶㪙㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪘㪀
㪤㪙㪈㪶㪙㪚㪦㪤 5:

㪤㪙㪈㪙
㪤㪙㪈㪙

㪤㪙㪉㪘
㪤㪙㪉㪘
㪤㪙㪉㪶㪘㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪚㪀㪤㪙㪉㪶㪘㪚㪦㪤 :#28
5:#62

㪤㪙㪉㪙
㪤㪙㪉㪙
㪤㪙㪉㪘㪙㪤㪙㪉㪘㪙 7.#9)㕍

㪤㪙㪉㪙㪙

㪤㪙㪉㪙㪙
/$ /$

㪤㪙㪉㪶㪙㪚㪦㪤㩿㪉㪋㪭㪶㪚㪀
㪤㪙㪉㪶㪙㪚㪦㪤 OO ៝ㅍ㩝㨺㩊
㪭㪚㪚㪂㪉㪋㪭㪶㪜㪂㪉㪋㪭㪶㪘
C

㪪㪦㪣㪘㪈㪟㪚㪹

㪪㪦㪣㪘㪈㪟㪚㪹

㩖㩩㩤㩖㨲㨺㩎㩨↪ C
㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚㪥㪅㪚 5:#

㪪㪦㪣㪘㪈㪣㪚㪹
㪪㪦㪣㪘㪈㪣㪚㪹 2*4
:#&428
52*625
5:#62 :#&428 :#&48
5:#62 5:#/62
7.#9)㕍

51.# 51.#
OO 㩎㩤㨼㩥㨹㩂

5&%
D D
;
50&%0 㪩㪜㪘㪛㪰㪙 7.#9)㕍 OO .&&%0

㪤㪪㪈㪪㪫㪚㪙
E 㪞㪥㪛㪶㪛 E

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪛

.&&#ၮ᧼

㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪉㪋㪭㪶㪜

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪛

㪞㪥㪛㪶㪛

㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪉㪋㪭㪶㪜
㪭㪚㪚㪶㪂㪉㪋㪭㪶㪜 &($54

㪝㪘㪥㪞㪈㪚㪙 &($5%#

㪥㪅㪚
:#&428
㪥㪅㪚
F F
5:#62
(#0
OO

㪈㪂㪉㪋

㪉㪥㪚

㪊㪘㪣㪘㪩㪤 (#0

㪋㪞㪥㪛
;$

G G
コード Z22N2108000A Rev. _

㗁

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

SP-33
12

部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
102N100022 10-13 146S0029A 05A-14 322SF227 06B-22 327Y100033A 08A-6 342N100055 03B-13 360N100219A 05B-18
107Y0185C 05A-17 146S0086 05A-27 322SP201 04A-4 328N100016A 04C-5 343N100059A 03B-10 362N100320A 05A-5
107Y100017 03A-4 146S0086 05C-10 322SP213 05A-4 332N100180A 04C-4 343N100061 06B-4 362N100327 03A-6
113Y100326D/E 10-10 146S0086 09B-1 322SP213 06B-10 332N100182A 06A-4 345N100655A 02B-4 363N100727 09B-8
113Y100327C 10-8 308N100136 06B-13 322SP214 08A-4 332Y100036 05A-24 345N100656A 02B-1 363N100736A 09B-5
113Y100328E 10-4 308S2760308 10-12 322SY223 04B-4 334N100196 05B-8 345N100682 06A-6 363N100749 05B-5
113Y100329C 10-1 309N100065 01A-14 323N1264B 06B-5 334N100196 05C-8 345N100683A 04A-1 363N100752 05B-1
113Y100330D 10-9 309S0075 06B-1 323N1265A 06B-20 334N100196 05D-4 345N100684 05D-5 363N100753B 09B-6
113Y100331C 10-7 309S0127 06B-18 324N100110A 06B-11 334N100196 09B-9 345N100699 03B-9 363N100754 05B-7
113Y100333A 06B-15 310N100213 02B-5 324N1036D 06B-6 334N100197 08C-3 346N100527B 04C-2 363N100756 05C-11
113Y100334A 09B-2 310S9042516 08A-2 324N1038C 06B-19 334N100197 08D-3 347N100418 08A-12 363N100757 05C-2
113Y100335A 09B-10 310Y100009A 08C-9 324Y100040 06B-17 334N100198 05A-25 347N100422 08A-9 363N100758 05C-9
114Y2108300A 10-14 310Y100009A 08D-9 327N100311A 09A-5 334N100199 06B-3 347S0281A 04C-3 363N100761 03B-2
115N100002A 08C-10 310Y100010A 08C-4 327N100312A 04A-17 334N100200 05B-3 347S0829 08A-14 363N100762 03B-4
115N100002A 08D-10 310Y100010A 08D-4 327N100314A 08A-5 334N100201B 04A-20 347S0911 10-11 363N100763 05D-6
115Y0041A 02B-7 313N100175C 09B-3 327N100315A 05A-1 334N100202 04A-5 348N100155C 08D-8 363N100764 05D-3
115Y0041A 08B-6 313Y100027 05A-10 327N100316A 05A-20 334N100203 04A-6 348N100156C 08D-6 363N100767B 08A-10
117Y100019A 08C-2.1 314N100058A 01A-4 327N100317A 05A-22 334N100204A 05D-12 348N100157B 08C-8 363N100768B 08A-8
117Y100020A 08D-2.1 314N100059B 01B-5 327N100318A 05B-12 334N100206 09A-9 348N100158B 08C-6 363N100769B 02A-1
117Y100021A 08C-2.2 314Y100018B 01A-5 327N100318A 05B-17 334N100207 09A-11 350N101287B 01C-1 363N100772 05C-4
117Y100022A 08D-2.2 314Y100019B 01B-4 327N100319 08C-5 334N100208 09A-10 350N101290A 01C-2 363N100773 05C-3
118SX202B 05A-19 316N100152 01B-6 327N100319 08D-5 334N100209 09A-12 350N101291C 01A-2 363N100775 05D-2
118SX208A 04A-15 316Y100071 04B-8 327N100320 04A-25 334N100210 09A-8 350N101292D 01A-10 363N100776 05D-7
118SX208A 08A-1 316Y100073 03B-11 327N100321A 04A-23 334N100214 09A-7 350N101293B 01B-3 363N100777 05D-8
118SX210 04A-21 316Y100075B 04B-11 327N100322A 04A-24 334N100216A 03A-7 350N101294A 01B-1 363N100779A 03B-1
118SX210 05B-9 317N100055 03B-5 327N100323A 05B-14 334N100216A 03B-8 350N101295C 01C-3 363N100781A 03B-3
118YA184A 06B-16 319N101336 08B-8 327N100324A 05B-13 334N100224 04B-12 350N101296B 01C-4 363N100783 05A-11
119S0096 10-3 319N101353 08A-7 327N100326A 05B-16 334Y100146 06B-2 350N101316A 06A-3 363N100798 03A-9
119Y100047 08A-16 319Y100086B 06B-14 327N100327 04A-16 334Y100147 05A-8 350N101318B 09B-4 363Y100253 03B-7
125N100032A/B 10-5 319Y100089 04A-19 327N100328 09A-2 334Y100166 05C-6 350N101325A 06A-1 366N100039 01A-6
128S0971 03A-1 322N100240A 09A-4 327N100329A 08B-4 335N100043A 04A-3 350N101326 05D-10 366S0006 02A-4
128S0987 02A-5 322N100241A 04A-9 327N100330 08B-5 335N100046 04A-13 350N101334A 10-6 366S0011 03A-2
128S1102 10-2 322N100241A 05B-2 327N100331 08B-2 339N100012A 06B-7 350Y100854B 08C-1 367S0135 02A-2
137S1350 10-15 322N100241A 05D-1 327N100332 08B-1 339N100013A 08A-13 350Y100855B 08D-1 367S0135 02B-3
137S1417 10-16 322N100241A 06B-9 327N100333A 08B-3 340N100098 05B-10 350Y101032 01A-1 371N100090 04B-10
137S1419 10-17 322N100244A 04A-7 327N100334 09A-1 340N100101A 03B-6 350Y101033 01A-9 375N100126 04B-7
137S1420 10-18 322N100245A 05A-12 327N100338A 05A-13 341N100287 05B-15 350Y101034 01B-2 376N100044 02A-6
137S1421 10-19 322N100246A 05A-9 327N100340 05B-4 341N100288 05A-16 355N100698A 05B-11 382N100323 01A-8
137S1423 10-20 322N100247A 05A-7 327N100341 08A-3 341N100289A 04A-10 356N103803 04B-3 386N100280A 06A-5
137S1459 10-21 322N100248 08A-11 327N100342 05D-11 341N100290A 04A-18 356N103818B 02B-6 386N100282 06A-2
146N0010A 03A-8 322N100251 05A-3 327N100344A 04A-11 341N100294 05C-7 356N103818B 08B-7 386S1115 02A-3
146S0029A 03A-5 322NF006 08C-7 327N100345A 04A-12 341N100295 05C-5 356Y100865 05A-21 386S1115 02B-2
146S0029A 04B-2 322NF006 08D-7 327N100346A 04A-14 341Y100104 04B-1 356Y100873C 04A-2 387N0165 09B-7
146S0029A 04C-1 322NY156 09A-3 327N100352 04A-22 342N100054A 05C-1 356Y100882 05A-23 388N100564 05B-6

SP-34
12

部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
388N100573 04B-5
388N100574 05A-18
388N100575 03A-3
388N100576A 05A-26
388N100584A 05D-9
388N100585A 03B-12
388N100588 05A-6
388N100589 06B-12
388N100590 06B-8
388N100593 01A-11
388N100598 04A-8
388N2081 09A-6
388Y100007 05A-2
392N100001 04B-9
393N100002D 01A-13
398N100015B 01A-12
398Y100017 01A-7
401N100124 06B-21
402N0020A 04B-6
405N101307 08A-15
405N101308 01A-3
802Y100031 08C-11.1
802Y100032 08D-11.1
802Y100033 08C-11.2
802Y100034 08D-11.2
839Y100057 07-1
898Y100667A 07-2
899Y100501 02A-7
899Y100502 02A-8

SP-35
13 13 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring Reference information
Symbol Parts code
l Screws, stopper rings, washers, nuts, wiring parts, etc. used in a large Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
number are provided as service parts. A2.6x16 Cross recessed Steel
pan head screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
A3x4
with spring washer chromating
l Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service A3x6 Color: Light white
parts. Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
A3x8
l The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for A3x15
converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used A4x8
in the service manual. A4x10
{SP:13_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table} A4x40

B2x5 Cross recessed Steel
2. Screws B2.5x5
pan head screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
with spring and chromating
B3x4 plain washers Color: Light white
l Iron screw treatment has been changed from chromate treatment to zinc
plating/white trivalent chromate treatment. B3x6
B3x8
l Chromate treated screws will be no longer provided for new models. B3x10
However, in some models already shipped, chromate treated screws will B3x12
continue to be supplied. Other screw treatments will be as usual.
B3x16
l The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are B3x18
described. This description method is the same as that in this Service B3x20
Manual. B3x30
B3x35
B4x8
B4x10
B4x30
B4x35
B4x45

SP-36
13

締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
Reference information Reference information

Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
BR3x6 308S0401 Cross recessed Steel *N2x4 301S2000204 Cross recessed Stainless steel
hexagon head Zinc plating/White trivalent pan head screw Passive state treatment
BR3x8 308S0402 *N2x10 301S2000210
screw with spring chromating
BR3x10 and plain washers Color: Light white *N3x6 301S2000306
BR3x12 308S0404 *N3x8
BR3x16 308S0405 *N3x10
BR3x32 *N4x10 301S2000410
BR3x35 PK2.5x3 Hexagon socket Steel
BR4x6 set screw with cup Black oxide treatment
PK3x10
point
BR4x8 308S0406 PK4x16
BR4x10 308S0407 PK6x5
BR4x12 308S0408 Ps3x6 306S0151 Hexagon head Steel
BR4x15 tapping screw for Zinc plating/White trivalent
resin chromating
BR4x16 Ps3x8 306S0152 Color: Light white
BR4x20
BR4x25 Q3x10 Hexagon socket Steel
head bolt Black oxide treatment
BR4x30 Steel Q3x12
Chromating Q4x6
BR4x35 308S9420435
BR4x40 308S9420440 Q4x8
BR5x10 308S9420510 Q4x10
BR5x12 308S9420512 Q4x12
BR6x12 308S9420612 Q4x14
DT3x6 306S0101 Hexagon head Steel Q4x30
deltight screw Zinc plating/White trivalent Q6x12
DT3x8
chromating
DT4x8 Color: Light white Q6x25
DT4x12 Q8x20
*S3x5 Cross recessed Stainless steel
flat head screw Passive state treatment
*S3x10

SP-37
13


Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
*T3x4 301S3000304 Cross recessed Stainless steel WP3x3 303S0101 Hexagon socket Steel
truss head screw Passive state treatment head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
*T3x6 WP3x4 303S0102
(double -point) treatment
*T3x8 301S3000308 WP3x5 303S0103
*T4x4 301S3000404 WP3x6 303S0104
*T4x5 WP3x8 303S0105
*T4x6 WP3x10 303S0106
*T4x8 WP4x4 303S0107
*T4x10 WP4x5 303S0108
*T4x12 WP4x6 303S0109
*T4x16 301S3000416 WP4x8 303S0110
*T4x25 WP4x10 303S0111
*T4x35 301S3000435 WP4x12 303S0112
TP3x6 308S0414 Cross recessed Steel WP4x16 303S0113
hexagon head TP Zinc plating/White trivalent
TP4x6 308S0416 WP5x5 303S0114
screw chromating
TP4x8 308S0424 Color: Light white WP5x6 303S0115
*V3x6 301S4000306 Bind screw Stainless steel WP5x8 303S0116
Passive state treatment
WP5x10 303S0117
*V3x10
WP6x6 303S0118
WP6x8 303S0119
WP6x10 303S0120

SP-38
13

3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
Reference information
Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
E3 E ring Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
E4
chromating
E6 Color: Light white
*E3 315S3050030 Stainless steel
Passive state treatment
*E4 315S3050040
*E6 315S3050060
KL4 K-CL ring Steel
chromating
KL6
Color: Light white
SW3 Spring washer Steel

SW4 chromating
SW12 Color: Light white
W3 Plain washer Steel

W4
chromating
W5 Color: Light white
W12
*W5 309S0120005 SUS304
Na3 Hexagon nut Steel
chromating
Color: Light white

SP-39
13

4. Wiring Parts
Symbol Parts code Approx. external Symbol Parts code Approx. external
Shape Parts name Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. dimensions (mm), etc.
EDS-0607U Cord clamp 14x9x4 (WxHxD) LAMS-05 Cord clamp 9x23x5 (WxHxD)
LWS-3S VO 316S1242 Cord clamp 13x10x29 (WxHxD)

LWS-3S-2W 15x13x2 (WxHxD)
EDS-17L Cord clamp 55x26x5 (WxHxD) VO
LWS-5S-2W 318S1130 15x18x2 (WxHxD)
VO
EDS-25L 316S2028 75x32x5 (WxHxD)
LWS-8S- 318S1195 15x25x3 (WxHxD)
2.5W VO
EDS-2 Cord clamp 20x10x5 (WxHxD) PCB-3S 316S0268 Cord clamp 15x13x7 (WxHxD)
FGC-8 Cord clamp 10x10x25 (WxHxD) SB-2718 318S1032 Cord clamp 35x26x6 (WxHxD)
SB-4025 316S0029 48x33x6 (WxHxD)
KFCS-3002 316S1244 Cable clamp 53x10x15 (WxHxD)

SNP-1-HSO Hose clamp 12x12x4 (WxHxD)
KGES-4 Cord clamp 11x20x10 (WxHxD)

T18R 316S1001 Cable tie 100x2.5 (LxW)
T30R 316S1002 152x3.5 (LxW)
T50R 316S1003 202x4.7 (LxW)

SP-40
13

5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table
Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols
used in this Service Manual.
n Screws
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
301S2000204 *N2x4 303S0105 WP3x8 Q4x14 A3x6 308S9420440 BR4x40
*N3x8 303S0108 WP4x5 Q6x25 A4x8 308S9420612 BR6x12
*N3x10 303S0109 WP4x6 Q8x20 A4x10 BR3x32
301S2000410 *N4x10 303S0110 WP4x8 306S0101 DT3x6 A4x40 BR3x35
301S3000304 *T3x4 303S0111 WP4x10 DT3x8 A2.6x16 BR4x6
*T3x6 303S0112 WP4x12 DT4x8 B2x5 BR4x15
301S3000308 *T3x8 303S0113 WP4x16 DT4x12 B3x4
301S3000404 *T4x4 303S0114 WP5x5 306S0151 Ps3x6 B3x6
*T4x5 303S0115 WP5x6 306S0152 Ps3x8 B3x8
*T4x6 303S0116 WP5x8 308S0401 BR3x6 B3x10
*T4x8 303S0117 WP5x10 308S0402 BR3X8 B3x12
*T4x10 303S0118 WP6x6 BR3x10 B3x16
*T4x12 303S0119 WP6x8 308S0404 BR3x12 B3x18
301S3000416 *T4x16 303S0120 WP6x10 308S0405 BR3x16 B3x20
*T4x25 PK3x10 308S0406 BR4x8 B3x30
301S3000435 *T4x35 PK4x16 308S0407 BR4x10 B3x35
301S4000306 *V3x6 PK6x5 308S0408 BR4x12 B4x8
*V3x10 PK2.5x3 BR4x16 B4x10
*S3x5 Q3x10 BR4x20 B4x30
*S3x10 Q3x12 BR4x25 B4x35
303S0101 WP3x3 Q4x6 308S0414 TP3x6 B4x45
303S0102 WP3x4 Q4x8 308S0416 TP4x6 B2.5x5
303S0103 WP3x5 Q4x10 308S0424 TP4x8 BR4x30
303S0104 WP3x6 Q4x12 A3x4 308S9420435 BR4x35

SP-41
13

n Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts n Wiring Parts

Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
Na3 SW3 315S3050040 *E4 316S0029 SB-4025 FGC-8 EDS-17L
309S0120005 *W5 SW4 315S3050060 *E6 KGES-4 316S1242 LWS-3S VO 318S1130 LWS-5S-2W VO
W3 SW12 E3 316S0268 PCB-3S 316S1244 KFCS-3002 LAMS-05
W4 KL4 E4 316S1001 T18R EDS-0607U LWS-3S-2W VO
W5 KL6 E6 316S1002 T30R 316S2028 EDS-25L 318S1195 LWS-8S-2.5W
VO
W12 315S3050030 *E3
316S1003 T50R SNP-1-HSO
EDS-2 318S1032 SB-2718

CONTROL SHEET

06.30.2009
01(1)
02
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0
All pages
4, 7, 22
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 4, 22
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1, 3, 6, 10, 14
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

PM-1
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Refer
to
Maintenance Work Intervals
Work time
(Min.)
Remarks
ITEMS 3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Clean-

ing Inside the Equipment
1Y 10 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth,
vacuum cleaner
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, 1Y 5 Clean with ethanol
<INSTRUCTIONS> Cleaning the Sub-scanning Con-
veyance Roller
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable
and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts 3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 1Y 3 Clean with ethanol using
Section cotton swab
with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining
screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon 3.11 Cleaning the Heat development 3Y 60 –
Unit
installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-
mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify • Heat plate Clean with ethanol
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. • Rubber roller Clean with ethanol
• Heat development unit periphery Vacuum cleaner
Installing the heat development 20 –
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items rack assembly
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers 1Y 5 –
Refer Work time
Maintenance Work Intervals Remarks • Reinstalling covers –
to (Min.)
Power ON 15 Stand-by switch • Reinstalling the cleaning roller Only equipment provided
with the optional cleaning
Starting the PC-Utility – Start during initialization roller.
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Er- 1Y 5 – • Cleaning covers Wet cloth
ror Logs
Power ON – –
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/ 1Y 5 –
Checking Images Starting the PC-Utility – –
• Grid pattern 3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking 1Y 15 –
Images
• Check density
• Grid pattern
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 1Y 10 –
• AUTO F. D. C.
• Front cover/Right cover
• Check Density
• Film tray
3.14 Setting Date and Time 1Y 1 –
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation 1Y 5 –
Power OFF – –
Ending the PC-Utility – –
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective 1Y 5 –
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 1Y 5 – Grounding
• Checking the traylock Check lock state 3.16 Replacing the Cutter 1Y 1 –
• Checking the traylock mechanism Check for shaking 3.17 Work Completion Report – –
Power OFF – –
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Clean- 1Y (3Y) 5 Only equipment provided
ing Roller (Option), Removing the with the optional cleaning
Cover roller.
Clean with ethanol after
washing. Replace every
three years.
3.7 Cleaning the Air Filter 1Y (2Y) 5 Vacuum cleaner
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-1

PM-2
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle
In this chapter, the following symbols are indicated for every maintenance item. Before
beginning the respective maintenance work, be sure to confirm the cycle indicated by
the symbols.
: Maintenance to be performed every year.
: Maintenance to be performed every three years.
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PM-2

PM-3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW
START A
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images 3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 3.14 Setting Date and Time
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation 3.15 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 3.16 Replacing the Cutter
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller (Option), 3.17 Work Completion Report
Removing the Cover
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter END
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the

Equipment
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning the Sub-

scanning Conveyance Roller
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit

PM-4
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs
Check whether errors have occurred using the PC-Utility of the PC for servicing (or
settings-changeable models). If errors have occurred, correct them appropriately. If
necessary, save the error logs as a file, and delete those error logs.
<REMARKS>
Although all errors which have occurred in the past are saved in the PC for servicing
(or settings-changeable models), check the log of errors which occurred after the
previous error log was deleted here.
n Procedure
l Checking Error Logs
1. Turn ON the power of the FM-DL 100, and PC for servicing (or settings-
changeable models).

{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations}
3. [Log data] → [Display Error Log]

→ The error log window appears.
4. Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have

occurred.
l Deleting Error Logs
1. [Log data] → [Clear Error Log]

2. [Execute]
→ Clears all log data.

PM-5
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking l 17-steps Pattern
Images The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is
displayed on the PC-Utility. Check from this data that the density value is within the
specification.
Print from each film tray using the PC-Utility (grid pattern, 17-steps pattern), and check 1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [Execute]
the recorded image format, density correction function, and there are no unevenness → The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
on the images and scratches. Also check that the mechanism and conveyor system displayed on the PC-Utility.
are operating normally during film conveyance.
n Procedure 2. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
below.
l Printing Grid Pattern
3. If several trays are used, check the density of all trays.
Print grid pattern from each film tray, and check the operations of the mechanism
system and conveyor system, recorded image format, and also check for unevenness Step Dmax 3.0
and scratches on the images.
1 fog
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state.
2. Insert the maximum size film tray. 3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07
3. [Output Film] → [Grid] 5 0.48±0.07
4. [Number of copies]: “1” → [Execute] 6 0.66±0.07

7 0.84±0.07
→ The grid pattern is printed.
8 1.02±0.07
5. Check the following. 9 1.20±0.07
• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
10 1.38±0.07
• If film jam has occurred.
11 1.56±0.07
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches. 12 1.74±0.07
{l Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)} 13 1.92±0.07
6. If using several film sizes, check the format for all film sizes. 14
15
2.10±0.09
2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11

PM-6
l Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 35 x 35 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0

PM-7
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 1. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
2. [ON] → [Execute]
Interlocks are provided at the front cover/right cover (SK1, SK2), and film loading unit → MG1 of the heat development unit drives.
(SA2).
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a cover while 3. Open the front cover.
executing the PC-Utility.
Check that the operating sound of the MG1 stops.
{MU:2.4 [10-4]_Interlock Function}
4. Close the front cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.
5. Return to the PC-Utility, open the film tray.

[Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators]
→ Film tray lock is released.
Check that the operating sound of the MG1 stops.

7. Turn OFF the tray lock solenoid.

[OFF] → [Execute]
8. Push the film tray into the equipment.

Check that the operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.
9. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]

10. [OFF] → [Execute]
→ MG1 stops.

PM-8
3.4 Checking the Fan Operation
Altogether operations of two fans need to be checked.

Check the operation and wind direction of the fans.

PM-9
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery
Check the traylock and traylock mechanism.
 Procedure
1. Click [Logout] button to end the PC-Utility

{MU:2.2.4_Disconnecting the Equipment}

3. Check that when the film tray is locked, it cannot be pulled out to the
front. With the film tray locked, pull the film tray forward and check
that the film tray interlock functions so that it cannot be pulled out,
and no error codes are displayed.
4. Release the tray lock, and remove the film tray.

5. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

PM-10
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller 2. Wash the cleaning roller removed using water or warm water.
(Option), Removing the Cover 3. Wipe the cleaning roller dry with a dry cloth.
4. Clean the cleaning roller with a cloth moistened adequately with
Inspect the cleaning roller (option), wash away dirt with water, and clean with absolute absolute ethanol.
ethanol.
Wiping with absolute ethanol helps vaporize the water remaining on the
<NOTE> cleaning roller.
• The cleaning roller is an option. Take note that roller provided as standard is
not cleaning rollers, and should not be cleaned with water.
5. Leave the cleaning roller to dry until the completion of maintenance
work.
• Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
6. Close the upper conveyance unit open/close guide.
<REMARKS>
The standard rubber roller and cleaning roller have different colors. 7. Remove the rear cover, left cover, upper cover, and film loading unit
• Standard rubber roller: Dark grey like other rubber rollers. cover.
• Cleaning roller: Black
 Procedure
1. Remove the cleaning roller.

PM-11
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter
Clean the air filter.

<NOTE>
Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
 Procedure
1. Remove the air filter attached to the lower right side of the equipment.
2. Clean the air filter using a vacuum cleaner.

3. Reinstall the air filter.
4. Close the right cover.

PM-12
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside 2. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.
the Equipment
Clean the suction cup and rubber roller of the removal unit, and clean inside the
equipment.
 Procedure
l Cleaning the Removal Unit
Clean the removal unit after removing the removal unit/film loading unit.
1. Move the gear assembly.

PM-13
3. Clean the suction cup and removal conveyance rollers (upper/lower)
with a cloth moistened with water.
l Cleaning Inside the Equipment
1. Remove the dusts and dirt in the equipment such as frame,

mechanism unit, and inside the controller section, etc. with a cleaning
cloth or vacuum cleaner, etc.
2. Check the inside of the mechanism unit visually, and clean if dirty.
3. Reinstall the removal unit/film loading unit.
4. Reinstall film loading unit cover, then insert the film tray to its original
position.

PM-14
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, 2. Clean the rubber belt with a cloth moistened with water.
Cleaning Sub-scanning Conveyance Roller
Check and clean the rubber belt, and clean the sub-scanning conveyance rollers.
 Procedure
l Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt
1. Remove the belt cover of the sub-scanning unit.
3. Clean the rubber belt at the rear side of the sub-scanning unit with a
cloth moistened with water.

PM-15
l Cleaning the Sub-scanning Unit Conveyance Roller 2. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing bracket.

PM-16

PM-17
4. Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
<REMARKS>
Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit along the slide guide holes on
and draw it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the

PM-18
5. Clean the sub-scanning unit conveyance rollers with a cloth
moistened with ethanol.
6. Return the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit to its original

position.
7. Reinstall the fixing bracket of heat development rack assembly (lower)

and heat development unit entrance guide.
8. Reinstall the belt cover.

PM-19
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section 3. Clean the light-receiving surface of the PDD board with a cotton swab
moistened with absolute ethanol.
Clean the density measurement section light-receiving surface.
 Procedure
1. Remove the film release unit cover.

2. Remove the film release unit upper guide bracket.
4. Reinstall the film release unit upper guide bracket, and ejection cover.

PM-20
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit 3. Clean the heat plate and rubber roller with a cloth moistened with
ethanol.
Clean the heat development unit heat plate and rubber roller.
CAUTION
Because the heat plate inside the heat development rack assembly is very hot,
wait more than 60 minutes after turning OFF the power of the equipment before
cleaning to allow the heat plate to cool down completely.
 Procedure
1. Remove the heat development rack assembly.

[MC:8.2_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
2. Remove the adiabatic cover and heater assembly from the heat
development rack assembly.
[MC:8.3_Heat Development Roller}
<NOTE>
Rubber rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development rack
assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
4. Assemble the heat development rack assembly.

<NOTE>
When installing the adiabatic cover, make sure that the cables do not get
caught.
5. Clean the periphery of the heat development unit of this equipment

with a vacuum cleaner.
6. Reinstall the heat development rack assembly to the heat development

unit.
<NOTE>
Make sure that the thermistor cable is not damaged by the screw with
grounding.

PM-21
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
Wipe covers with a moist cloth. Inspect the covers for missing screws and gaps with
the equipment.
 Procedure
1. Reinstall all covers.

2. Reinstall the cleaning roller.
3. Wipe the covers with a moistened cloth.
4. Check that no cover screws are missing and that there are no spaces
between the cover and equipment.
5. Insert the film tray into the equipment.

PM-22
3.13 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images l 17-steps Pattern
Print 17-steps patterns from each film tray, and check the density according to tone
type (Dmax.).
Perform final operation check after completing preventive maintenance by printing the
grid pattern and 17-steps pattern, and perform automatic density correction, and re-
1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [Execute]
check the format of the recorded image, density correction function, and check that → The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
there are no unevenness on the image and scratches. Also check that the mechanism displayed on the operation panel.
and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance.
{PM:3.2_Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images} 2. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
below.
 Procedure
3. If several trays are used, check the density of all trays.
l Printing Grid Pattern
Step Dmax 3.0
1. Turn ON the power of the FM-DL 100, and PC for servicing (or settings- 1 fog
changeable models).
2. Start the PC-Utility after the equipment is in the standby state. 3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.07
3. [Output Film] → [Grid] 5 0.48±0.07
4. [Copies]: “1” → [Execute] 6 0.66±0.07
→ The grid pattern is printed. 7 0.84±0.07
5. Check the following. 8

9
1.02±0.07
1.20±0.07
• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
10 1.38±0.07
• If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct. 11 1.56±0.07
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches. 12 1.74±0.07
{l Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)} 13 1.92±0.07
l Density Correction 14 2.10±0.09

15 2.40±0.09
1. [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.]→ [Execute] 16 2.70±0.11
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed, and automatic density correction is performed. 17 3.00±0.11

PM-23
3.14 Setting Date and Time
Check the system date and time, and reset the date and time if incorrect.
 Procedure
1. [System information and setup] → [Setting3] → [Set Date]

→ The current system date and time are displayed.
2. If the date and time are wrong, change the date and time.
3. End the PC-Utility, and turn OFF the power of the equipment.

PM-24
3.15 Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
1. Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.
2. Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
secured and connected in the same manner as for installation.
3. Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.

PM-25
3.16 Replacing the Cutter
Replace the cutter.

<NOTE>
Replace the cutter every year.

PM-26
3.17 Work Completion Report
After completing preventive maintenance, notify the user that the density tone curve
has changed because density correction was carried out.

PM-27
BLANK PAGE

CONTROL SHEET

06.30.2009
01(1)
02
Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0
All pages
5, 6, 10, 17, 28, 30-32, 35-39,
(supports multi modalities), etc) (FM5568) 39.1-39.6, 40, 41, 41.1, 41.2, 42, 43,
46, 47
08.13.2009 02 Revised (FM5585) 5, 6, 10, 17, 28-31, 31.1, 31.2, 32,
35, 37, 38, 39.1, 39.2, 39.4, 41, 46,
47
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 3, 6, 10, 16, 17, 20, 29-31, 31.1,
31.2, 37, 38, 39.1, 39.2, 46, 51
INSTALLATION (IN)

IN-1
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS  Weight
 Main Unit Only
1.1 Dimensions and Weight Approx. 85 kg
 Dimensions Approx. 110 kg
 Main Unit Only

610 mm x 630 mm x 620 mm (W x D x H)

610 mm x 630 mm x 1080 mm (W x D x H)
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-1

IN-2
1.2 Environmental Requirements  Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement
Frequency : 10 to 55 Hz
 Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure Amplitude : 0.0075 mm or less
 Floor Levelness
 Operating
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
Temperature : 15 ˚C (40%RH) to 30 ˚C (70%RH)
Relative humidity : 15%RH (30 ˚C) to 70%RH (30 ˚C) (No condensation)  Floor Flatness
10 mm or less
 Non-operating (not including film)

Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C
Relative humidity : 10 to 90%RH (No dew condensation)
 Transit or Storage
Temperature/Relative humidity : -10 (10%RH) to 50 ˚C (90%RH)
(No freezing/No condensation)
 Exhaust Air of Equipment

 Maximum Exhaust Air in Standby State
31.3 m3/hour
 Maximum Exhaust Air in Printing
63 m3/hour

IN-3
1.3 Electrical Requirements  Overload Protection
100/110/120 V ～ : 15 A
 Frequency 200/220/230/240 V ～ : 10 A
50-60 Hz n Power Cable

 Line Voltage l For U.S. and Canada
100/110/120 V ～ • Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
200/220/230/240 V ～ • Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
Acceptable variation: ±10% • Cable Type: SJT
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines) • Cable length: 3 m or less
<REMARKS>
l For U.S. Only
The mark “ ～ ” means AC power supply. • Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
 Capacity • Hospital Grade Plug
1.2 kVA l For Canada Only
 Rated Current • Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
100/110/120 V ～ : 12 A
200/220/230/240 V ～ : 6 A • Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21.
 Power Consumption l For Europe

Maximum 1.5 kW
 Electric Energy • Cable wire diameter: 1.0 mm2 or larger, 3-conductor
Printing : Approx. 350 Wh • Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher
Ready : Approx. 180 Wh • Rated amperage: 6 A
Power saving mode : Approx. 60 Wh • Cable type: H05VV-F
 Maximum Heat Generation
Printing : Approx. 1300 kJ  Network Cable
Ready : Approx. 700 kJ
{IN:6.1_Connecting the Network Cable}
 Grounding Resistance
100 Ω or less
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-3

IN-4
1.4 Other Specifications 1.5 Equipment Installation Space
 Noise 1.5.1 Installation Space

Printing : Approx. 50 dB (excluding transient noises)
Ready : Approx. 45 dB  When Not Fixed with Fixtures
 Start-up Time Front: More than 800 mm
Approx. 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C) Left: More than 50 mm
 When Fixed with Fixtures

1.5.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work

<REMARKS>
To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.

Top: More than 400 mm

IN-5
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW
START
A
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
3.1 Precautions on Installation 5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing 5.2 Setting Film Tray
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts 5.2.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
3.4 Specifications of Installation Table 5.2.2 Changing the Film Tray Size
3.5 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 5.2.3 Setting the Tray Number
3.5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option)
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)
4.1 Carrying 6. CONNECTING CABLES
4.2 Unpacking and Unloading 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body 6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or
Settings-Changeable Models) to the Network
4.3 Checking Components
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
A B
IN-6
B C
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings-changeable models) 8.2 Checking Density
7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) Settings (When Connecting 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL) and Scratches
7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 8.3a Check when Using Multiple Film Trays
674/CR-IR 355V CL (When using CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL) 8.4 Checking the Interlock Function
7.4 Power ON 8.4.1 Checking the Front Cover/Right Cover Interlock
7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility) 8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock
7.6 System Settings 8.5 Checking Fan Operation
7.6.1 Setting 1 8.6 Image QC Function
7.6.2 Setting 2 8.7 Power OFF
7.6.3 Setting 3 9. CHECKING CONNECTION
9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment

7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software
(to Support Multi Modalities)
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
7.8 Rebooting the Equipment
9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment
7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment Only)
C D
IN-7
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data
10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
10.3 Installing the Equipment
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using Fixtures
10.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing with Fixtures
10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
END

IN-8
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION n Prevention of Condensation
When transporting an equipment to a hospital from outdoors where the temperature
is low such as cold regions, condensation may occur inside the equipment. Take
3.1 Precautions on Installation precautions against the following to prevent this condensation.
• Transport the equipment indoors without removing the vinyl packaging wrapping the
The machine installation site must satisfy the “n Installation Site Requirements” below. equipment body. However, the cardboard boxes can be removed outdoors as this
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work, will not cause condensation.
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation. • After transporting indoors, refer to the following table and wait until the equipment
Note that UL/TÜV is not effective when used as mobile type because usage of this settles to the indoor temperature, and then remove the vinyl.
equipment as mobile type has not been applied for with UL/TÜV-PS. • Install the equipment, touch the metal portions such as guide plates, etc. and check
that no condensation has occurred, and then turn ON the power.
n Installation Site Requirements • If the vinyl is accidentally removed outdoors, wrap the equipment up in the vinyl
Avoid the following installation sites. tightly again before transporting indoors.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.
<REMARKS>
• Places near heat sources such as heaters.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. The following table shows the approximate time to wait before removing the vinyl after
transporting the equipment into a room with 50% humidity.
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas.
Extend the waiting time shown if the indoor humidity is high. If humidity is low, the
• Dusty places. waiting time can be shortened.
• Places where the equipment is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
Example: Humidity 70%→Increase waiting time by 40%
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight. Humidity 30%→Decrease waiting time by 30%
External temperature
Indoor
temperature
10ºC 5ºC 0ºC -5ºC -10ºC -15ºC -20ºC
30 70 110 140
10ºC - - -
minute minute minute minute
30 70 110 140 175
15ºC - -
minute minute minute minute minute
30 65 100 135 170 205
20ºC -
minute minute minute minute minute minute
30 60 100 130 170 200 240
25ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute
60 100 130 165 200 235 270
30ºC
minute minute minute minute minute minute minute

IN-9
n Power Cable n Additional Protective Grounding
Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. This
l For U.S. and Canada installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor facility construction.
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
room” are given below.
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A
• Cable Type: SJT l Patient Environment
• Cable length: 3 m or less Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
l For U.S. Only 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1 It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
• UL-listed detachable power supply cable l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
l For Canada Only grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21. grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
If hospital grade disassemble type - complying with CSA C22.2, No.42. used room.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21. Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l For Europe l Non-Medically Used Room

• Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1 Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
n Network Connection
• Rated voltage: 250 VAC or higher As the equipment needs to be connected to the network, prepare network materials
and parts and complete constructions beforehand.
Prepare the network materials and accessories according to the place of installation
• Cable type: H05VV-F as they are not designated parts.
n Board and Optical Unit Handling Precautions
Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards
and optical unit.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
boards and optical unit.

IN-10
3.2 Preparing the PC for Servicing
The various settings and operations of this equipment are performed using PC-Utility.
The PC-Utility can be executed on the screen of the browser (Internet Explorer) of the
PC for servicing or settings-changeable models (CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-
VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL (FM-DL 100 with main unit
software version V2.1 or later only)) connected via the network to the equipment.
To execute the PC-Utility using the PC for servicing, prepare the PC for servicing
beforehand.
{MU:2.1_Preparations for Using the PC for Servicing}
To execute the PC-Utility on settings-changeable models without using the PC for
servicing, there is a need to complete setup of settings-changeable models before
installing the equipment.
■ Outline of Connection

IN-11
3.3 Embedding Anchor Nuts l Drilling Holes for Embedding Anchor Nuts
To secure the equipment or cart on the floor with fixtures, embed the anchor nuts
beforehand.
n Position of the Anchor Nuts to Be Enbedded

l Position of the Cart Fixture Bracket (Two positions)
l Embedding Anchor Nuts

<NOTE>
• Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
• Push in to a depth where the top of the anchor nut does not protrude out.
n Example of Embedding Procedure

CAUTION
Wear a protective goggle when using a drill.
<NOTE>
Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
<REMARKS>
Before drilling a hole, move the cart to the place of installation, and mark the locations
to be drilled.

IN-12
3.4 Specifications of Installation Table 3.5 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves
When placing the equipment on the table, check that the table satisfies the following
questions. 3.5.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
• Weight tolerance of table: Above 255kg This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical
• Specified torque of screws for installing: M5 (27 kgcm or 2.65 Nm) devices to the IEC 60601-1-2 Ed2.1: 2004, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
M10 (220 kgcm or 21.6 Nm) These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a typical medical installation.
l Hole Positions when Securing Equipment to the Table using Fall This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
Prevention Fixtures (Four Positions)
to other devices in the vicinity.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device.

• Increase the separation between the equipment.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.

IN-13
n Further Information for IEC60601-1-2 Ed2.1: 2004 Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity
• Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
follows.
• Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical Electromagnetic
Immunity test IEC 60601test level Compliance level environment -
equipment. guidance
• The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be
parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased (ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or ce-
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8kV air ±6kV contact ramic tile.
immunity of the FM-DL 100. If floors are covered
±2kV air with synthetic materi-
List of Cables ±4kV air al, the relative humid-
FUJIFILM ±8kV air ity should be at least
Name General specification 30%.
parts code
I/F Cable - TIA/EIA-568 Cat 5E or more. Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
Straight cable of UTP type. transient/burst lines lines should be that of a
IEC 60950/UL 60950 standard. IEC 61000-4-4 ±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or
lines lines hospital environment.
• The FM-DL 100 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. Surge ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality
IEC 61000-4-5 should be that of a
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the FM-DL 100 should be observed to verify ±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or
normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used. hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The power supply input hospital environment.
customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 should assure that it is used in such an environment. lines 40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the
IEC 61000-4-11 (60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) FM-DL 100 requires
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance for 5 cycles for 5 cycles continued operation
during power mains
RF emissions The FM-DL 100 uses RF energy only for its 70 % UT 70 % UT interruptions, it is rec-
CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions (30% dip inUT) (30% dip in UT) ommended that the
Group 1
are very low and are not likely to cause any for 25 cycles for 25 cycles FM-DL 100 be pow-
interference in nearby electronic equipment. ered from an uninter-
RF emissions < 5 % UT < 5 % UT ruptible power supply
Class A (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) or a battery.
CISPR 11
The FM-DL 100 is suitable for use in all es- for 5 s for 5 s
Harmonic emissions tablishments other than domestic and those
Class A Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency mag-
IEC 61000-3-2 directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings (50/60 Hz) magnetic netic fields should be
Voltage fluctuations/ used for domestic purposes. field at levels characteristic
flicker emissions Complies IEC 61000-4-8 of a typical location in
IEC 61000-3-3 a typical commercial
or hospital environ-
ment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

IN-14
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment and the FM-DL 100
The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 should assure that it is used in such an environment. The FM-DL 100 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the FM-DL 100 can help prevent elec-
Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance tromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test test level level communications equipment (transmitters) and the FM-DL 100 as recommended below, accord-
ing to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
IEC 61000-4-6 equipment should be used no closer to any Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
150kHz to part of the FM-DL 100, including cables, than output power of m
80MHz the recommended separation distance cal- transmitter
culated from the equation applicable to the W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MH to 2.5 GHz
frequency of the transmitter. d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3
Recommended separation distance 0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
80MHz to 1 1.2 1.2 2.3

d = 1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz
2.5GHz 10 3.8 3.8 7.3
d = 2.3 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
100 12 12 23
where P is the maximum output power rat-
ing of the transmitter in watts (W) according For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separa-
to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the tion distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency
recommended separation distance in metres of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
(m). according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range ap-
as determined by an electromagnetic site plies.
survey,a should be less than the compliance NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
level in each frequency range.b fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of

equipment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) tele-
phones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broad-
cast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environ-
ment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If
the measured field strength in the location in which the FM-DL 100 is used exceeds the appli-
cable RF compliance, the FM-DL 100 should be observed to verify normal operation. If ab-
normal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting
or relocating the FM-DL 100.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.

IN-15
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 4.2 Unpacking and Unloading
CAUTION
4.1 Carrying The weight of this equipment is approximately 85 kg. Take the following
precautions when moving the equipment, etc.
CAUTION • To prevent injuries resulting in back pain, pay attention to your posture during
the work.
When moving the equipment over any bumps, move it slowly to avoid shock. • Be careful not to drop the equipment as this may cause serious injuries.
• When lifting up the equipment, lift at the position shown in the following
1. Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to figure, hook fingers to the equipment firmly and then lift.
the installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation
site, move any obstacle out of the way at the delivery entrance, in corridors
and corners. Also make sure that the elevator is made available to move the
equipment.

IN-16
4.2.1 Equipment Main Body 3. Remove the separately packaged items.
1. Cut the band and remove the cardboard box.
2. Remove the protective material covering the equipment main body.
4. Remove the equipment from the vinyl.

<REMARKS>
Remove the vinyl after checking that the equipment has adapted to room
temperature.
{IN:3.1_Precautions on Installation n Prevention of Condensation}

IN-17
4.3 Checking Components n Options
No. Product Code Parts No. Remarks
n Equipment Main Body DPX PRIMA TRAY = E Film tray 898Y100546 Initial setting:
35x43 cm size
Name Qty. Remarks
DPX PRIMA CLEAN- Cleaning roller 334Y0097 -
Equipment main body 1 - ING ROLLER E
DPX PRIMA CART = E Cart 888Y100004 -
n Accessories
DPX PRIMA FLOOR Fall prevention fixture kit 898Y100545 For earthquake-proof
No. Name Qty. Remarks FIX KIT = E fixing
1 Cutter 1 - DPX PRIMA AC CORD Power cable for U.S.A. 136Y9138 -
2 Guide pin 1 - UL E
3 Cap 1 - DPX PRIMA AC CORD Power cable for EU 136N0449 -

EU E
4 Fuse 1 1A
DPX 2000 AC CORD Power cable for U.K. 136N0450 -
5 Fuse 1 1.6A
UK E
6 Fuse 1 -
DPX PRM CT MR Modality Connection Soft- 898Y100624 CD-ROM
7 Fuse 1 2A CONNECT KIT E ware
8 Fuse 1 3.2A
9 Fuse 1 5A
l Additional Film Tray
10 Fuse 1 10A No. Name Qty. Remarks
11 Screw (BR3x10) 2 - 1 Film tray 1 Film size setting: 35x43 cm size
12 Nut (Na3) 2 - 2 Screw 2 -
13 Operation manual 1 - 3 Nut 2 -
14 CD 1 Individual data CD 4 Cap 2 -
15 CD 1 Main unit software CD 5 Guide pin 2 -
16 Label 2 EC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002 6 Shutter 1 -
class 3B panel label #2 7 Label 1 Film size label
17 Label 1 Film size label
18 Reference Guide 1 CD l Cleaning Roller
19 Quick Guide 1 No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Cleaning roller 1 -

IN-18
l Cart
No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Cart 1 -
2 Fixture 2 For securing the equipment
3 Screw (B5x12) 8 -
4 Fixture 2 Fall prevention fixture
5 Grip anchor 2 -
6 Hexagonal hole bolt (M8x20) 2 -
7 Washer (W8) 2 -
8 Spring washer (SW8) 2 -
9 Tie band 8 Spare x1
l Fall Prevention Fixture Kit

No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Fixture 2 Same for left and right
2 Bolt (BQ5x16) 4 -
3 Hexagonal bolt (M10x30) 4 -
4 Nut (Na10) 4 -
5 Washer (W10) 4 -
6 Spring washer (SW10) 4 -

IN-19
5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES
AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
1. Remove the rear cover and left cover.

2. Release the tray lock using slotted screwdriver.
<NOTE>
When manually unlocking the traylock, because the plate inside the rear
cover cannot be removed, the inside of the equipment will not be visible as
shown in the figure. Press the manual release arm as shown in the figure.
The manual release arm can be unlocked just by moving the tip of the
screwdriver lightly.
3. Pull out the film tray.

IN-20
4. Remove the tape securing the shutter, and pull out the shutter. 8. Remove the tape and open the right cover.
<REMARKS>
Insert the removed shutter into the base of the equipment.
5. Remove the tape securing the lower squeezing roller.

9. Remove the tape securing the magnet catch (two locations).
6. Insert the cap.

7. Install the left cover and rear cover.
10. Close the right cover.

IN-21
5.2 Setting Film Tray
This equipment can only be inserted with one film tray. By using spare film trays, up to
five film sizes can be used.
<REMARKS>
The optional film tray packaged with the equipment at shipment is set to 35 x 43 cm.
5.2.1 Affixing the Film Size Label
1. Affix the label of the film size used on the film tray.

IN-22
5.2.2 Changing the Film Tray Size l Attaching Positions of Guide Plate and Guide Pin
To change the film size set at shipment (35 x 43 cm size), the attaching position of the
guide plate and guide pin in the tray.
1. Change the installed position of the guide plate and guide pin in the
film tray according to the film size used.
<NOTE>
The guide plate and guide pin are secured with the nut (Na3) from the bottom of
the tray.
Attaching positions of guide plate and guide pin
l Removing/Reinstalling the Guide Plate

IN-23
5.2.3 Setting the Tray Number n Film Sizes Corresponded to Actuator Installing Position
The size detection actuator detects the size of films loaded on the film tray as a result
of the film size detection sensors (SA3 to SA5) attached to the equipment detecting
the attached position of the actuator.
<NOTE>
Do not attach the actuator at the same position for several film trays, as this
means that several same size trays exist, disabling the remaining number of
films from being displayed correctly.
1. Change the attached position of the tray detection actuator according

to the film size used.
2. Insert the film tray into the equipment.

IN-24
5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option) 5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)
1. Open the front cover, then open the right cover. 1. Open the card board box, remove the cart and accessory box.
2. Open the upper conveyance unit open/close cover, install the optional
cleaning roller.
<REMARKS>
At shipment, the equipment will be attached with a rubber roller instead of a
cleaning roller.
The rubber of the cleaning roller is black and that of the rubber roller is gray.
3. Close the upper conveyance unit open/close cover, right cover, and
front cover.

IN-25
2. Place the equipment on the cart. 4. Adjust the position of the equipment so that the screw hole on the cart
bracket meets the screw hole on the cart top cabinet.
3. Temporarily secure brackets to the left and right sides of the <REMARKS>
equipment.
Align the left, right and rear covers of the equipment to the left , right and rear
sides of the top plate of the cart.

IN-26
5. Secure the equipment with screws.

IN-27
6. CONNECTING CABLES 2. Connect the network cable to the network cable connector.
<NOTE>
6.1 Connecting the Network Cable Use the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T cable (UTP: Unshielded type)
for the network cable.
CAUTION
Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
equipment. Only IEC60950/UL60950 specification cables are suitable for
connection to this connector.
1. Check that the main power switch of the equipment is at OFF position
(O).
3. Connect the network cable of the equipment to the network in the

hospital.

IN-28
6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or
Settings-Changeable Models) to the
Network
1. When using the PC for servicing, connect the network cable of the PC
for servicing to the network to which the equipment is connected.
2. If not using the PC for servicing, check that settings-changeable

models is connected to the network to which the equipment is
connected.

IN-29
6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking CAUTION
the Resistance If the eqiupment is to be installed in the patient environment, see “APPENDIX 1
ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING”
n Power Cable Information {IN:APPENDIX 2_ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE GROUNDING}
<NOTE>
1. Connect the power cable to the equipment.
If the power cable is not packed together with the equipment, be sure to use a power
cable that complies with the requirements stated below. CAUTION
Do not connect the power plug to the outlet at this point.
n Power Cable
Use a power cable that complies with the requirements stated below. 2. Secure the power cable with the clamp.
l For U.S. and Canada 3. Set the main power switch of the equipment to ON ( I ).
• Cable wire diameter: 16 AWG or larger, 3-conductor
• Rated voltage: 125 VAC or higher 4. Using the tester, measure the resistance between the terminals of the
• Rated amperage: minimum 15 A power plug or power cable.
• Cable Type: SJT
l For U.S. Only

l For Canada Only

• Plug: If molded on type – hospital grade complying with CSA C22.2, No.21.
• Cable: Complies with CSA C22.2 No. 21. Terminal L-N L-E N-E
Resistance 10 kΩ or more ∞Ω ∞Ω
l For Europe
•
•
Label for receptacle grounding reliability according to UL60601-1
Cable certified by a country in which the equipment is to be installed
5. Set the main power switch of the equipment to OFF (O).
• Cable type: H05VV-F

IN-30
7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT 4. [Make]
7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder

Create the storage folder for various data of the equipment.
servicing (or settings-changeable model).
<REMARKS>
and start it.
→ Data strage folder is created and the [Success.] screen appears.

<REMARKS>
• Data strage folder:
“Any drive letter”:\Program Files\Fujifilm\DRYPIX\DPXPRIMA\Printers\Establish
name_Printer name
• The data storage folder contains the following three empty folders:
• “Indv” folder: Location for storing individual data
• “Log” folder: Location for storing log data
• “Operation” folder: Location for storing equipment operation data
2. Enter the FTP site root directory at [Input drive]. 5. [OK]

{MU:2.1.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
3. Enter [Establish name] and [Printer host name].

IN-31
7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings- 2. [Set]
changeable models)
Settings required for connecting settings-changeable models (CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR
391V CL/ CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL/CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL) to the printer can
be added using the PC-Utility.
<NOTE>
This setting must be performed using the main unit software CD-R with main
unit software version V2.1 or later.
<REMARKS>
The following settings are added:
• IIS setting (creating virtual directory of FTP server)
• Windows user account: dryprinter (password: fujifilm)
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of the
settings-changeable model.
<REMARKS>
→ [Success.] screen appears.
and start it. 3. [OK] → [EXIT]

IN-31.1
7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART PC) 2. Click the [Install] button.
Settings (When Connecting CR-IR 391CL/ → [Success] appears.
CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V <REMARKS>

For CD-R containing main unit software version V2.0 or earlier, installing the
CL) DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool also executes the following settings required for
connecting the printer to the CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR
FM-DL 100 does not have a display for showing messages, hence it cannot display
355V CL.
the equipment status. However, if CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, or CR-VW 674/CR-
• IIS setting (creating virtual directory of FTP server)
IR 355V CL is connected, installing the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) in
CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL will enable film size, • Windows user account: dryprinter (password: fujifilm)
remaining number of films, and messages to be displayed on the CR-IR 391CL/CR-
IR 391V CL, or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL monitor. The power of this equipment can
also be set to go OFF with CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V 3. [OK]
CL when shut down by selecting [Close] from the CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or
CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL study list. 4. Enter the IP address of the equipment.
Install the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool as follows.
<NOTE>
5. Select the language for the languages to be displayed on CR-IR 391CL/
CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL.
If not installed as instructed below, installation will not complete normally.
6. [Set]
<REMARKS> → The [Success] screen appears.
CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL is unable to use the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool.
Consequently, when connecting CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL, there is no need to 7. [OK] → [EXIT]
install the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool.
1. Load the main unit software CD-R into the CD-ROM drive of CR-IR
391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL.
<REMARKS>
and start it.
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual IN-31.1

IN-31.2
n Main Unit Software Version V2.0 or Earlier n Main Unit Software Version V2.1 or Later
<REMARKS>
• After completing installation, reboot CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW
674/CR-IR 355V CL. The following icon will be displayed on the taskbar.
• The DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) is installed in C: \Program Files\

FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC.
• The ART-PC log folder is created at the following position. (Hidden folder for
V1.3 or later)
• V1.2 or earlier : C: \Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
• V1.3 or later (Windows XP) : C: \Document and Settings\All Users\
Application Data\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC
• V1.3 or later (Windows Vista) : C: \ProgramData\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC

IN-32
7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 2. Click on the [Exceptions] tab and click [Add program].
391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL (When
using CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW
674/CR-IR 355V CL)
If the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool has been installed, firewall settings are required.
1. Click [Control Panel] → [Windows Firewall].

2. Click [Change settings].
3. If [ART-PC] appears in the [Programs or port] list, select it and click

[OK]. If not in the list, selected [Browse], specify “C:Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX\ART-PC\ART-PC.exe”, and click [OK].

IN-33
4. Check that the [ART-PC.exe] checkbox is selected.
5. Click [Add port].
6. Enter the desired name at [Name], and enter [20053] at [Port number].
7. Click [OK].

IN-34
7.4 Power ON <NOTE>
Normally, leave the main power switch at ON.
Start the equipment.
1. Connect the power plug to the outlet. 3. Press the stand-by switch on the operation panel.
2. Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ).
→ “888” appears on the operatoin panel.
→ The pilot lamp on the operation panel lights up. The equipment will not have
started up at this point.

→ When startup completes, the number of films remaining is displayed on the
operatoin panel.

IN-35
7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC- 3. Enter the following username and password, select the language and
click [Login].
Utility)
Login: dryprinter
Connect the communication of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) Password: fujifilm
to the equipment.
<REMARKS>
Operation of the PC-Utility:
{MU:2.2_Flow of PC-Utility Operations}
1. Start Internet Explorer on the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable

models).
2. Enter the following address in the address bar, and then press the
<ENTER> key on the key board.
→ The PC-Utility starts and the maintenance tree is displayed.
http://172.16.1.30 (default IP address of this equipment):20051/USER/Login.htm
<NOTE>
When entering the address, discriminate between upper and lower cases.
→ The login screen is displayed.
→ When PC-Utility starts, [oFL] is displayed on the operation panel of the

equipment.

IN-36
7.6 System Settings 7.6.1 Setting 1
Using the PC-Utility, perform the following system settings of the equipment. Skip <INSTRUCTIONS>
items which can be left at their default values when operating the equipment. Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network
administrator of the installation site.
*DRYPIX PRIMA
┣ +System information and setup
┃　┣ Setting1 n AE Title
┃　┃　┣ Check Version
┃　┃　┣ Input Serial No. Set the name of the printer (fixed at 16 digits) used in the DICOM protocol.
┃　┃　┣ Set DICOM <DEFAULT>
┃　┃　┣ Set Network
┃　┃　┣ Display Mac address “DRYPIX”
┃　┃　┣ Registration service pc <REMARKS>
┃　┣ Setting2
┃　┃　┣ Set Rem.Films • If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
┃　┃　┣ Set Tray remaining number of digits.
┃　┃　┣ Enable QC • Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh in
┃　┃　┣ Set Target Den. the 1-byte code table.
┃　┃　┣ Printing Dmax • The following are not accepted.
┃　┃　┣ Auto F.D.C. • All spaces
┃　┃　┣ Set Film infomation
• Space for the first digit
┃　┃　┣ Display indv. data
┃　┣ Setting3
┃　┃　┣ Set SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
┃　┃　┣ Set Date
n Port No.
┃　┃　┣ Ele Save Mode Set the port number (decimal/5 digits) used for the network.
┃　┃　┣ Set Alarm
┃　┃　┣ Set Power Supply Synchronization (V2.0 or later) <DEFAULT>
┃　┃　┣ Reboot “17238”
┃　┃　┣ Film Characteristic ID
┃　┃　┣ Power Supply Voltage <NOTE>
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
• 23 : Telnet port
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port
• 20051, 20052 : PC-Utilityport
<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 65535

IN-37
n IP Address n Host Name
Set the IP address (decimal) used for the network. Set the host name (maximum 16 digits) used for the network.
<DEFAULT> <NOTE>
“172.16.1.30” Set the host name entered at “7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder” of the
Installation (IN) section.
<REMARKS>
{IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder}
• Values cannot be entered in the following way.
<DEFAULT>
• “000.000.000.000”
• “255.255.255.255” “fujiprinter”
• No value is entered. <REMARKS>
• Characters which can be entered for the host name include alphabets (upper and
lower case), numerals, and hyphen “-”.
n Subnet Mask • The following are unaccepted.
Set the subnet mask (decimal) used for the network. • Space
<DEFAULT> • Less than 2 characters
• First character is a number
“255.255.0.0”
<REMARKS>
n Display Mac address
• If no value is entered, it will be unaccepted. The MAC address of the CPU board is displayed.
<DEFAULT>
n Gateway “255.255.0.0”
Set the gateway address (decimal) used for the network. <REMARKS>
<DEFAULT> To connect CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL or CR-IR
346CL/CR-IR 348CL, there is a need to register the Mac address, IP address, and
“0.0.0.0” hostname using the FF-WakeOnLAN Utility of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW
<REMARKS> 674/CR-IR 355V CL or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL.
{ CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL, CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR
• Input range: 000 to 255 348CL Service Manual (MC Appendix)}
• Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as incomplete
setting.

IN-38
n Registering the PC for Servicing (or Settings-Changeable 7.6.2 Setting 2
Models)
n Set Tray
Register the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) to enable file transfer.
Any unregistered PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is limited in Set which film size tray is used.
function and does not support “Transfer Indv. Data” and “File Transfer” of PC-Utility. <REMARKS>
<REMARKS>
As all film sizes can be used in the default setting, set the unused film size to “OFF”.
Only one PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) can be registered. Only the
one registered last supports file transfer.
<Parameter>
• [14x17]/[14x14]/[10x14]/[10x12]/[8x10]
1. Select [Registation service pc] in the maintenance tree. • [ON]/[OFF]
2. In [Establish Name], enter the establish name entered in “7.1 Creating <DEFAULT>
the Data Storage Folder”.
All [ON]
<DEFAULT> n Enable QC
“Hospital Name”
Set whether to enable/disable the image QC function. In order to use the image QC
{IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder} function using U-Utility, this setting must be set to “Enable”.
<NOTE>
<Parameter>
Use one-byte alphanumeric when entering establish name.
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
3. In [Service PC IP Address], enter the IP address of the current PC for
servicing (or settings-changeable models). [ON]
<DEFAULT> n Set Target Den.

“172.16.1.20” Set the density of each step wedge used when recording the image QC pattern of
U-Utility.
<REMARKS>
Default IP address of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL/CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL/ <DEFAULT>
CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL: “172.16.1.20” [Density 1: 48, Density 2: 120, Density 3: 192]
n Printing Dmax
4. [Execute] Set whether to enable/disable the “density 4” step wedge for density measurement in
→ The PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) is registered with the the QC test pattern of U-Utility.
equipment.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[OFF]

IN-39
n Auto F.D.C. 7.6.3 Setting 3
Select the timing for executing automatic density correction.
■ Set SMPTE (V2.0 or later)
<Parameter>
Command for setting parameters for outputting SMPTE test patterns using U-Utility.
[off]/ [every pack]
<Parameter>
<DEFAULT>
No. : [1] to [5]
[every pack] AE Title
Image Matrix : [1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
n Set Film information LUT Number : [LUT 1] to [LUT 8]
Set the position of the information to be printed on the film. Interpolation type : [SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
Interpolation algorithm/method : [NONE]/[CUBIC]
<Parameter>
<DEFAULT>
[Upper Left]/ [Upper Right]/ [Lower Left]/ [Lower Right]
1 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
<DEFAULT> 2 default 1 LUT 1 SHARP CUBIC
[Upper Left]
n Set Date
Set the system date and time.
n Ele Save Mode

Set the timer value when this equipment shifts into the sleep mode.(unit: minute)
<Parameter>
[0]/ [15]/ [30]/ [45]
<DEFAULT>
[15]
n Set Alarm
Set whether to enable/disable the operation panel beep.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[ON]

IN-39.1
n Set Power Supply Synchronization (V2.0 or later)
Command for setting the power of this equipment to go OFF at the same time the
power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is turned OFF.
<REMARKS>
This is a function of the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool. When connecting CR-IR 346CL/
CR-IR 348CL, this setting is not required as the DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool is not
installed.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [OFF]
<DEFAULT>
[ON]
n Power Supply Voltage

Set the voltage of the power to which the equipment is connected.
<Parameter>
[ON]/ [110V]/ [120V]/ [200V]/ [220V]/ [230V]/ [240V]
<DEFAULT>
[100V]
<REMARKS>
The default value of the 200V model is “200V”.

IN-39.2
7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software 2. Click the [Copy] button.
(to Support Multi Modalities) → [Success] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
The modality connection software needs to be installed in this equipment (with
software version V2.0 or later) so that it can support multi modalities. The [Input drive] and [Make or delete directory] of the [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
screen have the same functions as “Creating data storage folder”.
1. Load the modality connection software CD-ROM into the CD-ROM {IN:7.1_Creating the Data Storage Folder}
drive of the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable model).
→ ”DRYPRICopyTool.exe” starts automatically and the [DPX PRIMA Copy Tool]
screen appears. 3. [OK]
<REMARKS> 4. Remove the modality connection software CD-ROM.
If it does not start automatically, double-click “DRYPRICopyTool.exe” in the CD-
ROM. 5. Execute [Upgrading] of the PC-Utility.
*DRYPIX PRIMA
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data
┣ +Client Configuration
┣ +File Transfer
┣ +Upgrading
┃　┣ Full Install
┃　┗ Upgrading
<REMARKS>
There is a need to reboot the equipment after installing the modality connection
software.


IN-39.3
7.8 Rebooting the Equipment
Rebooting the equipment enables various system settings changed.
1. Select [Reboot] on the PC-Utility.

*DRYPIX PRIMA
┃　┣ Setting1
┃　┣ Setting2
┃　┣ Setting3
┃　┃　┣ Set Date
┃　┃　┣ Ele Save Mode
┃　┃　┣ Set Alarm
┃　┃　┣ Reboot
┃　┃　┣ Film Characteristic ID
┃　┃　┣ Power Supply Voltage
2. [Reboot] → [Execute]
→ After “System off. Please close this page” appears in the PC-Utility window,
close the window.
→ [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
is currently being carried out.
The equipment will reboot after about 75 seconds.

IN-39.4
7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment 2. Close the logout window after the logout screen shows “It logged out
from the printer. Please close this page.”
1. After rebooting the equipment, click the [Logout] button of the
maintenance tree.
→ The equipment performs reinitialization and [oFL] disappears.

→ PC-Utility terminates and the logout window opens indicating [Now logging
out from the printer. Please wait.].
<REMARKS>
If the PC-Utility was ended by clicking , the logout screen will not be
displayed unless the pop-up blocked setting of the browser is canceled.
3. Reboot the PC-Utility.

4. Check that “DRYPIX PRIMA maintenance tree with Multi-Modality” is
displayed on the menu tree of the PC-Utility if the modality connection
software has been installed.

IN-39.5
7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment n Protocol
Bold: Default
Only) Item Function Value
Set parameters for the connected client using PC-Utility. Attribute list error Send error message for unexpect- 0: not indicate
Set the items according to the corresponding client settings in “Modality Connection (0107H Warning) ed data received or ignore warn- 1: indicate
List”. ing
N Event Report RQ Send event report or not 0: disable
<NOTE> 1: enable
The default values for client parameters listed below are the values for a newly Attribute Value Out Of Send error message for out-of- 0: not indicate
registered client and differ from the default values set for “default”, “FCR-CSL”, Range (0116H Warning) range data received or ignore 1: indicate
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, and “QC-TEST”. warning
Image Size Is Larger Than Notify that images have been 0: not indicate
imagebox reduced if too large to fit image 1: indicate
1. Newly register the client according to the installation environment. (B604H Warning) frame, or ignore warning
DRYPIX PRIMA Change Film Size Change film or not

　┣ +System information and setup Enables film change. Can set 0: 0116H[W]
　┣ +Transfer Indv. Data whether to send details of error
　┣ +Client Configuration Details of errors are sent to the 272: 0110H[F]
client, without changing film
　┃　┣ Add Client
Details of errors (unique values 21317: 5345H[F]
　┃　┣ Delete Client for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to
　┃　┣ Change Client Name the client,without changing the
　┃　┣ +Clients film
　┃　┃　┣ default Use System Timeout Set timeout of reception from cli- 0: No
　┃　┃　┣ FCR-CSL ent or not 1: Yes
　┃　┃　┣ WatchDRYPIXLink Presentation LUT Use LUT information sent from cli- 0: No
ent or not 1: Yes
　┃　┃　┗ QC-TEST
Precede Picking Up Use precedent removal function 0: No
　┃　┣ Common
or not 1: Yes
　┃　┗ ********
Use Max/Min Density Which minimum density/maximum 0: Printer
density value is to be used. 1: Modality
2. Set the various parameters according to the client setting list shown Extension Format ID Select ID for differentiating when CR (XG-1/CR-Console)
below.For details of each feature, refer to “Service Mode (MU) 4.4 PC- extension format is used CR (Synapse)
Utility Command Details [PC3] Client Configration”. EV (Philips Easy Vision)
HM (Hitachi DR2000/Clavis
MU:2.4 [3]_Client Configration} view)
SM (Siemens)
Use Default Annotation Use Annotation or not 0: No
1: Yes
Change Base Color Change base color or not 0: disable
(Disable:110H[F]) 1: enable
Define Film Size of 11x14 Whether to interpret 11x14 size 0: 27.9x35.6
description as 25.7x36.4 cm or as 1: 25.7x36.4
27.9 x 35.6 cm
(The latter size is not used cur-
rently)

IN-39.6
n Magnify n LUT Common
Bold: Default Bold: Default
Item Function Value Item Function Value
Smoothing Type Selection of smoothing type 1: Sharp Default LUT Selection of LUT number used as 1 - 8 (1)
2: Medium default
3: Smooth
Illumination Lighting 0 - 65535 (2000) *1
Default Requested Magnification/reduction setting if 1: DECIMATE
Ambient Light Reflected peripheral light 0 - 65535 (10) *1
Decimate/Crop Behavior client does not send information 2: CROP
when images are reduced 3: FAIL Configuration Information Which LUT number is to be used 0: Printer
(Default LUT#) 1: Modality
Magnification Type Set the image enlargement/reduc- 0: NONE
tion processing type 1: CUBIC Default Illumination Which lighting setting is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality
Requested Image Size Specify the length of line to be 0 - 7000 (0)
printed on the image for one Default Ambient Light Which reflected peripheral light is 0: Printer
frame to be used 1: Modality
Default Magnification Type Which enlargement/reduction pro- 0: Printer Procedure Selection of tone correction pro- 0: SAR
cessing type is to be used 1: Modality cessing method 1: BAR
Default Smoothing Type Which smoothing type is to be 0: Printer
used 1: Modality *1: The Illumination and Reflective Ambient Light setting value total must be less than 4000.
Default Requested Image Which Requested Image Size is 0: Printer n LUT1 to LUT8
Size to be used 1: Modality
Bold: Default
Default Decimate/Crop Which Decimate/Crop Behavior is 0: Printer
Behavior to be used 1: Modality Item Function Value
Procedure Selection of enlargement/reduc- 0: A-VR Max Density Maximum density value (x100 for 0 - 300
tion processing method 1: SSM SAR, BAR is % value) (BAR: 0 - 100) *2
Edge Detection Perform enlargement/reduction 0: OFF Min Density Minimum density value (x100 for 0 - 300 *2
processing for edge or not 1: ON SAR, No setting for BAR)
Detection Level Edge detection level setting 1 - 1023 (600/800/600) γTable No Selection of γ table number of 11 - 99 (BAR: 1 - 10)
LUT *2, *3
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment parameter -70 - 300 (130/30/80)
setting Contrast Contrast setting (x100, No setting (BAR: 10 - 400) (100)
for SAR)
Character Color Character color setting 0: White
1: Black Number of Tuning Points No. of fine adjustment points for 0 - 5 (0)
SAR
Density Setting of x100 of density value to 1 - 300 (120)
be finely adjusted
Shift Setting of x100 value of move- -100 - 100 (0)
ment density value
Contrast Setting of x 100 of contrast of 10 - 400 (100)
points to be finely adjusted
*2: The default value differs in LUT1 to LUT8.

*3: Up to 20 can be entered for BAR but enter between 1 and 10.

IN-40
n Output Format Item Function Value
Bold: Default Margin between Image Setting of image frame intervals 0 - 50 (20)
Item Function Value (Unit: pixel)
Film Size Setting of default film size 1: 8x10 Image Layout Setting of image layout method
2: 10x14 Positioning to film center 0: concentration
3: 14x14
4: 14x17 Center of remaining segment set 1: spread
5: 10x12 with frame interval value
Medium Type Setting of default film base color 1: Blue Processing Type Setting of density processing cal- 0: Type1
0: Clear culation method 1: Type2
Film Orientation Setting of film orientation 1: PORTRAIT Image Crop UPDWN Area Specifies whether the top or bot- 0: Upper
2: LANDSCAPE for CR Image tom is to be trimmed from a CR 1: Lower
image that is larger than the im- 2: Both
Border Density Background density (x100 of ac- 0 - 300 (300) age box.
tual value)
Image Crop Side Area for Specifies whether the left or right 0: Left
Polarity Reverse the black/white of the im- 1: Normal CR Image is to be trimmed from a CR image 1: Right
age 2: Reverse that is larger than the image box. 2: Both
Trim Whether there is image trim 0: OFF
1: ON n Annotation
Trim Width Width of the trim (pixels) 1 - 9 (1) Bold: Default
Trim Density Image trim density (x100 of actual 0 - 300 (0) Item Function Value
value)
Upper Left/Upper Center/Up- Setting of annotation position, and
Number of Copies Default number of print copies 1 - 99 (1) per Right/Lower Left/Lower entering
Print Priority Setting of print priority 1: HIGH Center/Lower Right
2: MEDIUM
3: LOW n Common
Default Number of Copies Which number of printed film is to 0: Printer Bold: Default
be used 1: Modality Item Function Value
Default Print Priority Which Print Priority is to be used 0: Printer Data Transfer Timeout Standby time setting when data is 30 - 3600 (300)
1: Modality suspended
Default Medium Type Film base color priority 0: Printer (Becomes error when setting time
1: Modality is exceeded)
Default Film Orientation Film orientation priority 0: Printer Association Count Maximum number of accesses to 1 - 10 (10)
1: Modality the equipment at the same time
by DICOM communication
Default Film Size Film size priority 0: Printer
1: Modality Logging DICOM DICOM communication log level 0: none
setting 1: normal
Default Border Density Which background density is to be 0: Printer 2: detail
used 1: Modality
Model Printer manufacture model name DRYPIX
Default Trim Which Trim setting is to be used 0: Printer
1: Modality Manufacturer Printer manufacturer name FUJIFILM Corporation
Defalut Polarity Which Polarity setting is to be 0: Printer Default Client Whether to use or not the [default] 0: Yes
used 1: Modality setting of the [Client:] list for un- 1: No
registered clients
Mirror Setting of film back/front 0: OFF (Normal)
1: ON (Mirror)

IN-41
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT 7. [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.] → [Execute]
OPERATIONS → The 24-steps pattern is printing on film, and automatic density correction is
performed.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction At the same time, check that film conveyance operations are normal.
and Conveyance Operations

Output the 24-steps pattern for each tray, and perform automatic density correction
for each tray according to the density data measured by the density measurement
section.
At the same time, check that there are no problems in film conveyance from each tray.
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state, and insert the
shutter into the film tray.
2. Press the [ENTER] button on the operation panel and pull out the film
tray.
3. Release the shutter lock and pull out the shutter.
4. Return the film tray back into the equipment.

<NOTE>
Do not push in until the tray locks.
5. Load the film, push in the film tray, and pull out the film pack.
IN-41.1
8.2 Checking Density
The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is
displayed on the PC-Utility. Check from this data that the density value is within the
specification.
1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [Execute]

2. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
below.
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
displayed on the PC-Utility.
Step Dmax 3.0

1 fog
4 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11

IN-41.2
BLANK PAGE

IN-42
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for 8.3a Check when Using Multiple Film Trays
Image Unevenness and Scratches If using multiple film trays, check each tray as described below.
Print grid patterns from each tray, and check that the recording image format is 1. Insert the tray shutter.
within the specifications shown in the following figure. Also check that there are no
unevenness and scratches on the output film. 2. Press the [Enter] button to release the tray lock.
1. [Output Film] → [Grid] → [Number of copies]: “1” → [Execute] 3. Replace the tray.
→ The grid pattern is printed.
2. Measure the recording image format of the film. 4. Perform the check procedures of 8.1, 8.2, and 8.3.
{IN:APPENDIX 1_SPECIFIED VALUE FOR EACH FILM SIZE} 5. Perform these checks for all trays.
<REMARKS>
If the recording image format is out of the specifications, perform “Adjusting Main
Scanner”.
{MU:2.4 [8-1]_Adjusting Main Scanner}
3. Check that there are no problems in the output film image.

IN-43
8.4 Checking the Interlock Function 8.4.1 Front Cover, Right Cover Interlock Check
Executing [Inter Lock Check] of the PC-Utility starts MG1 drive and scanner test.
Interlocks are provided at the front cover/right cover (SK1, SK2), and film loading unit Open the front cover during the MG1 drive and scanner test at this point to make sure
(SA2). MG1 and the LD being scanner tested stop, which indicates that the interlock function
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening the cover is working.
while executing the PC-Utility.
{MU:2.4 [10-4]_Interlock Function} 1. [Check Mechanism] → [Inter Lock Check]
2. [Execute]
→ MG1 drive and scanner test start.
3. After drive starts, open the front cover within 10 seconds.
l Driving System
Check that the MG1 drive sound stops.
l Scanner System
Check that the following error messages are displayed on the PC-Utility.
Command incompleted.
Error Code : 512
Error Detail : 0
<REMARKS>
• Error code “512” occurs when the front cover is opened while scanner test is
being executed.
It means that when the cover is opened, the interlock operates normally, and
the scanner stops,
• If the front cover is opened more than 10 seconds after MG1 drive starts,
“Command completed.” will be displayed as scanner test has been completed.
4. Close the front cover.

IN-44
8.4.2 Checking the Film Tray Interlock 8.5 Checking Fan Operation
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray. The fans whose operations need to be checked are heat development unit cooling fan
(FANG1) and power supply unit cooling fan.
2. [Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators] Check that the fan is operating and that the fan direction is appropriate.
4. Pull the film tray.
5. [OFF] → [Execute]
7. [Execute]
Check that no operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.

8. Push the film tray.

Check that operating sound of the MG1 can be heard.

→Check that the MG1 drive sound stops.
<REMARKS>
The interlock check operation stops in 30 seconds.
10. Pull out the shutter.

IN-45
8.6 Image QC Function 8.7 Power OFF
If the image QC function is set to “enable”, and if additional film tray is installed or the Shut down the equipment once.
film tray size is changed, enter the format baseline value of the image QC function.
{“DRYPIX PRIMA Reference Guide”} 1. Select [Reboot] on the PC-Utility.
<REMARKS> 2. [Shutdown] → [Execute]
Format baseline values by film size (Allowable range: 5%) → [End] is displayed on the operation panel. [End] means termination processing
35 x 43 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 406.0 mm is currently being carried out.
26 x 36 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm
→ “System off. Please close this page.” is displayed on the PC Utility.
25 x 30 cm: Format A; 202.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm
20 x 25 cm: Format A; 156.0 mm, Format B; 202.0 mm 3. Close the PC-Utility.

IN-46
9. CHECKING CONNECTION 9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
n When Connecting CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL/CR-VW 674/CR-

9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment IR 355V CL
1. Turn ON the power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL, CR-VW 674/CR- 1. Turn OFF the power of CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-
IR 355V CL, or CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL. If not set to simultaneous IR 355V CL. If not set to simultaneous power OFF, press the standby
power ON by WakeOnLan, press the standby switch on this switch of this equipment for five seconds.
equipment.
2. Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
2. Check that the equipment starts up. goes OFF.
9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from n When Connecting CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL
Connected Equipment As the power of this equipment and that of CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL are not linked,
the two systems must be terminated individually.
<NOTE>
1. Output images from a divice on the network connected to this Terminate this equipment first. The logs of this equipment will be saved in CR-
equipment, and check that films are output normally.
IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL.
Check the following. The logs of this equipment will not be saved if CR-IR 346CL/CR-IR 348CL is
• Images are output without errors. terminated first.
• Images are normal.
1. Press the standby switch of this equipment for five seconds.
2. Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
goes OFF.
3. Shut down the CR-IR346CL/CR-IR348CL system.

IN-47
10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT 10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at
Installation
10.1 Backing Up Individual Data Check if errors have occurred during installation using the PC-Utility, then save the
errors in the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) as necessary, and
Save individual data as backup data immediately after installation in the PC for delete then error logs.
servicing (or settings-changeable models). <REMARKS>
<REMARKS>
• Log data is send to the PC for servicing (or settings-changeable models) at the
Data strage folder: FTP root directory\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers/Establish name_Printer following conditions.
name\Indv • When CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL is shut
down
*DRYPIX PRIMA • When equipment data is transmitted
┣ +System information and setup • Data strage folder: FTP root directory\DRYPIXPRIMA\Printers/Establish name_
┃　┣ Setting1 Printer name\Log
┃　┣ Setting2
┃　┣ Setting3
┃　┣ +Initialize
┃　┣ +Log data
┣ +Transfer Indv. Data

IN-48
10.3 Installing the Equipment 10.3.2 Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing
with Fixtures
Move the equipment to the place of installation to enable use by the user.
Perform the following installation work.
1. Place the equipment on a table meeting weight-tolerance conditions.
• If placing the equipment without fixing on the floor
{IN:3.4_Specifications of Installation Table}
{IN:11.3.1_Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using Fixtures}
• If securing the equipment on the table 2. Secure the equipment with fall prevention fixtures and bolts.
{IN:11.3.2_Installing the Equipment on the Table and Securing with
Fixtures}
• If securing the cart on the floor
{IN: 11.3.3_Securing the Cart with Fixtures
10.3.1 Installing the Equipment on the Floor without Using

Fixtures
1. Ensure the required installation space around the equipment.
2. Move the equipment to the desired place of the user.

IN-49
10.3.3 Securing the Cart with Fixtures <REMARKS>
As an anti-earthquake measure, tighten the anti-earthquake measure fixture
1. Move the equipment to the position for embedding the anchor nuts. using the adjustable foot.
2. Rotate the two adjustable foots of the equipment with the hand and
ground to the floor.
3. Rotate the lower nut of the adjustable foot with a spanner and adjust
the height.
Rotate the two nuts equally. Adjust the amount the nut is adjusted so that even
load is applied to the adjustable foot.

<NOTE>
Rotate the nut until the caster distances from the floor.
4. Rotate the upper nut of the adjustable foot and push against the cart
to secure.
5. Secure the power cable and network cable to the cart using the tie
band.

IN-50
10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
1. Clean all covers with a moist cloth.

IN-51
APPENDIX 1. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR
EACH FILM SIZE
(Unit: mm)
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0

IN-52
APPENDIX 2. ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE n Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations
GROUNDING
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. additional protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. standard of the country to which the equipment is to be installed.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
for additional protective grounding” on the next page. 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle connection of additional protective grounding.
electrical facility construction. 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital
room” are given below. grade earth terminal.
l Patient Environment 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply
from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.

IN-53
BLANK PAGE

CONTROL SHEET

06.30.2009 02 Revised (For main unit software V1.3, V2.0 1
FM-DL 100 SERVICE MANUAL 08.13.2009 02

Revised (FM5585) 1, 2
10.26.2009 03 Revised (FM5606) 1-3
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

PC-1
INSTALLATION OF THE FM-DL 100 - Checklist
Checklist  3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
 4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the  4.3 Checking Components
values determined at the time a FM-DL 100 is installed at a site. This document is not
intended to replace the installation checklist located in the FM-DL 100 Service Manual  5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND INSTALLING OPTIONS
but to be followed concurrently.  5.1 Removing Shipping Fixtures
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image (from section 8 on) after service as well as at installation.  5.2 Setting Film Tray
 5.3 Installing the Cleaning Roller (Option)
Installation Information  5.4 Installing the Cart (Option)
 6. CONNECTING CABLES
Serial Number : ___________________ Software Ver. : ____________________
 6.1 Connecting the Network Cable
Site Name : ___________________ Installed by : ____________________  6.2 Connecting the PC for Servicing (or Settings-Changeable Models) to the
Network
Site Number : ___________________ Signature : ____________________
 6.3 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking the Resistance
Room Number : ___________________ Date Completed : ____________________ • Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and N : ________Ω
Resistance between L and E : ________Ω
Resistance between N and E : ________Ω
 7. SETTINGS OF THE EQUIPMENT

 7.1 Creating the Data Storage Folder
 7.1a FTP Server Settings (Only settings-changeable models)
 7.2 DRYPIX PRIMA Monitor Tool (ART-PC) Settings (When Connecting CR-IR
391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR 355V CL)
 7.3 Setting the Firewall in CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR
355V CL (When using CR-IR 391CL/CR-IR 391V CL or CR-VW 674/CR-IR
355V CL)
 7.4 Power ON
 7.5 Connecting to the Equipment (Starting PC-Utility)
 7.6 System Settings
 7.6.1 Setting 1
 7.6.2 Setting 2
 7.6.3 Setting 3
020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-1

PC-2
 7.7 Installing the Modality Connection Software (to Support Multi Modalities)
 7.8 Rebooting the Equipment
 7.9 Disconnecting the Equipment
 7.10 Client Settings (Multi Modality Equipment Only)
 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS

 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
• Check for film jamming  Pass  Fail
 8.2 Checking Density
• Record density value displayed:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
Step Dmax 3.0 35x43 tray 35x35 tray 26x36 tray 25x30 tray 20x25 tray
1 fog
4 0.30±0.07
5 0.48±0.07
6 0.66±0.07
7 0.84±0.07
8 1.02±0.07
9 1.20±0.07
10 1.38±0.07
11 1.56±0.07
12 1.74±0.07
13 1.92±0.07
14 2.10±0.09
15 2.40±0.09
16 2.70±0.11
17 3.00±0.11

PC-3
 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and Scratches
• Check for image unevenness and scratches:  Pass  Fail
• Measure recording image format:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
Specified values 35x43 tray 35x35 tray 26x36 tray 25x30 tray 20x25 tray
B 27.0 ±1.5 27.0 ±1.5 32.3 ±1.5 51.1 ±1.5 25.5 ±1.5
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 150.0 ±1.2
D, E 14.5 ±1.0 26.5 ±1.0 27.5 ±1.0 25.8 ±1.0 26.0 ±1.0
| D–E | ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0 ±1.2 325.2 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
 8.4 Checking the Interlock Function

 8.5 Checking Fan Operations
 8.6 Image QC Function

PC-4
 9. CHECKING CONNECTION Summary Test:  Pass  Fail
 9.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment  Leave the final film at the customer site.
 9.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
 9.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
 10. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
 10.1 Backing Up Individual Data Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
 10.2 Checking Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
 10.3 Installing the Equipment
 10.4 Cleaning the Equipment
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-4

PC-5
BLANK PAGE
020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual PC-5

FM-DL100 E03 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FM-DL100 E03 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FUJI MEDICAL DRY LASER IMAGER

Copyright © 2008, 2009 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

Document No. 020-201-03E

n Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

1. All rights are reserved by the FUJIFILM Corporation (FUJIFILM).

020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.1

n Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration

1.5 Machine Names Described in This Manual

1.6 Multi Modality Equipment

020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.2

1. SAFETY PRECAUTION.................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-1

2. LABELS......................................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-5

4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS... SAFETY PRECAUTION-13

5. CLASSIFICATION........................ SAFETY PRECAUTION-13

020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.3

020-201-01(1)E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.4

DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT................................... MD-1 3.2 Removal Unit...........................................................................MD-20

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.5

4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL....... MD-31

5. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................ MD-40

6. PRINTING FORMATS......................................... MD-46

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.6

1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD........................... MT-1

2. ERROR CODE................................................... MT-1.1

3. ERROR CODE TABLE........................................ MT-1.8

4. ACQUIRING ART-PC LOGS................................ MT-62

020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.7

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, REPLACEMENTS, 4. REMOVAL UNIT................................................. MC-22

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.8

6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT....................................... MC-50 10. CONTROLLER.................................................... MC-79

9. FILM RELEASE UNIT......................................... MC-76

020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.9

SERVICE MODE (MU)

1. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY)................................MU-1 2.3 PC-Utility Menu Tree...............................................................MU-17

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.10

[1-4] Initialize.............................................................................. MU-25 [3-5-2] Magnify................................................................... MU-38

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.11

[3-5-5] Output Format......................................................... MU-47 [4] File Transfer................................................................................. MU-59

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.12

[9] Heat-Developer............................................................................ MU-68

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.13

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

How to Use Service Parts List..................................SP-1 06A SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1...................................SP-17

INDEX.........................................................................SP-2 06B SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2...................................SP-18

01A COVER 1............................................................SP-3 07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT................................SP-19

01B COVER 2............................................................SP-4 08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1.........................SP-20

01C COVER 3............................................................SP-5 08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2.........................SP-21

02A FRAME 1............................................................SP-6 08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3.........................SP-22

02B FRAME 2............................................................SP-7 08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4.........................SP-23

04A REMOVAL UNIT 1............................................SP-10 10 CONTROLLER..................................................SP-26

04B REMOVAL UNIT 2............................................SP-11 11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM..........................................SP-27

04C REMOVAL UNIT 3............................................SP-12 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE..........................SP-33

020-201-02E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.14

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS................. PM-1 3.17 Work Completion Report......................................................... PM-26

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW.................. PM-3

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE............................. PM-4

020-201-03E FM-DL 100 Service Manual 0.15

1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS.............................. IN-1 5. REMOVING SHIPPING FIXTURES AND

1.3 Electrical Requirements..............................................................IN-3 5.2 Setting Film Tray.......................................................................IN-21